MGS-6320-8HP2X - Switch Planet - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Managed L2+ Gigabit PoE+ Switch with 10G Uplinks
Model	MGS-6320-8HP2X
Ports	8 x 10/100/1000Base-T PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at), 2 x 10G SFP+ slots
PoE Budget	250W total (up to 30W per port)
Switching Capacity	56 Gbps
Forwarding Rate	41.66 Mpps
MAC Address Table	16K entries
Management	Web GUI, CLI (Telnet/SSH), SNMP v1/v2c/v3, RMON
Layer 2 Features	VLAN (802.1Q up to 4K), STP/RSTP/MSTP, Link Aggregation (LACP), IGMP Snooping
QoS	8 priority queues, IEEE 802.1p, DSCP
Security	802.1X, ACL, MAC-based filtering, DHCP Snooping, ARP Inspection
Dimensions (W x D x H)	440 x 200 x 44 mm (rackmountable)
Weight	3.2 kg
Power Supply	100-240V AC, 50-60Hz, internal
Power Consumption	Maximum 310W (with PoE)
Operating Temperature	0°C to 50°C
Humidity	5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Cooling	Internal fans, airflow from side to side
Mounting	Rackmount kit included
LED Indicators	Per port: Link/Activity, PoE status; System: Power, Master
Warranty	3 years limited hardware warranty

Frequently Asked Questions - MGS-6320-8HP2X Planet

How do I access the web-based management interface?

Connect your computer to one of the switch ports. Set your computer to an IP in the same subnet as the default IP of the switch (typically 192.168.0.100). Open a web browser and enter http://192.168.0.100. The default username is admin and password is admin (blank on some models).

What is the maximum PoE power budget?

The total PoE power budget is 250W. Each port can deliver up to 30W (IEEE 802.3at).

Can I use SFP+ modules for 10GbE uplinks?

Yes, the two SFP+ slots support standard 10GbE modules (e.g., SFP-10G-SR, SFP-10G-LR). They also support 1GbE SFP modules for backward compatibility.

How do I reset the switch to factory defaults?

Press and hold the Reset button on the front panel for about 10 seconds using a paper clip, then release. The switch will reboot with factory settings.

Does the switch support VLAN trunking?

Yes, it supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging. You can create up to 4K VLANs and configure trunk ports to carry multiple VLANs.

What is the default IP address and credentials?

Default IP is 192.168.0.100, subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Default username admin, password admin (or blank).

How can I update the firmware?

Download the latest firmware from Planet's support website. In the web GUI, go to 'System' > 'Firmware Upgrade', choose the file, and click 'Upgrade'. Do not power off during the process.

The PoE devices are not getting power. What should I check?

Ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 250W. Verify that the PoE budget is correctly allocated. Check if the port PoE setting is enabled in the management interface. Also verify the power supply and cable quality.

Can I mount the switch in a 19-inch rack?

Yes, the switch is 19-inch rackmountable. It comes with mounting brackets and screws for standard racks. Ear height is 1U.

What is the operating temperature range?

The switch operates from 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F). Ensure adequate ventilation in the rack to maintain proper cooling.

USER MANUAL MGS-6320-8HP2X Planet

Blue industrial network switch device with multiple Ethernet ports and indicator lights (no visible text or labels)

User's Manual

L3 Gigabit/10 Gigabit Managed Switch

GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch Series

Man in white shirt and tie using laptop in server rack (no visible text or symbols)

Trademarks

Copyright © PLANET Technology Corp. 2022.

Contents are subject to revision without prior notice.

PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp. All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.

Disclaimer

PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications, and makes no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User's Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred.

Information in this User's Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User's Manual. PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User's Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to this User's Manual and/or to the products described in this User's Manual, at any time without notice.

If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would appreciate your comments and suggestions.

FCC Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

CE Mark Warning

This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.

Energy Saving Note of the Device

This power required device does not support Standby mode operation. For energy saving, please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit. In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption, it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active.

WEEE Warning

To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.

Revision

PLANET GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Series User's Manual

Models: GS-6320-8P2X, MGS-6320-8HP2X, MGS-6320-8T2X

Revision: 1.0 (March, 2022)

Part No: EM-GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Series_v1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION.... 13

1.1 Packet Contents .... 13
1.2 Product Description....14
1.3 How to Use This Manual....18
1.4 Product Features....19
1.5 Product Specifications ....22

2. INSTALLATION .... 31

2.1 Hardware Description ....31

2.1.1 Switch Front Panel ....31
2.1.2 LED Indications ....33
2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel 36

2.2 Installing the Switch....37

2.2.1 Desktop Installation 37
2.2.2 Rack Mounting....38
2.2.3 Installing the SFP/SFP+ Transceiver....39

3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT 43

3.1 Requirements ....43
3.2 Management Access Overview....44
3.3 Administration Console....45
3.4 Web Management....46
3.5 SNMP-based Network Management....47
3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility ....47

4. WEB CONFIGURATION.... 49

4.1 Main Web Page ....51
4.2 System....53

4.2.1 Management....54

4.2.1.1 System Information....54
4.2.1.2 IP Configuration....55

4.2.1.3 IP Status....57

4.2.1.4 ARP 58

4.2.1.5 Users Configuration....58

4.2.1.6 Privilege Levels....61

4.2.1.7 NTP Configuration....63

4.2.1.8 Time Configuration 64

4.2.1.9 Time Configuration ....66

4.2.1.10 UPnP 67

4.2.1.11 CPU Load....69

4.2.1.12 System Log 70

4.2.1.13 Detailed Log ....71

4.2.1.14 Remote Syslog....72

4.2.1.15 SMTP Configuration....73

4.2.2 SNMP....74

4.2.2.1 SNMP Overview....74

4.2.2.2 System Configuration....75

4.2.2.3 System Information....76

4.2.2.4 SNMP Trap Configuration....76

4.2.2.5 Source....79

4.2.2.6 SNMPv3 Communities 81

4.2.2.7 SNMPv3 Users....82

4.2.2.8 SNMPv3 Groups 84

4.2.2.9 SNMPv3 Views....85

4.2.2.10 SNMPv3 Access....86

4.2.3 RMON 87

4.2.3.1 RMON Alarm Configuration....87

4.2.3.2 RMON Alarm Status 89

4.2.3.3 RMON Event Configuration....90

4.2.3.4 RMON Event Status....91

4.2.3.5 RMON History Configuration....92

4.2.3.6 RMON Statistics 92

4.2.4 DHCP Relay 94

4.2.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay 94

4.2.4.2 DHCPv4 Relay Statistics....95

4.2.4.3 DHCPv6 Relay 97

4.2.4.4 DHCPv6 Relay Statistics....97

4.2.5 DHCP server 98

4.2.5.1 Mode 98

4.2.5.2 Excluded IP 100

4.2.5.3 Pool 100

4.2.5.4 Statistics....101

4.2.5.5 Binding 103
4.2.5.6 Declined IP....104

4.2.6 Remote Management....105

4.2.6.1 Remote NMS Configuration....105

4.3 Switching ....107

4.3.1 Port Management....107

4.3.1.1 Port Configuration ....107
4.3.1.2 Port Statistics Overview....109
4.3.1.3 Port Statistics Details....110
4.3.1.4 Port Mirror 112
4.3.1.5 Name Map....114
4.3.1.6 DDMI 115
4.3.1.7 DDMI Over View....115
4.3.1.8 DDMI Detailed 117

4.3.2 Link Aggregation....118

4.3.2.1 Common....119
4.3.2.2 Groups....121
4.3.2.3 Static Aggregation 122
4.3.2.4 LACP Configuration....123
4.3.2.5 LACP System Status....125
4.3.2.6 LACP Internal Port Status ....126
4.3.2.7 LACP Neighbor Port Status....127
4.3.2.8 LACP Port Statistics 128

4.3.3 VLANs 129

4.3.3.1 VLAN Overview....129
4.3.3.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN....130
4.3.3.3 VLAN Port Configuration 133
4.3.3.4 VLAN Membership Status 138
4.3.3.5 VLAN Port Status ....140
4.3.3.6 SVL....142

4.3.4 VLAN Translation....143

4.3.4.1 Port to Group Configuration....143

4.3.5 VLAN Translation Mappings....145

4.3.5.1 VLAN Translation Mappings....145

4.3.6 Private VLANs....147

4.3.6.1 Private VLAN Configuration....147
4.3.6.2 Port Isolation 148

4.3.7 VCL 150

4.3.7.1 MAC-based VLAN 150
4.3.7.2 IP Subnet-based VLAN 151

4.3.7.3 Protocol-based VLAN....152
4.3.7.4 Protocol-based VLAN Membership 154

4.3.8 GVRP 155

4.3.8.1 GVRP Configuration....156
4.3.8.2 GVRP Port Configuration 157

4.3.9 MRP 158

4.3.9.1 Port Configuration ....158
4.3.9.2 MVRP Global Configuration 159
4.3.9.3 MVRP Statistics....160

4.3.10 Spanning Tree 161

4.3.10.1 Theory 161
4.3.10.2 System Configuration....167
4.3.10.3 Bridge Status....169
4.3.10.4 CIST Port Configuration ....170
4.3.10.5 MSTI Priorities....173
4.3.10.6 MSTI Configuration....174
4.3.10.7 MSTI Ports Configuration 175
4.3.10.8 Port Status....177
4.3.10.9 Port Statistics ....178

4.3.11 IGMP Snooping....179

4.3.11.1 Profile Table....183
4.3.11.2 Address Entry 184
4.3.11.3 IGMP Snooping Configuration....185
4.3.11.4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration....187
4.3.11.5 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering 189
4.3.11.6 IGMP Snooping Status 190
4.3.11.7 IGMP Group Information....191
4.3.11.8 IGMPv3 SFM Information 192

4.3.12 MLD Snooping....193

4.3.12.1 MLD Snooping Configuration 193
4.3.12.2 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 195
4.3.12.3 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering....197
4.3.12.4 MLD Snooping Status....198
4.3.12.5 MLD Group Information....199
4.3.12.6 MLDv2 Information....199

4.3.13 MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)....201

4.3.13.1 MVR Configuratio....202
4.3.13.2 MVR Status....204
4.3.13.3 MVR Groups Information....205
4.3.13.4 MVR SFM Information....206

4.3.14 LLDP 207

4.3.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol....207
4.3.14.2 LLDP Configuration 207
4.3.14.3 LLDP Neighbor....210
4.3.14.4 LLDP MED Configuration 211
4.3.14.5 LLDP-MED Neighbor....219
4.3.14.6 Port Statistics 223

4.3.15 MAC Address Table 225

4.3.15.1 MAC Table Configuration....225
4.3.15.2 MAC Address Table Status....227

4.3.16 Loop Protection ....229

4.3.16.1 Configuration....229
4.3.16.2 Loop Protection Status....230

4.3.17 UDLD....231

4.3.17.1 UDLD Port Configuration....231
4.3.17.2 UDLD Status 232

4.3.18 Link OAM....233

4.3.18.1 Statistics....233
4.3.18.2 Port Status....235
4.3.18.3 Event Status....236
4.3.18.4 Port Settings....239
4.3.18.5 Event Settings 240
4.3.18.6 MIB Retrieval....242

4.3.19 CFM....243

4.3.19.1 Global Configuration....243
4.3.20 sFlow 244
4.3.20.1 sFlow Configuration....244

4.4 Routing....248

4.4.1 IP Configuration....248
4.4.2 IP Status....250
4.4.3 IPv4 Routing Info. Base....251
4.4.4 IPv6 Routing Info. Base 253
4.4.5 OSPF....254

4.4.5.1 Global Configuration....255
4.4.5.2 Network Area....257
4.4.5.3 Passive Interface....258
4.4.5.4 Stub Area....259
4.4.5.5 Area Authentication ....260
4.4.5.6 Area Range 261
4.4.5.7 Interface Configuration....262
4.4.5.8 Virtual Link....264

4.4.5.9 Global Status....266
4.4.5.10 Area Status....267
4.4.5.11 Neighbor Status....268
4.4.5.12 Interface Status 269

4.4.6 OSPF Database 270

4.4.6.1 Global Configuration....270

4.4.7 Detail Database....272

4.4.7.1 Router....272
4.4.7.2 Network 273
4.4.7.3 Summary....274
4.4.7.4 ASBR Summary 275
4.4.7.5 External 277
4.4.7.6 NSSA External....278

4.4.8 OSPFv3....280

4.4.8.1 Global Configuration....280
4.4.8.2 Passive Interface....281
4.4.8.3 Stub Area....281
4.4.8.4 Area Range 282
4.4.8.5 Interfaces Configuration 283
4.4.8.6 Global Status....284
4.4.8.7 Area Status....284
4.4.8.8 Neighbor Status....286
4.4.8.9 Interface Status....287
4.4.8.10 Routing Status....288

4.4.9 OSPFv3 Database....290

4.4.9.1 General Database 290

4.4.10 Detail Database....291

4.4.10.1 Router....291
4.4.10.2 Network 293
4.4.10.3 Link....294
4.4.10.4 InterArea Prefix ......296
4.4.10.5 InterArea Router....298

4.4.11 RIP....300

4.4.11.1 Global Configuration....300
4.4.11.2 Network Configuration 302
4.4.11.3 Neighbors Configuration....303
4.4.11.4 Passive Interface Configuration....303
4.4.11.5 Offset-list Configuration 304
4.4.11.6 Global Status....305
4.4.11.7 Interface Status....306
4.4.11.8 Peer Information....307

4.4.11.9 Database 308

4.4.12 Router....310

4.4.12.1 Key-Chain....310

4.4.12.2 Key-Chain Key ID....311

4.4.12.3 Access-list 312

4.5 QoS 313

4.5.1 General....313

4.5.1.1 Port Classification....314

4.5.1.2 Queue Policing 315

4.5.1.3 Port Tag Remarking....316

4.5.1.4 WERD 317

4.5.1.5 Statistics....318

4.5.2 Bandwidth Control 319

4.5.2.1 Port Policing 319

4.5.2.2 Port Scheduler....320

4.5.2.3 Port Shaping....322

4.5.3 Storm Control 324

4.5.3.1 Storm Policing 324

4.5.4 Differentiated Service 325

4.5.4.1 Port DSCP 325

4.5.4.2 DSCP-based QoS....326

4.5.4.3 DSCP Translation....327

4.5.4.4 DSCP Classification 330

4.5.5 QCL....331

4.5.5.1 QoS Control List 331

4.5.5.2 QCL Status....332

4.5.6 Voice VLAN 334

4.5.6.1 Voice VLAN Configuration....334

4.5.6.2 Voice VLAN OUI....336

4.6 Security 337

4.6.1 Access Security 337

4.6.1.1 Access Management....337

4.6.1.2 Access Management Statistics....338

4.6.1.3 SSH....339

4.6.1.4 HTTPS 340

4.6.2 AAA 342

4.6.2.1 Authentication Configuration....347

4.6.2.2 RADIUS....350

4.6.2.3 TACACS+ 352

4.6.2.4 RADIUS Overview....354

4.6.2.5 RADIUS Details 356

4.6.3 Port Authentication 363

4.6.3.1 Network Access Server Configuration 363

4.6.3.2 Network Access Overview 367

4.6.3.3 Network Access Statistics....368

4.6.4 Port Security 372

4.6.4.1 Port Limit Control....372

4.6.4.2 Port Security Status....375

4.6.4.3 Port Security Detail....377

4.6.5 Access Control Lists ....378

4.6.5.1 Access Control List Status....379

4.6.5.2 Access Control List Configuration....380

4.6.5.3 ACE Configuration....382

4.6.5.4 ACL Ports Configuration....392

4.6.5.5 ACL Rate Limiters....394

4.6.6 DHCP Snooping ....395

4.6.6.1 DHCP Snooping Configuration....395

4.6.6.2 Snooping Table....397

4.6.7 DHCPv6 Snooping ....398

4.6.7.1 DHCPv6 Snooping Configuration....398

4.6.8 IP Source Guard....399

4.6.8.1 IP Source Guard Configuration....399

4.6.8.2 Static IP Source Guard Table 401

4.6.8.3 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table 401

4.6.9 IPv6 Source Guard 403

4.6.9.1 IPv6 Source Guard Configuration....403

4.6.10 ARP Inspection....404

4.6.10.1 ARP Inspection....404

4.6.10.2 ARP Inspection Static Table....406

4.6.10.3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table....407

4.7 POE 408

4.7.1 PoE Switch Introduction 408

4.7.2 Power over Ethernet Powered Device....409

4.7.3 PoE System Configuration....410

4.7.4 Port Configuration....412

4.7.5 Status 417

4.7.6 Port Sequential 419

4.7.7 Schedule....420

4.7.8 PoE Alive Check Configuration....423

4.7.9 Port Power Consumption....425

4.7.10 LLDP PoE Neighbors....426

4.8 Ring....427

4.8.1 Ring Wizard 427
4.8.2 ERPS....432
4.8.3 ERPS Status....434
4.8.4 APS 434

4.8.4.1 APS Configuration....434

4.8.4.2 APS Status....437

4.9 ONVIF....440

4.9.1 ONVIF Device Search 440
4.9.2 ONVIF Device List....441
4.9.3 MAP Upload / Edit 443
4.9.4 Floor Map 444

4.10 Maintenance....445

4.10.1 Web Firmware Upgrade....445
4.10.2 Save Startup Config 446
4.10.3 Configuration Download 446
4.10.4 Configuration Upload....447
4.10.5 Configure Activate 448
4.10.6 Configure Delete....448
4.10.7 Image Select....449
4.10.8 Factory Default 450
4.10.9 System Reboot....450
4.10.10 Ping 451
4.10.11 IPv6 Ping 452
4.10.12 Remote IP Ping 453
4.10.13 Cable Diagnostics....454

5. SWITCH OPERATION 456

5.1 Address Table 456
5.2 Learning 456
5.3 Forwarding & Filtering....456
5.4 Store-and-Forward 456
5.5 Auto-Negotiation ....457

6. TROUBLESHOOTING....458

APPENDIX A: Networking Connection 460

A.1 Switch's Data RJ45 Pin Assignments - 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T ....460
A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX ....460

APPENDIX B : GLOSSARY 462

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Packet Contents

Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain the following items:

◆ The Managed PoE Switch
◆ Quick Installation Guide
◆ RJ45 to RS232 Cable
◆ Rubber Feet
◆ Two Rack-mounting Brackets with Attachment Screws
Power Cord
◆ SFP Dust-proof Caps

Model Name SFP	Dust-proof Caps
GS-6320-8P2X 2
MGS-6320-8HP2X 2
MGS-6320-8T2X 2

If any of these are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer immediately; if possible, retain the carton including the original packing material, and use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair.

1.2 Product Description

Amazing Ultra PoE Managed Switches with Layer 3 Switching and Security

PLANET GS-6320 and MGS-6320 cost-optimized, 1U, Gigabit PoE Managed Switches feature PLANET intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of critical business applications. They provide IPv6/IPv4 dual stack management and built-in Layer 3 OSPF/static routing Gigabit switching. the GS-6320 comes with 8 10/100/1000 BASE-T ports, while the MGS-6320 comes with 4 10/100/1000 BASE-T ports and 4 10/100/1000/2500 BASE-T ports featuring 36-/90-watt Ultra PoE and 2 additional 10Gigabit SFP+ ports. With a total power budget of up to 120/240 watts for different kinds of PoE applications, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 provide a quick, safe and cost-effective PoE network solution for small businesses and enterprises.

Cybersecurity Network Solution to Minimize Security Risks

The new generation of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 has the cybersecurity feature to protect the switch management and enhance the security for mission-critical network without extra deployment cost and effort. The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 expand its memory and upgrades the kernel of SSH and SSL protocols to provide strong protection against advanced threats. They include a range of cybersecurity features such as DHCP Snooping, IP Source Guard, ARP Inspection Protection, 802.1x port-based and Mac-based network access control, RADIUS and TACACS+ user accounts management, SNMPv3 authentication, and so on to complement it as an all-security solution. The network administrator can now construct highly-secure corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before.

Redundant Ring, Fast Recovery for Critical Network Applications

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 support redundant ring technology and feature strong, rapid self-recovery capability to prevent interruptions and external intrusions. They incorporates advanced ITU-T G.8032 ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching) technology, IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), and dual power input system into customer's industrial automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime in harsh factory environments. In a certain simple ring network, the recovery time of data link can be as fast as 10ms.

ERPS Ring for Video Transmission Redundancy

graph TD
    A["GS-6320-8P2X"] -->|10G| B["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    B -->|10G| C["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    C -->|10G| D["Go to Network Video Recorder"]
    D -->|10G| E["Traffic Control Center"]
    E -->|10G| F["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    F -->|10G| G["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    G -->|10G| H["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    H --> I["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    I --> J["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    J --> K["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    K --> L["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    L --> M["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    M --> N["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    N --> O["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    O --> P["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    P --> Q["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    Q --> R["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    R --> S["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    S --> T["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    T --> U["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    U --> V["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    V --> W["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    W --> X["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    X --> Y["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    Y --> Z["Go to PoE IP Camera"]
    Z --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style T fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style V fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Y fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Z fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Scheduled Power Recycling

The GS-6320-8P2X and MGS-6320-8HP2X allow each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points to reboot at a specified time each week. Therefore, they will reduce the chance of IP camera or AP crash resulting from buffer overflow.

graph TD
    A["IP Camera"] --> B["AP Router"]
    A --> C["IP Phone"]
    A --> D["Door Phone"]
    A --> E["PoE lighting"]
    B --> F["Automatically Reboot"]
    C --> F
    D --> F
    E --> F

PoE Schedule for Energy Savings

Under the trend of energy savings worldwide and contributing to environmental protection, the GS-6320-8P2X and MGS-6320-8HP2X can effectively control the power supply besides their capability of giving high watts power. The “PoE schedule” function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and money. It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non-business hours.

PoE Usage Monitoring

Via the power usage chart in the web management interface, the GS-6320-8P2X and MGS-6320-8HP2X enable the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs in real time. Thus, they greatly enhance the management efficiency of the facilities.

Layer 3 Routing Support

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 enable the administrator to conveniently boost network efficiency by configuring Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 VLAN static routing manually, and the OSPFv2 (Open Shortest Path First) settings automatically. The OSPF is an interior dynamic routing protocol for autonomous system based on link state. The protocol creates a database for link state by exchanging link states among Layer 3 switches, and then uses the Shortest Path First algorithm to generate a route table based on that database.

Cost-effective 10Gbps Uplink Capacity

10G Ethernet is a big leap in the evolution of Ethernet. The four 10G SFP+ slots of the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 support dual-speed 10GBASE-SR/LR or 1000BASE-SX/LX, meaning the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP/SFP+ transceiver according to the transmission distance or the transmission speed required to extend the network efficiently. They greatly support SMB network to achieve the maximum performance of 10Gbps in a cost-effective way.

Environment-friendly, Smart Fan Design for Silent Operation

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 feature a 19-inch metal housing, a low noise design and an effective ventilation system. They support the smart fan technology that automatically controls the speed of the built-in fan to reduce noise and maintain the temperature of the PoE switch for optimal power output capability. The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 are able to operate reliably, stably and quietly in any environment without affecting their performance.

Solution for IPv6 Networking

By supporting IPv6/IPv4 dual stack and plenty of management functions with easy and friendly user interfaces, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 are the best choice for IP surveillance, VoIP and wireless service providers to deploy the IPv6 network. They also help the SMBs to step in the IPv6 era with the lowest investment and without having to replace the network facilities while the ISPs construct the IPv6 FTTx edge network.

graph TD
    A["WEB"] --> B["SELNET"]
    C["SNMP"] --> D["SSH"]
    E["TLS"] --> F["ICMP"]
    G["NTP"] --> H["DHCP"]
    I["Application"] --> J["Transport Layer"]
    K["IPv4 Stack"] --> L["Stack"]
    M["IPv6 Stack"] --> N["Stack"]
    O["IPv4 Management Host"] --> P["Network"]
    Q["IPv6 Management Host"] --> R["Network"]
    S["PLANET Managed Switch"] --> T["Network"]
    style A fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style G fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style I fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style Q fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style M fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style N fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style O fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style P fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style Q fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff

Robust Layer 2 Features

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 can be programmed for advanced switch management functions, such as dynamic port link aggregation, Q-in-Q VLAN, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Layer 2/4 QoS, bandwidth control and IGMP/MLD snooping. The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 allow the operation of a high-speed trunk combining with multiple ports.

graph TD
    A["L2/L4 Managed Switch"] --> B["Q-in-Q"]
    B --> C["MSTP"]
    C --> D["MLD"]
    D --> E["IGMP"]
    E --> F["LLDP"]
    F --> G["QoS"]
    G --> H["LLDP"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

Powerful Security

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 offer a comprehensive Layer 2 to Layer 4 access control list (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. It can be used to restrict to network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP port number or defined typical network applications. Its protection mechanism also comprises 802.1x Port-based and MAC-based user and device authentication. With the private VLAN function, communication between edge ports can be prevented to ensure user privacy.

Enhanced Security and Traffic Control

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 also provide DHCP Snooping, IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address. The network administrator can now construct highly-secure corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before.

User-friendly Secure Management

For efficient management, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 are equipped with console, web and SNMP management interfaces. With the built-in web-based management interface, it offers an easy-to-use, platform independent management and configuration facility. The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 support SNMP and it can be managed via any management software based on the standard SNMP v1 or v2 Protocol. For reducing product learning time, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 offer Cisco-like command via Telnet or console port and customer doesn't need to learn new command from these switches. Moreover, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 offer the remotely secure management by supporting SSH, SSL and SNMP v3 connection where the packet content can be encrypted at each session.

Flexible and Extendable Solution

The 4 mini-GBIC SFP slots built in the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 support dual speed as it features 100BASE-FX and 1000BASE-SX/LX SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) fiber-optic modules. Now the administrator can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to not only the transmission distance, but also the transmission speed required. The distance can be extended from 550 m to 2 km (multi-mode fiber) and to 10/20/30/40/50/70/120 km (single-mode fiber or WDM fiber). They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions.

Intelligent SFP/SFP+ Diagnosis Mechanism

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 support SFP-DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor) function that greatly helps network administrator to easily monitor real-time parameters of the SFP and SFP+ transceivers, such as optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current, and transceiver supply voltage.

graph LR
    A["SFP DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor)"] --> B["Voltage"]
    A --> C["Ammeter"]
    A --> D["Temperature"]
    A --> E["Power Transceiver"]
    A --> F["Power Receiver"]

1.3 How to Use This Manual

This User's Manual is structured as follows:

Section 2, INSTALLATION

The section explains the functions of the Managed Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch.

Section 3, SWITCH MANAGEMENT

The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch.

Section 4, WEB CONFIGURATION

The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface.

Section 5, SWITCH OPERATION

The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Managed Switch.

Section 6. TROUBLESHOOTING

The chapter explains how to do troubleshooting of the Managed Switch.

Appendix A

The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch.

1.4 Product Features

Physical Port (GS-6320-8P2X)

■ 8-port 10/100/1000BASE-T with 36W PoE injector function
■ 2-port 1G/2.5G/10GBASE-X SFP+
■ RS232 RJ45 console interface for switch basic management and setup

Physical Port (MGS-6320-8HP2X)

■ 4-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T with 36W 802.3at PoE+ injector function (Port-1 to Port-4)
■ 4-Port 10/100/1000/2500BASE-T with 90W 802.3bt PoE++ injector function (Port-5 to Port-8)
■ 2-port 10GBASE-X SFP+, backward compatible with 1000BASE-X and 2500BASE-X SFP transceivers
■ RJ45 type RS232 console interface for switch basic management

Physical Port (MGS-6320-8T2X)

■ 4-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 (Port 1 to port 4)
■ 4-Port 10/100/1000/2500BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 (Port 5 to port 8)
■ 2-port 10GBASE-X SFP+, backward compatible with 1000BASE-X and 2500BASE-X SFP transceivers (Port 9 to port 10)
■ RJ45 type RS232 console interface for switch basic management

Power over Ethernet Plus (GS-6320-8P2X and MGS-6320-8HP2X)

■ Auto detects powered device (PD)
■ Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports
■ Remote power feeding up to 100 meters
■ PoE Management
- PoE admin-mode control
- PoE usage threshold
- Temperature threshold
- PoE Port Status monitoring
- PD classification detection
- Per port PoE function enable/disable
- Per PoE port power limit
- PoE Port Power feeding priority
- PoE extend mode control to support power feeding up to a distance of up to 200 meters

■ Intelligent PoE features

• Temperature threshold control
• PoE usage threshold control
• PD alive check
• PoE schedule

Layer 2 Features

■ High performance of Store-and-Forward architecture and runt/CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth
■ Storm Control support
- Broadcast/Multicast/Unknown unicast

■ Supports VLAN

• IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN
• Supports provider bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q, IEEE 802.1ad)
• Private VLAN Edge (PVE)
• Protocol-based VLAN
• MAC-based VLAN
• Voice VLAN

- GVRP(GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)

■ Supports Spanning Tree Protocol

• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, spanning tree by VLAN
• BPDU Guard

■ Supports Link Aggregation

• 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol(LACP)
• Cisco ether-channel (static trunk)
• Maximum 5 trunk groups, up to 10 ports per trunk group
• Up to 56Gbps bandwidth (full duplex mode)

■ Provides port mirror (many-to-1)
■ Port mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port
■ Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops
■ Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
■ Compatible with Cisco uni-directional link detection(UDLD) that monitors a link between two switches and blocks the ports on both ends of the link if the link fails at any point between the two devices
■ Supports G.8032 ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching)

Layer 3 Features

■ IP dynamic routing protocol supports RIPv2, OSPFv2 and OSPFv3
■ IPv4/IPv6 hardware static routing
■ Routing interface provides per VLAN routing mode

Quality of Service

■ Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control
■ 8 priority queues on all switch ports
■ Traffic classification

• IEEE 802.1p CoS
• TOS/DSCP/IP Precedence of IPv4/IPv6 packets
• IP TCP/UDP port number
• Typical network application

■ Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) CoS policies
■ Supports QoS and In/Out bandwidth control on each port
■ Traffic-policing policies on the switch port
■ DSCP remarking

Multicast

■ Supports IGMP Snooping v1, v2 and v3
■ Supports MLD Snooping v1 and v2
■ Querier mode support
■ IPv4 IGMP Snooping port filtering
■ IPv6 MLD Snooping port filtering
■ Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support

Security

■ Authentication

• IEEE 802.1x Port-based/MAC-based network access authentication
• Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with the RADIUS servers
• TACACS+ login users access authentication
• RADIUS/TACACS+ users access authentication
• Guest VLAN assigns clients to a restricted VLAN with limited services

■ Access Control List

• IP-based Access Control List (ACL)
• MAC-based Access Control List

■ Source MAC/IP address binding

■ DHCP Snooping to filter un-trusted DHCP messages
■ Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding
■ IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks
■ Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack
■ IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder

Management

■ IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management
■ Switch Management Interfaces

• Console/Telnet Command Line Interface
• Web switch management
• SNMP v1, v2c, and v3 switch management
• SSHv2, TLSv1.2 and SNMPv3 secure access

■ IPv6 IP address/NTP/DNS management
■ Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client
■ BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment
■ System Maintenance

• Firmware upload/download via HTTP/TFTP
• Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default
• Dual images

■ DHCP Relay
■ DHCP Option 82
■ User Privilege levels control
■ NTP (Network Time Protocol)
■ Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and LLDP-MED
■ Network Diagnostic

• ICMPv6/ICMPv4 remote ping
• Cable diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues

■ SMTP/Syslog remote alarm
■ Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms and events)
■ SNMP trap for interface Link Up and Link Down notification
■ System Log
■ PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deployment management
■ PLANET UNI-NMS (Universal Network Management) and Smart Discovery Utility for deployment management
■ Provides ONVIF for co-operating with PLANET video IP surveillances

1.5 Product Specifications

GS-6320-8P2X

Product	GS-6320-8P2X
Hardware Specifications
Copper Ports	8 x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X interface with Port-1 to Port-8
SFP/mini-GBIC Slots	2 x 1G/2.5G/10GBASE-X SFP interfaces with Port-9 to Port-10
PoE Injector Port	8 ports with 802.3at/afPoE injector function with Port-1 to Port-8
Console	1 x RJ45 serial port (115200, 8, N, 1)
Reset Button	< 5 sec: System reboot> 5 sec: Factory default
Dimensions (W x D x H)	330 x 150 x 44.5mm, 1U height
Weight	1.6 KG
Power Requirements	100~240V AC, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption	Max. 14.8 watts/50.47BTU (Power on without any connection)Max. 162watts/552.42BTU (Full loading with PoE+ function)
ESD Protection	6KV DC
LED	System:R.O (Green), Ring (Green), SYS (Green), PWR (Green)10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 Interfaces (Port 1 to Port 8):10/100/1000Mbps LNK/ACT (Green)PoE-in-Use (Amber) (Port 1 to Port 8)1G/2.5G/10G Mbps SFP Interfaces (Port 9 to Port 10):1G/2.5G LNK/ACT (Green)10G LNK/ACT (Amber)
Switching Specifications
Switch Architecture	Store-and-Forward
Switch Fabric	56Gbps/non-blocking
Throughput	41.67Mpps@ 64Bytes packet
Address Table	8K entries, automatic source address learning and aging
Shared Data Buffer	4.1Mbits
Flow Control	IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full-duplexBack pressure for half-duplex
Jumbo Frame	9KB
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard IEEE 802.3atPoE Plus, PSEBackward compatible with IEEE 802.3af PoE PSE
PoE Power Supply Type	End-span
PoE Power Output	Per port 52V DC, max. 36 watts
Power Pin Assignment	1/2(+), 3/6(-)
PoE Power Budget	120 watts (max.) @ 25 degrees C100 watts (max.) @ 50 degrees C

PoE Ability	PD @ 7 watts	8 units
	PD @ 15.4 watts	7 units
	PD @ 30.8 watts	3 units
PoE Management Functions
PoE System Management		System PoE Admin controlAuto power input and PoE budget controlOver-temperature threshold alarmPoE usage threshold alarm
PoE Device Live Detection		Per port remote PD IP address4 actions- None- PD reboot- PR reboot and alarm- Alarm
PoE Power Recycling		Yes, daily or predeinded schedule
PoE Schedule		4 schedule profiles
PoE Extend Mode		Yes, max. 160 to 200 meters
Layer 3 Functions
IP Interfaces		Max. 128 VLAN interfaces
Routing Table		Max. 128 routing entries
Routing Protocols		IPv4 RIPv2IPv4 OSPFv2IPv6 OSPFv3IPv4 hardware static routingIPv6 hardware static routing
Layer 2 Functions
Port Configuration		Port disable/enableAuto-negotiation 10/100/1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selectionFlow Control disable/enable
Port Status		Display each port's speed duplex mode, link status, flow control status, auto negotiation status, trunk status
Port Mirroring		TX/RX/BothMany-to-1 monitorSupports up to 5 sessions
VLAN		IEEE 802.1Q tag-based VLAN,IEEE 802.1ad Q-in-Q tunnelingPrivate VLAN Edge (PVE)MAC-based VLANProtocol-based VLANVoice VLANMVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)GVRPUp to 4K VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
Link Aggregation		IEEE 802.3ad LACP (static trunk)Supports 5 trunk groups with 10 ports per trunk
IGMP Snooping		IPv4 IGMP (v1/v2/v3) snoopingIPv4 IGMP querier mode support
		Supports 255IGMP groups
MLD Snooping		IPv6 MLD (v1/v2) snooping,IPv6 MLD querier mode supportSupports 255MLD groups
Ring		Supports ERPS, and complies with ITU-T G.8032Recovery time < 10ms @ 3 nodesRecovery time <50ms @ 16 nodesSupports Major ring and sub-ring
Bandwidth Control		Per port bandwidth controlIngress: 10Kbps~13000MbpsEgress: 10Kbps~13000Mbps
QoS		Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR8-level priority for switching- Port number- 802.1p priority- 802.1Q VLAN tag- DSCP/TOS field in IP packet
Security Functions
Access Control List		IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACLACL based on:- MAC Address- IP Address- Ethertype- Protocol Type- VLAN ID- DSCP- 802.1p Priority- Up to 256 entries
Security		Port securityIP source guardDynamic ARP inspectionCommand line authority control based on user level
AAA		RADIUS clientTACACS+ client
Network Access Control		IEEE 802.1x port-based network access controlMAC-based authenticationLocal/RADIUS authentication
Management Functions
Basic Management Interfaces		Console;Telnet; Web browser; SNMP v1, v2c
Secure Management Interfaces		SSHv2, TLSv1.2, SNMPv3
System Management		Firmware upgrade by HTTP protocol through Ethernet networkConfiguration upload/download through HTTPRemote SyslogSystem logLLDP protocolNTPPLANET Smart Discovery UtilityPLANET CloudViewer app
Event Management		Remote SyslogSystem logSMTP
ONVIF		ONVIF device discoveryONVIF device monitoringFloor Map
SNMP MIBs		RFC1213 MIB-IIRFC 2863 IF-MIBRFC1643 Ethernet MIBRFC2863 Interface MIBRFC2665 Ether-Like MIBRFC2737 Entity MIBRFC2819 RMON MIB (Groups 1, 2, 3 and 9)RFC2618 RADIUS Client MIBRFC3411SNMP-Frameworks-MIBIEEE802.1X PAELLDPMAU-MIBPower over Ethernet MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulatory Compliance		FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
Standards Compliance		IEEE802.3 10BASE-TIEEE802.3u 100BASE-TXIEEE802.3z 1000BASE-SX/LXIEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-TIEEE 802.3ae 10Gb/s EthernetIEEE802.3x flow control and back pressureIEEE802.3ad port trunk with LACPIEEE802.1D Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE802.1p Class of ServiceIEEE802.1Q VLAN taggingIEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network ControlIEEE 802.1ab LLDPIEEE 802.3af Power over EthernetIEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet PlusRFC 768 UDPRFC 783 TFTPRFC 791 IPRFC 793 TCPRFC 792 ICMPRFC 2068 HTTPRFC 1112 IGMP v1RFC 2236 IGMP v2RFC 3376 IGMP v3RFC 2710 MLD v1RFC 3810 MLD v2RFC 2328 OSPF v2RFC 2453 RIP v2
Environments
Operating		Temperature: 0 ~ 50 degrees CRelative Humidity: 5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
Storage		Temperature: -10 ~ 70degrees CRelative Humidity:5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)

■ MGS-6320 series

Product	MGS-6320-8HP2X	MGS-6320-8T2X
Hardware Specifications
Copper Ports	4x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X interface with Port-1 to Port-44x 10/100/1000/2500BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X interface with Port-5 to Port-8
SFP/mini-GBIC Slots	2 x 1G/2.5G/10GBASE-X SFP interfaces with Port-9to Port-10
PoE Injector Port	4 ports with 802.3at/af PoE injector function with Port-1 to Port-44 ports with 802.3bt/at/af PoE injector function with Port-5 to Port-8	--
Console	1 x RJ45 serial port (115200, 8, N, 1)
Reset Button	< 5 sec: System reboot> 5 sec: Factory default
RAM	512Mbytes
Flash Memory	64Mbytes
Dimensions (W x D x H)	330 x 200 x 44.5mm, 1U height 330 x 150 x 44.5mm, 1U height
Weight	2127g 1436g
Power Requirements	100~240V AC, 50/60Hz, 3A max.	100~240V AC, 50/60Hz, 1.5A max.
Power Consumption	Max. 15.48 watts/52.78BTU (Power on without any connection)Max. 281.6watts/960.25BTU (Full loading with PoE+ function)	Max. 9.9 watts/33.76BTU (Power on without any connection)Max. 18.48 watts/63.02BTU (Full loading)
ESD Protection	6KV DC
Surge Protection	4KV DC
LED	System:PWR (Green), SYS (Green), R.O (Green), Ring (Green)Per 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 Interfaces (Port 1 to Port 4):1000Mbps LNK/ACT (Green)10/100Mbps LNK/ACT (Amber)802.3at/af PoE-in-Use (Amber)Per 10/100/1000/2500BASE-T RJ45 Interfaces (Port 5 to Port 8):1000/2500Mbps LNK/ACT (Green)10/100Mbps LNK/ACT (Amber)802.3bt PoE-in-Use (Green)802.3at/af PoE-in-Use (Amber)Per 1G/2.5G/10G Mbps SFP Interfaces (Port 9 to Port 10):1G/2.5G LNK/ACT (Green)10G LNK/ACT (Amber)
Switching Specifications
Switch Architecture	Store-and-Forward
Switch Fabric	68Gbps/non-blocking
Throughput	50.59Mpps@ 64Bytes packet
Address Table	8K entries, automatic source address learning and aging
Shared Data Buffer	4.1Mbits
Flow Control	IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full-duplexBack pressure for half-duplex
Jumbo Frame	10Kbytes
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard	IEEE 802.3at PoE+ PSE (Port 1 to Port 4)Backward compatible with IEEE 802.3afPoE PSE802.3bt PoE++ PSE (Port 5 to Port 8)Backward compatible with IEEE 802.3atPoE PSE	--
PoE Power Supply Type	802.3btUPOE/POHEnd-spanMid-spanForce	--
PoE Power Output	802.3bt Type-4 mode, Port-5 to Port-8: maximum 90 wattsUPoE mode, Port-5 to Port-8: maximum 95 wattsEnd-span mode: maximum 36 wattsMid-span mode: maximum 36 wattsForce mode: maximum 60 watts	--
Power Pin Assignment	802.3bt: 1/2(-), 3/6(+), 4/5(+), 7/8(-)UPoE: 1/2(-), 3/6(+), 4/5(+), 7/8(-)End-span: 1/2(-), 3/6(+)Mid-span: 4/5(+), 7/8(-)
PoE Power Budget	240 watts (max.) @ 25 degrees C200 watts (max.) @ 50 degrees C	--
Number of 802.3bt Type-4 PDs	2 units	--
Number of 802.3bt Type-3 PDs	4 units	--
Number of 802.3at Type-2 PDs	8 units	--
PoE Management Functions
PoE System Management	PoE Port Status monitoringTotal PoE power budget controlOver Temperature ProtectionPoE usage threshold and temperature threshold	--
PoE Device Live Detection	Per port remote PD IP address4 actions- None- PD reboot- PR reboot and alarm- Alarm	--
PoE Power Recycling	Yes, daily or predeinded schedule	--
PoE Schedule	4 schedule profiles	--
PoE Extend Mode	Yes, max. 200 meters	--
Layer 3 Functions
IP Interfaces	Max. 32 VLAN interfaces
Routing Table	Max. 32 static route entriesMax. 1K routing table entries
Routing Protocols	IPv4 RIPv2IPv4 OSPFv2IPv6 OSPFv3IPv4 hardware static routingIPv6 hardware static routing
Layer 2 Functions
Port Configuration	Port disable/enableAuto-negotiation 10/100/1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selectionFlow Control disable/enablePort link capability control
Port Status	Display each port's speed duplex mode, link status, flow control status, auto negotiation status, trunk status
Port Mirroring	TX/RX/BothMany-to-1 monitorSupports up to 5 sessions
VLAN	IEEE 802.1Q tag-based VLAN,IEEE 802.1ad Q-in-Q tunnelingPrivate VLAN Edge (PVE)MAC-based VLANProtocol-based VLANVoice VLANMVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)GVRPUp to 4K VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
Link Aggregation	IEEE 802.3ad LACP (static trunk)Supports 4 trunk groups with 10 ports per trunk
IGMP Snooping	IPv4 IGMP (v1/v2/v3) snoopingIPv4 IGMP querier mode supportSupports 255 IGMP groups
MLD Snooping	IPv6 MLD (v1/v2) snooping,IPv6 MLD querier mode supportSupports 255 MLD groups
Bandwidth Control	Per port bandwidth controlIngress: 10Kbps~13000MbpsEgress: 10Kbps~13000Mbps
Ring	Supports ERPS, and complies with ITU-T G.8032Recovery time < 10ms @ 3 nodesRecovery time <50ms @ 16 nodesSupports major ring and sub-ring
QoS	Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR8-level priority for switching- Port number- 802.1p priority- 802.1Q VLAN tag- DSCP/TOS field in IP packet
Security Functions
Access Control List	IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACLACL based on:- MAC Address- IP Address- Ethertype- Protocol Type- VLAN ID- DSCP- 802.1p Priority- Up to 512 entries
Security	Port securityIP source guard, up to 512 entriesDynamic ARP inspection, up to 1K entriesCommand line authority control based on user levelStatic MAC address, up to 64 entries
AAA	RADIUS clientTACACS+ client
Network Access Control	IEEE 802.1x port-based network access controlMAC-based authenticationLocal/RADIUS authentication
Management Functions
Basic Management Interfaces	Console;Telnet; Web browser; SNMP v1, v2c
Secure Management Interfaces	SSHv2, TLSv1.2, SNMPv3
System Management	Firmware upgrade by HTTP protocol through Ethernet networkConfiguration upload/download through HTTPRemote SyslogSystem logLLDP protocolNTPPLANET Smart Discovery UtilityPLANET CloudViewer app
Event Management	Remote SyslogSystem logSMTP
ONVIF	ONVIF device discoveryONVIF device monitoringFloor Map
SNMP MIBs	RFC1213 MIB-IIRFC 2863 IF-MIBRFC1643 Ethernet MIBRFC2863 Interface MIBRFC2665 Ether-Like MIBRFC2737 Entity MIBRFC2819 RMON MIB (Groups 1, 2, 3 and 9)RFC2618 RADIUS Client MIBRFC3411SNMP-Frameworks-MIBRFC 3621 Power Ethernet MIBIEEE802.1X PAE
	LLDPMAU-MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulatory Compliance	FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
Standards Compliance	IEEE802.3 10BASE-TIEEE802.3u 100BASE-TXIEEE802.3z 1000BASE-SX/LXIEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-TIEEE 802.3bz 2.5GBASE-XIEEE 802.3ae 10Gb/s EthernetIEEE802.3x flow control and back pressureIEEE802.3ad port trunk with LACPIEEE802.1D Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE802.1p Class of ServiceIEEE802.1Q VLAN taggingIEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network ControlIEEE 802.1ab LLDPIEEE 802.3af Power over EthernetIEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet PlusIEEE 802.3bt 4-pair Power over Ethernet Plus PlusRFC 768 UDPRFC 783 TFTPRFC 791 IPRFC 792 ICMPRFC 793 TCPRFC 2068 HTTPRFC 1112 IGMP v1RFC 2236 IGMP v2RFC 3376 IGMP v3RFC 2710 MLD v1RFC 3810 MLD v2RFC 2328 OSPF v2RFC 2453 RIP v2
Environments
Operating	Temperature: 0 ~ 50 degrees CRelative Humidity: 5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
Storage	Temperature: -10 ~ 70degrees CRelative Humidity:5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)

2. INSTALLATION

This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount. For easier management and control of the Managed Switch, familiarize yourself with its display indicators, and ports. Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch, please read this chapter completely.

2.1 Hardware Description

2.1.1 Switch Front Panel

The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the Managed Switch. Figures 2-1-1 and 2-1-3 show the front panels of the Managed Switches.

GS-6320-8P2X Front Panel

Figure 2-1-1: Front Panel of GS-6320-8P2X

MGS-6320-8HP2X Front Panel

Figure 2-1-2: Front Panel of MGS-6320-8HP2X

MGS-6320-8T2X Front Panel

Figure 2-1-3: Front Panel of MGS-6320-8T2X

Gigabit TP interface

10/100/1000/2500 BASE-T Copper, RJ45 twisted-pair: Up to 100 meters

■ 10 Gigabit SFP+ slot

1G/2.5G/10GBASE-SR/LR mini-GBIC slot for SFP+ (Small Factor Pluggable Plus) transceiver module support distance from 300 meters (multi-mode fiber) to 10 kilometers (single mode fiber).

■ Console port

The console port is an RJ45 port connector. It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly. Through the console port, it provides rich diagnostic information including IP address setting, factory reset, port management, link status and system setting. Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device. After the connection, users can run any terminal emulation program (Hyper Terminal, ProComm Plus, Telix, Winterm and so on) to enter the startup screen of the device.

■ Reset button

The front panels of the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 come with a reset button designed for rebooting the Managed Switch without turning off and on the power. The following is the summary table of reset button functions:

Reset Button Pressed and Released	Function
< 5 sec: System Reboot	Reboot the Managed Switch.
> 5 sec: Factory Default	Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration.The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as shown below:Default Username: adminDefault Password: adminDefault IP Address: 192.168.0.100Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254

The reset buttons of the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 are located on the front of their panels.

2.1.2 LED Indications

The front panel LEDs indicate instant statuses of power and system, ring, port links and data activity; they help monitor and troubleshoot when needed. Figures 2-1-2-1 and 2-1-2-3 show the LED indications of the Managed Switches.

GS-6320-8P2X LED Indication

Figure 2-1-2-1: Front Panel of GS-6320-8P2X

MGS-6320-8HP2X LED Indication

Figure 2-1-2-2: Front Panel of MGS-6320-8HP2X

MGS-6320-8T2X LED Indication

Figure 2-1-2-3: Front Panel of MGS-6320-8T2X

■ System (GS-6320-8P2X / MGS-6320-8HP2X / MGS-6320-8T2X)

LED Color Function
R.O.	Green	Lights to indicate that Switch has enabled Ring Owner.
Ring Green		Lights to indicate the ERPS Ring has been created successfullyOff to indicate the Ring function is not working
SYS	Green	Lights to indicate the system is working.
PWR	Green	Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.

■ GS-6320-8P2X)

■ Per 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 PoE port (Port-1 to Port-8)

LED Color Function
10/100/1000LNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 10/100/1000Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
802.3at PoEIn-Use	Amber	Lights:	Lights to indicate the PoE port is working in 802.3at PoE+ mode(End-span) and offers up to 36 watts of power.

■ Per 10GBASE-SR/LR SFP+ port (Port-9 to Port-10)

LED Color Function
1G/2.5GLNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 1000Mbps or 2500Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
10GLNK/ACT	Amber	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 10GMBps and successfullyEstablished.

■ MGS-6320-8HP2X / MGS-6320-8T2X

■ Per 10/100/1000B/2500ASE-T RJ45 PoE++ port (Port-5 to Port-8)

LED Color Function
1G/2.5GLNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 1000Mbps or 2500Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100LNK/ACT	Amber	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 10/100/Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
802.3bt PoEIn-Use	Green	Lights:	Lights to indicate the PoE port is working in 802.3bt PoE++ or PoH mode and offers up to 95 watts of power.
802.3at PoEIn-Use	Amber	Lights:	Lights to indicate the PoE port is working in 802.3at PoE+ mode (End-span) and offers up to 36 watts of power.

Per 10/100/1000/2500BASE-T RJ45 (Port-5 to Port-8)

LED Color Function
1G/2.5GLNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 1000Mbps or 2500Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100LNK/ACT	Amber	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 10/100Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

■ Per 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 port (Port-1 to Port-4)

LED Color Function
1GLNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 1000Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100LNK/ACT	Amber	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 10/100Mbps and successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

■ Per 10GBASE-SR/LR SFP+ port (Port-9 to Port-10)

LED Color Function
1G/2.5GLNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 1000Mbps or 2500Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
10GLNK/ACT	Amber	Lights:	To indicate the port is running at 10GMBps and successfully established

2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel

The rear panel of the Managed Switch consists of the AC inlet power socket. Figures 2-1-3-1 to 2-1-3-3 show the rear panels of the Managed Switches.

GS-6320-8P2X Rear Panel

Figure 2-1-3-1: Rear Panel of GS-6320-8P2X

MGS-6320-8HP2X Rear Panel

Figure 2-1-3-2: Rear Panel of MGS-6320-8HP2X

MGS-6320-8T2X Rear Panel

Figure 2-1-3-3: Rear Panel of MGS-6320-8T2X

■ AC Power Receptacle

For compatibility with electrical voltages in most areas of the world, the Managed Switch's power supply can automatically adjust line power in the range of 100-240V AC and 50/60 Hz.

Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptacle on the rear panel of the Managed Switch and the other end of the power cord into an electrical outlet and the power will be ready.

The device is a power-required device, which means it will not work till it is powered. If your networks should be active all the time, please consider using UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) for your device.

Power Notice: It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime. In some areas, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your ManagedSwitch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter.

2.2 Installing the Switch

This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch. Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented. To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf, simply complete the following steps.

In the installation steps below, this manual uses the GS-6320-48T4X as an example. However, the steps for PLANET GS-6320 and MGS-6320 are similar.

2.2.1 Desktop Installation

To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf, please follow these steps:

Step 1: Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch.
Step 2: Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source, as shown in Figure 2-2-1.

Figure 2-2-1: Place the Managed Switch on the Desktop

Step 3: Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects.

When choosing a location, please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4, and specifications.

Step 4: Connect the Managed Switch to network devices.

Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10/100/1000 RJ45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch. Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer server, workstation or router.

Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5e network cabling with RJ45 tips. For more information, please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A.

Step 5: Supply power to the Managed Switch.

Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch.

Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet.

When the Managed Switch receives power, the Power LED should remain solid Green.

2.2.2 Rack Mounting

To install the Managed Switch in a 19-inch standard rack, please follow the instructions described below.

Step 1: Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface, with the front panel positioned towards the front side.

Step 2: Attach the rack-mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package.

Figure 2-2-2 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch.

Figure 2-2-2: Attach Brackets to the Managed Switch.

You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets. Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty.

Step 3: Secure the brackets tightly.

Step 4: Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side.

Step 5: After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch, use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack, as shown in Figure 2-2-3.

Line drawing of a network switch device with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

Figure 2-2-3: Mounting Managed Switch in a Rack

Step 6: Proceed with Steps 4 and 5 of session 2.2.1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch.

2.2.3 Installing the SFP/SFP+ Transceiver

The sections describe how to insert an SFP/SFP+ transceiver into an SFP/SFP+ slot. The SFP/SFP+ transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. You can plug in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP/SFP+ port without having to power down the Managed Switch, as Figure 2-2-4 shows..

Figure 2-2-4: Plugging in the SFP/SFP+ Transceiver

■ Approved PLANET SFP/SFP+ Transceivers

PLANET Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi-mode SFP/SFP+ transceivers. The following list of approved PLANET SFP/SFP+ transceivers is correct at the time of publication:

Fast Ethernet Transceiver (100BASE-X SFP)

Model Speed (Mbps)		Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (nm)	Operating Temp.
MFB-FX	100	LC	Multi Mode	2km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-F20	100	LC	Single Mode	20km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-F40	100	LC	Single Mode	40km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-F60	100	LC	Single Mode	60km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-F120	100	LC	Single Mode	120km	1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-TFX	100	LC	Multi Mode	2km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MFB-TF20	100	LC	Single Mode	20km	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C

Fast Ethernet Transceiver (100BASE-BX, Single Fiber Bi-directional SFP)

Model Speed (Mbps)		Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (TX/RX)	Operating Temp.
MFB-FA20	100	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1310nm/1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-FB20	100	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1550nm/1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MFB-TFA20	100	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1310nm/1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MFB-TFB20 100		WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1550nm/1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MFB-TFA40	100	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1310nm/1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MFB-TFB40	100	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1550nm/1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C

Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver (1000BASE-X SFP)

Model	DDM	Speed (Mbps)	Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (nm)	Operating Temp.
MGB-GT	--	1000	Copper	--	100m	--	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-SX(V2)	YES	1000	LC	Multi Mode	550m	850nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-SX2(V2)	YES	1000	LC	Multi Mode	2km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LX(V2)	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	20km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-L40	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	40km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-L80	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	80km	1550nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-L120(V2)	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	120km	1550nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-TSX	YES	1000	LC	Multi Mode	550m	850nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TSX2	YES	1000	LC	Multi Mode	2km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLX(V2)	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	20km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TL40	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	40km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TL80	YES	1000	LC	Single Mode	80km	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 °C

Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver (1000BASE-BX, Single Fiber Bi-directional SFP)

Model	DDM	Speed (Mbps)	Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (TX)	Wavelength (RX)	Operating Temp.
MGB-LA10(V2)	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1310nm	1550nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LB10(V2)		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1550nm	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LA20(V2)	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1310nm	1550nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LB20(V2)		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1550nm	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LA40(V2)	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1310nm	1550nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LB40(V2)		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1550nm	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LA80	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	80km	1490nm	1550nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-LB80		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	80km	1550nm	1490nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MGB-TLA10(V2)	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1310nm	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLB10(V2)		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1550nm	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLA20	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1310nm	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLB20		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1550nm	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLA40	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1310nm	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 °C

User's Manual of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Managed Switches

MGB-TLB40		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1550nm	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLA80	YES	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	80km	1490nm	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MGB-TLB80		1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	80km	1550nm	1490nm	-40 ~ 75 °C

10Gbps SFP+ (10G Ethernet/10GBASE)

Model	DDM	Speed (Mbps)	Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (nm)	Operating Temp.
MTB-RJ	-	10G	Copper	-	30m	-	0 ~ 70 °C
MTB-SR	YES	10G	LC	Multi Mode	Up to 300m	850nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-LR	YES	10G	LC	Single Mode	10km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-TSR	YES	10G	LC	Multi Mode	Up to 300m	850nm	-40 ~ 75 °C
MTB-TLR	YES	10G	LC	Single Mode	10km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 °C

10Gbps SFP+ (10GBASE-BX, Single Fiber Bi-directional SFP)

Model	DDM	Speed (Mbps)	Connector interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (TX)	Wavelength (RX)	Operating Temp.
MTB-LA20	YES	10G	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1270nm	1330nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-LB20		10G	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1330nm	1270nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-LA40	YES	10G	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1270nm	1330nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-LB40		10G	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1330nm	1270nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-LA60	YES	10G	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	60km	1270nm	1330nm	0 ~ 60 °C
MTB-LB60		10G	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	60km	1330nm	1270nm	0 ~ 60 °C

It is recommended to use PLANET SFP/SFP+ on the Managed Switch. If you insert an SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is not supported, the Managed Switch will not recognize it.

1. Before we connect the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 to the other network device, we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type, for example, 1000BASE-SX to 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX to 1000BASE-LX.
2. Check whether the fiber-optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement.

To connect to 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver, please use the multi-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.
To connect to 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver, please use the single-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.

■ Connecting the Fiber Cable

1. Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP/SFP+ transceiver.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP/SFP+ transceiver installed.
3. Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP/SFP+ slot on the front of the Managed Switch. Ensure that the SFP/SFP+ transceiver is operating correctly.
4. Check the Link mode of the SFP/SFP+ port if the link fails. To function with some fiber-NICs or Media Converters, user

has to set the port Link mode to "10G Force", or "1000M Force".

■ Removing the Transceiver Module

1. Make sure there is no network activity anymore.
2. Remove the Fiber-Optic Cable gently.
3. Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position.
4. Pull out the module gently through the lever.

Figure 2-2-5: How to Pull Out the SFP/SFP+ Transceiver

Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it to a horizontal position. Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP/SFP+ module slot of the Managed Switch.

3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT

This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch. It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device (workstation or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection options.

This chapter covers the following topics:

■ Requirements
■ Management Access Overview
■ Administration Console Access
■ Web Management Access
■ SNMP Access
■ Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading

3.1 Requirements

■ Workstations running Windows 2000/XP, 2003, Vista/7/8/10, 2008, MAC OS9 or later, or Linux, UNIX, or other platforms compatible with TCP/IP protocols.
■ Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card)
■ Serial Port connect (Terminal)
- The above PC with COM Port (DB9/RS-232) or USB-to-RS232 converter
■ Ethernet Port connect
• Network cables - Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45 connectors.
■ The above workstation is installed with Web Browser and JAVA runtime environment plug-in

It is recommended to use Mozilla Firefox 1.5 or above to access Managed Switch.

3.2 Management Access Overview

The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods:

■ An administration console
■ Web browser interface
■ An external SNMP-based network management application

The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three management methods.

Method	Advantages	Disadvantages
Console	No IP address or subnet neededText-basedTelnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP operating systemsSecure	Must be near the switch or use dial-up connectionNot convenient for remote usersModem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow
Web Browser	Ideal for configuring the switch remotelyCompatible with all popular browsersCan be accessed from any locationMost visually appealing	Security can be compromised (hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask)May encounter lag times on poor connections
SNMP Agent	Communicates with switch functions at the MIB levelBased on open standards	Requires SNMP manager softwareLeast visually appealing of all three methodsSome settings require calculationsSecurity can be compromised (hackers need only know the community name)

Table 3-1: Comparison of Management Methods

3.3 Administration Console

The administration console is an internal, character-oriented, and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings. Using this method, you can view the administration console from a terminal, personal computer, Apple Macintosh, or workstation connected to the Managed Switch's console (serial) port.

graph LR
    A["PC / Workstation with Terminal Emulation Software"] --> B["Serial Port"]
    B --> C["RS-232 to RJ45 Cable"]
    C --> D["Managed Switch"]
    D --> E["RJ45 Console Port"]

Figure 3-1: Console Management

Direct Access

Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal-emulation program (such as HyperTerminal) to the Managed Switch console (serial) port. When using this management method, a straight DB9 RS232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC. After making this connection, configure the terminal-emulation program to use the following parameters:

The default parameters are:

■ 115200 bps
■ 8 data bits
No parity
■ 1 stop bit

Figure 3-2: Terminal Parameter Settings

You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port, regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP.

3.4 Web Management

The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After you set up your IP address for the switch, you can access the Managed Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch.

graph LR
    A["Managed Switch\nIP Address: 192.168.0.100"] -->|RJ45/UTP Cable| B["PC / Workstation\nwith Web Browser 192.168.0.x"]

Figure 3-1-3: Web Management

You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location, just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch's console port. Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later, Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1.5 or later.

Figure 3-1-4: Web Main Screen of Managed Switch

3.5 SNMP-based Network Management

You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch, such as SNMP Network Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management (NNM) or What's Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Net-work management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get community string, it can only read MIBs. The default getting and setting community strings for the Managed Switch is public.

graph LR
    A["IP Address: 192.168.0.x"] --> B["Internet"]
    C["PC / Workstation with SNMP application"] --> B
    D["Managed Switch\nSNMP Agent Status: Enabled"] --> B
    B --> E["IP Address: 192.168.0.100"]

Figure 3-1-5: SNMP Management

3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility

For easily listing the Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment, the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user's manual CD-ROM is an ideal solution. The following installation instructions are to guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility.

1. Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC.
2. Run this utility as the following screen appears.

Figure 3-1-6: Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen

If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC, choose adifferent LAN card by using the "Select Adapter" tool.

1. Press the "Refresh" button for the currently connected devices in the discovery list as the screen shows below:

Figure 3-1-7: Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen

1. This utility shows all necessary information from the devices, such as MAC address, device name, firmware version, and device IP subnet address. It can also assign new password, IP subnet address and description to the devices.
2. After setup is completed, press the "Update Device", "Update Multi" or "Update All" button to take effect. The functions of the 3 buttons above are shown below:

■ Update Device: use current setting on one single device.
■ Update Multi: use current setting on choose multi-devices.
■ Update All: use current setting on whole devices in the list.

The same functions mentioned above also can be found in "Option" tools bar.

1. To click the "Control Packet Force Broadcast" function, it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address.
2. Press the "Connect to Device" button and the Web login screen appears in Figure 3-1-4.
3. Press the "Exit" button to shut down the Planet Smart Discovery Utility.

This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web-based management from Managed Switch.

About Web-based Management

The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer.

The Web-based Management supports Internet Explorer 8.0. It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption, enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen.

By default, IE7.0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets. The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports.

The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection, making sure the manager PC must be set to the same IP subnet address with the Managed Switch.

For example, the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192.168.0.100, then the manager PC should be set to 192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1 and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via console, then the manager PC should be set to 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative configuration on manager PC.

graph LR
    A["Managed Switch"] -->|IP Address: 192.168.0.100| B["RJ45/UTP Cable"]
    B --> C["PC / Workstation with Web Browser 192.168.0.x"]

Figure 4-1-1: Web Management

■ Logging on to the Managed Switch

1. Use Internet Explorer 7.0 or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface. The factory-default IP address is shown as follows:

http://192.168.0.100

1. When the following login screen appears, please enter the default username "admin" with password "admin" (or the username/password you have changed via console) to log in the main screen of Managed Switch. The login screen in Figure 4-1-2 appears.

Figure 4-1-2: Login Screen

Default User name: admin

Default Password: admin

After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as shown in Figure 4-1-3.

Figure 4-1-3: Web Main Page

Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface. The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides.

1. It is recommended to use Mozilla Firefox 1.5 or above to access Managed Switch.
2. The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button. You need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface.
3. For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.
4. Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface.

4.1 Main Web Page

The Managed Switch provides a Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing it. This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch's Web browser interface to configure and manage it.

Figure 4-1-4: Web Main Page

Panel Display

The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch's ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page.
The port status is illustrated as follows:

State	Disabled	Down	Link
RJ45 Ports
SFP+ Ports

Main Menu

Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the Managed Switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. Via the Web-Management, the administrator can set up the Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-1-5 appears.

Figure 4-1-5: Managed Switch Main Functions Menu

4.2 System

Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under the System, the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information. This section has the following items:

System Information The Managed Switch system information is provided here.
IP Configuration Configure the IPv4/IPv6 interface and IP routes of the Managed Switch on this page.
■ IP Status This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbor cache (ARP cache) status.
ARP This page to setting ARP Table Configuration
■ Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser.
- Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.
NTP Configuration Configure NTP server on this page.
Time Configuration Configure time parameter on this page.
■ UPnP Configure UPnP on this page.
CPU Load This page displays the CPU load, using an SVG graph.
System Log The system log information of the Managed Switch system is provided here.
Detailed Log The detailed log information of the Managed Switch system is provided here.
■ Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page.
■ SMTP Configuration Configure SMTP parameters on this page.
SNMP Configure SNMP parameters on this page
■ RMON Configure the RMON parameters on this page
DHCP Relay Configure the DHCP Relay Configuration on this page.
DHCP server Configure the DHCP server on this page
Remote Management Configure the Remote NMS Configuration on this page

4.2.1 Management

4.2.1.1 System Information

The System Information page provides information for the current device information. System Information page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address, software version and system uptime. The screen in Figure 4-2-1-1 appears.

System Information

System
Contact Name Location	Default Contact GS-6320-8P2X Default Location
Hardware
MAC Address Smart Fan	a8-f7-e0-52-20-a1 Low Speed
Time
System Date System Uptime	1970-01-01T06:55:07+00:00 0d 06:55:07
Software
Software Version Software Date	v1.2103b211101 2021-11-01T13:23:02+08:00

Figure 4-2-1-1: System Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Contact	The system contact configured in SNMP | System Information | System Contact.
• Name	The system name configured in SNMP | System Information | System Name.
• Location	The system location configured in SNMP | System Information | System Location.
• MAC Address	The MAC Address of this Managed Switch.
• Temperature	Indicates chipset temperature.
• Power Status	The status of power input (AC and DC)
• System Date	The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the configured NTP Server, if any.
• System Uptime	The period of time the device has been operational.
• Software Version	The software version of the Managed Switch.
• Software Date	The date when the Managed Switch software was produced.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.2.1.2 IP Configuration

The IP Configuration includes the IP Configuration, IP Interface and IP Routes. The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration. The maximum number of interfaces supported is 128 and the maximum number of routes is 128. The screen in Figure 4-2-1-2 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-2: IP Configuration Page Screenshot

The current column is used to show the active IP configuration.

Object Description
IP Configurations	Domain Name	Configure the Switch Domain Name
	Mode	Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router. In Host mode, IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed. In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces.
	DNS Server	This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch. The following modes are supported:■ No DNS serverNo DNS server will be used..■ Configure IPv4 or IPv6Explicitly specify the name of local domain.Make sure the configured domain name meets your organization's given domain.■ From any DHCPv6 interfacesThe first domain name offered from a DHCPv6 lease to a DHCPv6-enabled interface will be used.■ From this DHCPv6 interfaceSpecify from which DHCPv6-enabled interface a provided domain name should be preferred.
	DNS Proxy	When DNS proxy is enabled, system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS server, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network.
IP Interface	Delete	Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.
	VLAN	The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in this VLAN will
			be able to access the IP interface. This field is only available for input when creating a new interface.
	IPv4 DHCP	Enabled	Enable the DHCP client by checking this box.
		Fallback	The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease.
		Current Lease	For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column shows the current interface address, as provided by the DHCP server.
	IPv4	Address	Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation.
		Mask Length	The IPv4 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 0 and 30 bits for an IPv4 address.
	DHCPv6	Enable	Enable the DHCPv6 client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will configure the IPv6 address of the interface using the DHCPv6 protocol
		Rapid Commit	Enable the DHCPv6 Rapid-Commit option by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the DHCPv6 client terminates the waiting process as soon as a Reply message with a Rapid Commit option is received. This option is only manageable when DHCPv6 client is enabled.
		Current Lease	For DHCPv6 interface with an active lease, this column shows the interface address provided by the DHCPv6 server
	IPv6	Address	Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch. An IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:).
		Mask Length	The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 1 and 128 bits for an IPv6 address.
• IP Routes	Delete		Select this option to delete an existing IP route.
	Network		The destination IP network or host address of this route. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0 or IPv6 :: notation.
	Mask Length		The destination IP network or host mask, in number of bits (prefix length).
	Gateway		The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.
	Next Hop VLAN		The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway.

Buttons

Add Interface

Click to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 128 interfaces are supported.

Add Route

: Click to add a new IP route. A maximum of 32 routes are supported.

Apply

: Click to apply changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.1.3 IP Status

IP Status displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbor cache (ARP cache) status. The screen in Figure 4-2-1-3 appears.

IP Interfaces

Interface	Type	Address	Status
OS:lo	LINK	00-00-00-00-00-00
OS:lo	IPv4	127.0.0.1/8
OS:lo	IPv6	fe80:1::1/64
OS:lo	IPv6	::1/128
VLAN1	LINK	00-30-4f-11-22-33
VLAN1	IPv4	192.168.0.100/20
VLAN1	IPv6	fe80:2::230:4fff:fe11:2233/64

IP Routes

Network	Gateway	Status
127.0.0.1/32	127.0.0.1
192.168.0.0/24	VLAN1
192.168.0.0/20	VLAN1
224.0.0.0/4	127.0.0.1
::1/128	::1

Neighbour cache

IP Address	Link Address
192.168.0.123	VLAN1:00-30-4f-91-e6-45
fe80:2::230:4fff.fe11:2233	VLAN1:00-30-4f-11-22-33

Figure 4-2-1-3: IP Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Interfaces	Interface	The name of the interface.
	Type	The address type of the entry. This may be LINK or IPv4.
	Address	The current address of the interface (of the given type).
	Status	The status flags of the interface (and/or address).
• IP Routes	Network	The destination IP network or host address of this route.
	Gateway	The gateway address of this route.
	Status The status flags of the route.
• Neighbor Cache	IP Address	The IP address of the entry.
	Link Address	The Link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP address given exists.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page.

4.2.1.4 ARP

This page provides ARP configuration settings. press the "Apply" button to take effect, the screen in Figure 4-2-1-4 appears.

ARP Table Configuration
Aging Configuration

Disable Automatic Aging	☐
Aging Time	300 seconds

ARP Table

IP Address	Link Address
10.1.20.70	VLAN1:c8:9c:dc:ec:d6:dd
10.1.20.38	VLAN1:18:31:bf:92:0a:8d
10.1.20.254	VLAN1:a8:f7:e0:5c:54:bf

Figure 4-2-1-4:
Figure 4-2-1-4: ARP Table Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Aging Configuration	Disable Automatic Aging	Allow to click to disable the automatic aging.
	Aning Time	Allow to change the aging time settings and the available range is 10 to 1000000 seconds.
• ARP Table	IP Address	Display the IP address.
	Link Address	Display the VLAN and MAC address information.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page.

Clear

: Clears all statistics.

4.2.1.5 Users Configuration

This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser. After setup is completed, press the "Apply" button to take effect. Please login web interface with new user name and password; the screen in Figure 4-2-1-5 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-5: Users Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
User Name	The name identifying the user. This is also a link to Add/Edit User.
Privilege Level	The privilege level of the user.The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the full control of the device. But other values need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be the same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access to that group.By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access. And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) needs user privilege level 15.Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.

Buttons

Add New User

: Click to add a new user.

Add / Edit User

This page configures a user – add, edit or delete user.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
•Username	A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 31. The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores.
•Password	The password of the user. The allowed string length is 1 to 31.
•Password (again)	Please enter the user's new password here again to confirm.
•Privilege Level	The privilege level of the user.The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the device. But others value need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group.By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access. And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) needs user privilege level 15.Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel

: Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users.

Delete User

Delete the current user. This button is not available for new configurations (Add new user).

Once the new user is added, the new user entry is shown on the Users Configuration page.

If you forget the new password after changing the default password, please press the "Reset" button on the front panel of the Managed Switch for over 10 seconds and then release it. The current setting including VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode.

4.2.1.6 Privilege Levels

This page provides an overview of the privilege levels. After setup is completed, please press the "Apply" button to take effect. Please login web interface with new user name and password and the screen in Figure 4-2-1-6 appears.

Privilege Level Configuration

Group Name	Privilege Levels
	Configuration Read-only	Configuration/Execute Read/write	Status/Statistics Read-only	Status/Statistics Read/write
Aggregation	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Diagnostics	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Firmware	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
IP	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
IPMC_Snooping	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
LACP	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
LLDP	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Loop_Protect	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
MAC_Table	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Miscellaneous	15 ▼	15 ▼	15 ▼	15 ▼
MVR	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
NTP	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
POE	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Ports	5 ▼	10 ▼	1 ▼	10 ▼
Private_VLANs	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
QoS	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Security_access	10 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Security_network	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Spanning_Tree	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
System	5 ▼	10 ▼	1 ▼	10 ▼
UPnP	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
VLANs	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼
Voice_VLAN	5 ▼	10 ▼	5 ▼	10 ▼

Apply

Reset

Figure 4-2-1-6: Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Group Name	The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of a single module (e.g. LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them contain more than one. The following description defines these privilege level groups in details:■ System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Log.■ Security : Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port, MAC based and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection and IP source guard.■ IP: Everything except 'ping'.■ Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.■ Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.■ Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password, Configuration Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web- Users, Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance.■ Debug: Only present in CLI.
• Privilege Level	Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups:■ Configuration read-only■ Configuration/execute read-write■ Status/statistics read-only■ Status/statistics read-write (e.g. for clearing of statistics).

Buttons

: Click to apply changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.1.7 NTP Configuration

Configure NTP on this page. NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses UDP (data grams) as transport layer. You can specify NTP Servers. The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-1-7 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-7: NTP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the NTP mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable NTP mode operation. When enabling NTP mode operation, the agent forward and transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.■ Disabled: Disable NTP mode operation.
• Server #	Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field ():.For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol ‘::’ is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros, but it can only appear once. It also uses a legal IPv4 address like ‘::192.1.2.34’.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.1.8 Time Configuration

This page allows you to configure the Time Zone.

Time Zone Configuration

Time Zone Configuration
Time Zone	(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time
Hours	0
Minutes	0
Acronym	(0 - 16 characters)

Time Zone Configuration

Object Description
• Time Zone	Lists various Time Zones world wide. Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop down and click Save to set. The 'Manual Setting' options is used for the specific time zone which is excluded from the options list.
• Hours	Number of hours offset from UTC. The field only available when time zone manual setting.
• Minutes	Number of minutes offset from UTC. The field only available when time zone manual setting.
• Acronym	User can set the acronym of the time zone. This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time zone. ( Range : Up to 16 characters ) Notice the string " is a special syntax that is reserved for null input.

Daylight Saving Time

This page is used to setup Daylight Saving Time Configuration.

Daylight Saving Time Configuration

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Daylight Saving Time Configuration	Daylight Saving Time- This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year. Select 'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled)
Recurring Configurations
Start time settings	Week- Select the starting week number.Day- Select the starting day.
	Month - Select the starting month.Hours - Select the starting hour.Minutes - Select the starting minute.
End time settings	Week - Select the ending week number.Day - Select the ending day.Month - Select the ending month.Hours - Select the ending hour.Minutes - Select the ending minute.
Offset settings	Offset - Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to 1439 )
Non Recurring Configurations
Start time settings	Month - Select the starting month.Date - Select the starting date.Year - Select the starting year.Hours - Select the starting hour.Minutes - Select the starting minute.
End time settings	Month - Select the ending month.Date - Select the ending date.Year - Select the ending year.Hours - Select the ending hour.Minutes - Select the ending minute.
Offset settings	Offset - Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to 1439 )

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.1.9 Time Configuration

Configure Time Zone on this page. A Time Zone is a region that has a uniform standard time for legal, commercial, and social purposes. It is convenient for areas in close commercial or other communication to keep the same time, so time zones tend to follow the boundaries of countries and their subdivisions. The Time Zone Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-1-9 appears

Figure 4-2-1-9: Time Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Time Zone	Lists various Time Zones worldwide. Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop-down and click Save to set.
• Acronym	User can set the acronym of the time zone. This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time zone. ( Range: Up to 16 characters )
• Daylight Saving Time	This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year. Select'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled).
• Start Time Settings	• Week - Select the starting week number.• Day - Select the starting day.• Month - Select the starting month.• Hours - Select the starting hour.• Minutes - Select the starting minute.
• End Time Settings	• Week - Select the ending week number.• Day - Select the ending day.• Month - Select the ending month.• Hours - Select the ending hour.• Minutes - Select the ending minute
• Offset Settings	Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. (Range: 1 to 1440)

Buttons

: Click to apply changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.1.10 UPnP

Configure UPnP on this page. UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components. The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-1-10-1 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-10-1: UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPnP related packets to CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled.
• Advertising Duration	The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch. If a control point does not receive any message within the duration, it will think that the switch no longer exists. Due to the unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one-half of the advertising duration. In the implementation, the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one-half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400.
• IP Addressing Mode	IP addressing mode provides two ways to determine IP address assignment:Dynamic: Default selection for UPnP. UPnP module helps users choosing the IP address of the switch device. It finds the first available system IP address.Static: User specifies the IP interface VLAN for choosing the IP address of the switch device.
• Static VLAN Interface ID	The index of the specific IP VLAN interface. It will only be applied when IP Addressing Mode is static. Valid configurable values ranges from 1 to 4095. Default value is 1.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

GS-6320-8P2X

Figure 4-2-1-10-2: UPnP devices Shown on Windows My Network Place

4.2.1.11 CPU Load

This page displays the CPU load, using an SVG graph. The load is measured as average over the last 100ms, 1 sec and 10 seconds intervals. The last 120 samples are graphed, and the last numbers are displayed as text as well. In order to display the SVG graph, your browser must support the SVG format. Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support.

Specifically, at the time of writing, Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG. The CPU Load screen in Figure 4-2-1-11 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-11: CPU Load Page Screenshot

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

If your browser cannot display anything on this page, please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer.

4.2.1.12 System Log

The Managed Switch system log information is provided here. The System Log screen in Figure 4-2-1-12 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-12: System Log Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
• Level	The level of the system log entry. The following level types are supported:■ Info: Information level of the system log.■ Warning: Warning level of the system log.■ Error: Error level of the system log.■ All: All levels.
• Clear Level	To clear the system log entry level. The following level types are supported:■ Info: Information level of the system log.■ Warning: Warning level of the system log.■ Error: Error level of the system log.■ All: All levels.
• Time	The time of the system log entry.
• Message	The message of the system log entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Updates the system log entries, starting from the current entry ID.

Clear

: Flushes the selected log entries.

Hide

Hides the selected log entries.

Download

Downloads the selected log entries.

k<

Updates the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

4.2.1.13 Detailed Log

The Managed Switch system detailed log information is provided here. The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4-2-1-13 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-13: Detailed Log Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
• Message	The message of the system log entry.

Buttons

Download the system log entry to the current entry ID.

Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID.

: Print the system log entry to the current entry ID.

4.2.1.14 Remote Syslog

Configure remote syslog on this page. The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4-2-1-14 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-14: Remote Syslog Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the syslog message will send out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments. The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable remote syslog mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable remote syslog mode operation.
• Syslog Server IP	Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch provides DNS feature, it also can be a host name.
• Syslog Level	Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server. Possible modes are:■ Info: Send information, warnings and errors.■ Warning: Send warnings and errors.■ Error: Send errors.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.1.15 SMTP Configuration

This page facilitates an SMTP Configuration on the switch. The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4-2-1-15 appears.

Figure 4-2-1-15: SMTP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• SMTP Mode	Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch.
• SMTP Server	Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server.
• SMTP Port	Set port number of SMTP service.
• SMTP Authentication	Controls whether SMTP authentication is enabled if authentication is required when an e-mail is sent.
• Authentication User Name	Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enabled.
• Authentication Password	Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enabled.
• E-mail From	Type the sender's e-mail address. This address is used for reply e-mails.
• E-mail Subject	Type the subject/title of the e-mail.
• E-mail 1 To	Type the receiver's e-mail address.
• E-mail 2 To

Buttons

test : Send a test mail to mail server to check whether this account is available or not.
Save : Click to save changes.
Reset : Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2 SNMP

4.2.2.1 SNMP Overview

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth.

An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components: Network management stations (NMSs), SNMP agents,

Management information base (MIB) and network-management protocol:

■ Network management stations (NMSs): Sometimes called consoles, these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements. Physically, NMSs are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers with fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk space. At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment.
Agents: Agents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element.
■ Management information base (MIB): A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store. Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules.
■ Network-management protocol: A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs. SNMP is the Internet community's de facto standard management protocol.

PC / Workstation with SNMP application

IP Address: 192.168.0.x

Managed Switch SNMP Agent Status: Enabled

IP Address: 192.168.0.100
Figure 4-2-2-1:

SNMP Operations

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response.

- Get -- Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent.

Set -- Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent.

- Trap -- Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message.

SNMP Community

An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one

SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities.

SNMP default communities are:

Write = private
Read = public

Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's SNMP function. This section has the following items:

■ System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page.
■ System Information The system information is provided here.
■ SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page.
■ SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page.
■ SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page.
■ SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page.
■ SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page.
■ SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page.

4.2.2.2 System Configuration

Configure SNMP on this page. The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-2-2 appears.

Figure 4-2-2-2: SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object	Description
• Mode	Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
• Engine ID	Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2.3 System Information

The switch system information is provided here. The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4-2-2-3 appears.

Figure 4-2-2-3: System Information Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• System Contact	The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together with information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
• System Name	An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is the node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are permitted as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha character. And the first or last character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0 to 255.
• System Location	The physical location of this node(e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.

4.2.2.4 SNMP Trap Configuration

Configure SNMP trap on this page. The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-2-4 appears.

Trap Destination Configurations

Delete	Name	Enable	Version	Destination Address	Destination Port
			Add New Entry
			Apply	Reset

Figure 4-2-2-4-1: SNMP Trap Destination Configuration Page Screenshot

Click 'Add New Entry' and then the SNMP Trap Configuration page appears.

SNMP Trap Configuration

Trap Config Name
Trap Mode	Disabled✓
Trap Version	SNMP v2c✓
Trap Community	Public
Trap Destination Address
Trap Destination Port	162
Trap Inform Mode	Disabled✓
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds)	3
Trap Inform Retry Times	5
Trap Probe Security Engine ID	Enabled✓
Trap Security Engine ID
Trap Security Name	None✓

SNMP Trap Event

Figure 4-2-2-4-2: SNMP Trap Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Trap Config	Indicates which trap Configuration's name for configuring. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Mode	Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Trap Version	Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:■ SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.■ SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.■ SNMP v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Trap Community	Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Destination Address	Indicates the SNMP trap destination address.
Trap Destination Port	Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port, the port range is 1~65535.
Trap Inform Mode	Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.■ Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds)	Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout.The allowed range is 0 to 2147.
Trap Inform Retry Times	Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times.The allowed range is 0 to 255.
Trap Probe Security Engine ID	Indicates the SNMPv3 trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible values are:■ Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.■ Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Trap Security Engine ID	Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed. When "Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically. Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.
Trap Security Name	Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled.
System	Enable/disable that the Interface group's traps. Possible traps are:■ Warm Start: Enable/disable Warm Start trap.■ Cold Start: Enable/disable Cold Start trap.
• Interface	Indicates that the Interface group's traps. Possible traps are:■ Link Up: Enable/disable Link up trap.■ Link Down: Enable/disable Link down trap.■ LLDP: Enable/disable LLDP trap.
• AAA	Indicates that the AAA group's traps. Possible traps are:Authentication Fail: Enable/disable SNMP trap authentication failure trap.
• Switch	Indicates that the Switch group's traps. Possible traps are:■ STP: Enable/disable STP trap.■ RMON: Enable/disable RMON trap.

4.2.2.5 Source

This page provides SNMP trap source configurations. A trap is sent for the given trap source if at least one filter with filter type included matches the filter, and no filters with filter type excluded matches.

Trap Configuration

Trap Source Configurations

graph TD
    A["Delete"] --> B["No entry exists"]
    B --> C["Add New Entry"]
    C --> D["Save Reset"]

Figure 4-2-2-5-1: SNMP Trap Source Configuration Page Screenshot

Click "Add New Entry" to add a new entry. The maximum entry count is 32.

Trap Configuration

Trap Source Configurations

Delete	Name	Type	Subset OID
Delete	coldStart	included
	coldStart warmStart linkUp linkDown authenticationFailure entConfigChange newRoot topologyChange lldpRemTablesChange risingAlarm fallingAlarm ipTrapInterfacesLink psecTrapGlobalsMain psecTrapInterfaces		Add New Entry Save Reset

Figure 4-2-2-5-2: SNMP Trap Source Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Name	Indicates the name for the entry.
• Type	The filter type for the entry. Possible types are:■ included: An optional flag to indicate a trap is sent for the given trap source is matched.■ excluded: An optional flag to indicate a trap is not sent for the given trap source is matched.
• Subset OID	The subset OID for the entry.The value should depend on the what kind of trap name.For example, the ifldex is the subset OID of linkUp and linkDown. A valid subset OID is one or more digital number(0-4294967295) or asterisk(*) which are separated by dots(.). The first character must not begin with asterisk(*) and the maximum of OID count must not exceed 128.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new community entry. The maximum entry count is 32

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2.6 SNMPv3 Communities

Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page. The entry index key is Community. The SNMPv3 Communities screen in

Figure 4-2-2-5 appears.

Figure 4-2-2-6: SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Community	Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126. The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string.
Source IP	Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask.
Source Mask	Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.

Buttons

Add New Entry

: Click to add a new community entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2.7 SNMPv3 Users

Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page. The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name. The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4-2-2-7 appears.

SNMPv3 User Configuration

Delete	Engine ID	User Name	Security Level	Authentication Protocol	Authentication Password	Privacy Protocol	Privacy Password
	800007e5017f000001	default_user	NoAuth, NoPriv	None	None	None	None

Figure 4-2-2-7: SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Engine ID	An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must contain an even number (in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for access control. For the USM entry, the usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are the entry's keys.In a simple agent, usmUserEngineID is always that agent's own snmpEngineID value. The value can also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate. In other words, if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.
User Name	A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Level	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Protocol	Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible authentication protocol are:None: None authentication protocol.MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authenticationprotocol.■ SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol.The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
• Authentication Password	A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For MD5 authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
• Privacy Protocol	Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocol are:■ None: None privacy protocol.■ DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol.■ AES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses AES authentication protocol.
• Privacy Password	A string identifying the privacy pass phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new user entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2.8 SNMPv3 Groups

Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page. The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name. The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4-2-2-8 appears.

SNMPv3 Group Configuration

Delete	Security Model	Security Name	Group Name
	v1	public	default_ro_group
	v1	private	default_rw_group
	v2c	public	default_ro_group
	v2c	private	default_rw_group
	usm	default_user	default_rw_group

Add New Entry

Apply

Reset

Figure 4-2-2-8: SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Security Model	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:■ v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.■ v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.■ usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Name	A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to.The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Group Name	A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new group entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2.9 SNMPv3 Views

Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree. The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4-2-2-9 appears.

SNMPv3 View Configuration

Figure 4-2-2-9: SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
View Name	A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
View Type	Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view type are:■included:An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.■excluded:An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.In general, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', it should be exist another view entry which view type is 'included' and it's OID subtree overstep the 'excluded' view entry.
OID Subtree	The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed OID length is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk(*).

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new view entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.2.10 SNMPv3 Access

Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model and Security Level.

The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4-2-2-10 appears.

SNMPv3 Access Configuration

Figure 4-2-2-10: SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Group Name	A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Model	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:■ any: Accepted any security model (v1|v2c|usm).■ v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.■ v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.■ usm: User-based Security Model (USM)
Security Level	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:■ NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.■ Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.■ Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
Read View Name	The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Write View Name	The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new access entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.3 RMON

RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP. RMON is a set of MIB definitions, used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces, enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors. RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets.

MID of RMON consists of 10 groups. The switch supports the most frequently used groups 1, 2, 3 and 9:

■ Statistics: Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the agent.
■ History: Record periodical statistic samples available from statistics.
- Alarm: Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON agent records.
■ Event: A list of all events generated by RMON agent.

Alarm depends on the implementation of Event. Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics. Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network, and provide some alerts upon abnormal events (sending Trap or record in logs).

4.2.3.1 RMON Alarm Configuration

Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.; screen in Figure 4-2-3-1 appears.

Figure 4-2-3-1: RMON Alarm Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Interval	Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold. The range is from 1 to 2^31-1 .
Variable	Indicates the particular variable to be sampled; the possible variables are:■ InOctets: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.■ InUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■ InNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■ InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.■ InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contains errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.■ InUnknownProtos: the number of the inbound packets that is discarded because of the unknown or un-support protocol.■ OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.■ OutUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets that requests to transmit.■ OutNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multi-cast packets that requests to transmit.■ OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that is discarded even the packets are normal.■ OutErrors: The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.■ OutQLen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
• Sample Type	The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds; possible sample types are:■ Absolute: Get the sample directly.■ Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).
• Value	The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
• Startup Alarm	The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds; possible sample types are:■ RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.■ FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.■ RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold (default).
• Rising Threshold	Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).
• Rising Index	Rising event index (1-65535).
• Falling Threshold	Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)
• Falling Index	Falling event index (1-65535).

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new community entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.3.2 RMON Alarm Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table; screen in Figure 4-2-3-2 appears.

Figure 4-2-3-2: RMON Alarm Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.
• Interval	Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold.
• Variable	Indicates the particular variable to be sampled.
• Sample Type	The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds.
• Value	The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
• Startup Alarm	The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.
• Rising Threshold	Rising threshold value
• Rising Index	Rising event index
• Falling Threshold	Falling threshold value
• Falling Index	Falling event index

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table, starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.2.3.3 RMON Event Configuration

Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-2-3-3 appears.

Figure 4-2-3-3 RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Desc	Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.
Type	Indicates the notification of the event; the possible types are:■none: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.■log: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■snmptrap: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■logandtrap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.
Community	Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is "public".
Event Last Time	Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event.

Buttons

ew Entry: Click to add a new community entry.

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.3.4 RMON Event Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table; screen in Figure 4-2-3-4 appears.

Figure 4-2-3-4: RMON Event Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Event Index	Indicates the index of the event entry.
• Log Index	Indicates the index of the log entry.
• Logtime	Indicates Event log time.
• Log Description	Indicates the Event description.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

<<

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.2.3.5 RMON History Configuration

Configure RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-2-3-5 appears.

graph LR
    A["Delete"] --> B["ID"]
    B --> C["Data Source"]
    C --> D["Interval"]
    D --> E["Buckets"]
    E --> F["Buckets Granted"]
    G["Add New Entry"] --> H["Apply"]
    H --> I["Reset"]

Figure 4-2-3-5: RMON History Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source	Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored.
Interval	Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.
Buckets	Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON. The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.
Buckets Granted	The number of data will be saved in the RMON.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new community entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.3.6 RMON Statistics

Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-2-3-6 appears.

RMON Statistics Configuration

Figure 4-2-3-6: RMON Statistics Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source	Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new community entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.4 DHCP Relay

4.2.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay

Configure DHCP Relay on this page. DHCP Relay is used to forward and transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.

The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options:

■ Circuit ID (option 1)
■ Remote ID (option 2)

The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on.

The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.

The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes representing the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID. The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.

The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value equals the DHCP relay agent's MAC address. The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-4-1 appears.

Figure 4-2-4-1 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Relay Mode	Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When enabling DHCP relay mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain. And the DHCP broadcast message won't flood for security considered.■ Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.
• Relay Server	Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address. A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.
Relay Information Mode	Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When enabling DHCP relay information mode operation, the agent inserts specific information (option82) into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removing it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client. It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled.■ Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.
Relay Information Policy	Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When enabling DHCP relay information mode operation, if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information. It will enforce the policy. And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled. Possible policies are:■ Replace: Replace the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it.■ Keep: Keep the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it.■ Drop: Drop the package when receiving a DHCP message that already contains relay information.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.4.2 DHCPv4 Relay Statistics

This page provides statistics for DHCP relay. The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4-2-4-2 appears.

Figure 4-2-4-2: DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Server Statistics

Object Description
• Transmit to Server	The packet number that relayed from client to server.
• Transmit Error	The packet number that erroneously sent packets to clients.
• Receive from Server	The packet number that received packets from server.
• Receive Missing Agent Option	The packet number that received packets without agent information options.
• Receive Missing Circuit ID	The packet number that received packets whose the Circuit ID option was missing.
• Receive Missing Remote ID	The packet number that received packets whose Remote ID option was missing.
• Receive Bad Circuit ID	The packet number whose the Circuit ID option did not match the known circuit ID.
Receive Bad Remote ID	The packet number whose the Remote ID option did not match the known Remote ID.

Client Statistics

Object Description
• Transmit to Client	The packet number that relayed packets from server to client.
• Transmit Error	The packet number that erroneously sent packets to servers.
• Receive from Client	The packet number that received packets from server.
• Receive Agent Option	The packet number that received packets with relay agent information option.
• Replace Agent Option	The packet number that replaced received packets with relay agent information option.
• Keep Agent Option	The packet number that kept received packets with relay agent information option.
• Drop Agent Option	The packet number that dropped received packets with relay agent information option.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears all statistics.

4.2.4.3 DHCPv6 Relay

This is a table to configure Dhcp6_Relay for a specific vlan.

The displayed settings are:

DHCPv6 Relay Configuration

Delete	Interface	Relay Interface	Relay Destination
No entry exists

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification.
• Default	Interface identification. The id of the interface used for relaying.
• Relay Destination	An lpv6 address represented as human readable test as specified in RFC5952. The IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 server that requests shall be relayed to. The default value 'ff05::1:3' mans 'any DHCP server'.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.4.4 DHCPv6 Relay Statistics

Shows current, configured relay agents and their statistics.

DHCPv6 Relay Status and Statistics

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Dropped server packets with interface option missing: 0

Interface	Relay Interface	Relay Address	Tx to server	Rx from server	Server pkts dropped	Tx to client	Rx from client	Client pkts dropped	Clear stats
No entry exists

Clear all statistics

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification. The id of the interface that receives client requests.
• Relay Interface	Interface identification. The id of the interface used for relaying.
• Relay Address	An IPv6 address represented as human readable test as specified in RFC5952. The IPv6 address that requests shall be relayed to. The default value 'ff05::1:3' means 'any DHCPv6 server'.
• Tx to server	Integer number. Number of packets received from server.
• Rx from server	Integer number. Number of packets received from server.
• Server pkts dropped	Integer number. Number of packets from server that relay agent drops.
• Tx to client	Integer number. Number of packets sent to client.
• Rx from client	Integer number. Number of packets received from client.
• Client pkts dropped	Integer number. Number of packets from client that relay agent drops.
• Clear stats	Resets all statistics counters of relevant entry to zero.

Buttons

Clear all statistics

: Resets all statistics counters to zero.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.2.5 DHCP server

4.2.5.1 Mode

Configure DHCP server mode on this page. The entry index key is ID.; screen in Figure 4-2-5-1 appears.

DHCP Server Mode Configuration

Global Mode

Mode Disabled ▼

VLAN Mode

Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-5-1: DHCP server mode Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Configure the operation mode per system. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable DHCP server per system.Disabled: Disable DHCP server pre system.
• VLAN Mode	Configure operation mode to enable/disable DHCP server per VLAN.
• VLAN Range	Indicate the VLAN range in which DHCP server is enabled or disabled. The first VLAN ID must be smaller than or equal to the second VLAN ID. BUT, if the VLAN range contains only 1 VLAN ID, then you can just input it into either one of the first and second VLAN ID or both.On the other hand, if you want to disable existed VLAN range, then you can follow the steps.1. press to add a new VLAN range.2. 2. input the VLAN range that you want to disable.3. 3. choose Mode to be Disabled.4. 4. press to apply the change.Then, you will see the disabled VLAN range is removed from the DHCP Server mode configuration page.
• Mode	■ Indicate the operation mode per VLAN. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable DHCP server per VLAN.Disabled: Disable DHCP server pre VLAN.

Buttons

Add VLAN Range

: Click to add a new VLAN range.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.5.2 Excluded IP

Configure DHCP server mode on this page. The entry index key is ID.; screen in Figure 4-2-5-2 appears.

DHCP Server Excluded IP Configuration

Excluded IP Address

Figure 4-2-5-2: DHCP server excluded Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP range	Define the IP range to be excluded IP addresses. The first excluded IP must be smaller than or equal to the second excluded IP. BUT, if the IP range contains only 1 excluded IP, then you can just input it to either one of the first and second excluded IP or both.

Buttons

Add IP Range

: Click to add a new excluded IP range.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.5.3 Pool

This page manages DHCP pools. According to the DHCP pool, DHCP server will allocate IP address and deliver configuration parameters to DHCP client. screen in Figure 4-2-5-3 appears.

DHCP Server Pool Configuration

Pool Setting

Delete	Name	Type	IP	Subnet Mask	Lease Time
	vlan1	Network	192.168.0.100	255.255.255.0	3 days 0 hours 0 minutes

Add New Pool

Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-5-3: DHCP server pool Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Name	Configure the pool name that accepts all printable characters, except white space. If you want to configure the detail settings, you can click the pool name to go into the configuration page.
• Type	Display which type of the pool is.Network: the pool defines a pool of IP addresses to service more than one DHCP client.Host: the pool services for a specific DHCP client identified by client identifier or hardware address.
• IP	Display network number of the DHCP address pool.If "-" is displayed, it means not defined
• Subnet Mask	Display subnet mask of the DHCP address pool.If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.
• Lease Time	Display lease time of the pool.

Buttons

Add New Pool

Click to add a new excluded IP range.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.5.4 Statistics

This page displays the database counters and the number of DHCP messages sent and received by DHCP server.. screen in Figure 4-2-5-4 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Clear

DHCP Server Statistics

Database Counters

Pool	Excluded IP Address	Declined IP Address
1	1	0

Binding Counters

Automatic Binding	Manual Binding	Expired Binding
0	0	0

DHCP Message Received Counters

DISCOVER	REQUEST	DECLINE	RELEASE	INFORM
0	0	0	0	0

DHCP Message Sent Counters

OFFER	ACK	NAK
0	0	0

Figure 4-2-5-4: DHCP server Statistics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Database Counters

Object Description
• Pool	Number of pools
• Excluded IP Address	Number of excluded IP address ranges
• Declined IP Address	Number of declined IP addresses.

Binding Counters

Object Description
• Automatic Binding	Number of bindings with network-type pools
• Manual Binding	Number of bindings that administrator assigns an IP address to a client. That is, the pool is of host type.
• Expired Binding	Number of bindings that their lease time expired or they are cleared from Automatic/Manual type bindings.

DHCP message Received Counters

Object Description
• Discover	Number of DHCP DISCOVER messages received.
• Request	Number of DHCP REQUEST messages received.
• Decline	Number of DHCP DECLINE messages received.
• Release	Number of DHCP RELEASE messages received.
• Inform	Number of DHCP INFORM messages received.

DHCP message Sent Counters

Object Description
• Offer	Number of DHCP OFFER messages sent.
• ACK	Number of DHCP ACK messages sent.
• NAK	Number of DHCP NAK messages sent.

Buttons

Auto-refresh seconds.

: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every ?

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.5.5 Binding

This page displays bindings generated for DHCP clients. screen in Figure 4-2-5-5 appears.

Figure 4-2-5-5: DHCP server Binding IP page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP	Display IP address allocated to DHCP client.
• Type	Display type of binding. Possible types are Automatic, Manual, Expired.
• State	Display state of binding. Possible states are Committed, Allocated, Expired
• Pool Name	Display the pool that generates the binding.
• Server ID	Display server IP address to service the binding.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically

Refresh : Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear Selected

Click to clear selected bindings. If the selected binding is Automatic or Manual, then it is changed to

be Expired. If the selected binding is Expired, then it is freed.

Clear Automatic

Click to clear all Automatic bindings and Change them to Expired bindings.

Clear Manual

Click to clear all Manual bindings and Change them to Expired bindings.

Clear Expired

Click to clear all Expired bindings and free them.

4.2.5.6 Declined IP

This page displays declined IP addresses. screen in Figure 4-2-5-6 appears.

Figure 4-2-5-6: DHCP server Declined IP Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Delined IP	Display List of IP addresses declined.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.2.6 Remote Management

The Industrial Managed PoE+ Switch can support both NMS controller and CloudViewer Sever for remote management. PLANET's NMS Controller is a Network Management System can monitor all kinds of deployed network devices, such as Industrial Managed PoE+ Switches, media converters, routers, smart APs, VoIP phones, IP cameras, etc., compliant with the SNMP Protocol, ONVIF Protocol and PLANET Smart Discovery utility. The CloudViewer is a free networking service just for PLANET Products. This service provides simplified network monitoring and real-time network status. Working with PLANET CloudViewer app, user can easily check network status, device information, Port and PoE status from Internet. Any other services are not included.

4.2.6.1 Remote NMS Configuration

The Remote NMS Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-6-1 appear.

Remote NMS Configuration

Figure 4-2-6-1: Remote NMS Configuration Page Screenshot

The PLANET NMS Controller – LAN Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-6-2 appear.

Remote NMS Configuration

Figure 4-2-6-2: PLANET NMS Controller – LAN Configuration Page Screenshot

Object Description
• Remote NMS Enable	Enable NMS management.
• NMS Controller IP address	The IP address of NMS Controller.
• Authorization Status	Indicate the authorization status of the switch to NMS Controller.

The CloudViewer Server – Internet screens in Figure 4-2-6-3 appear.

Remote NMS Configuration

Figure 4-2-6-3: CloudViewer Server – Internet Configuration Page Screenshot

Object Description
• Remote NMS Enable	Enable NMS management.
• Subscriber email	The email registered on CloudViewer Server.
• Password	The password of your CloudViewer account.
• Status	Indicate the status of connecting CloudViewer Server.

4.3 Switching

4.3.1 Port Management

Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's ports. This section has the following items:

■ Port Configuration Configures port connection settings
■ Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
■ Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
■ Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring
■ Name Map Interface Name to Port Number Map
■ DDMI Configure DDMI on this page.
■ DDMI Over View Display DDMI overview information on this page.
■ DDMI Detailed Display DDMI detailed information on this page.

4.3.1.1 Port Configuration

This page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here. The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-1-1 appears.

Figure 4-3-1-1: Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
• Port Description	Indicates the per port description.
• Link	The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and red indicates the link is down.
• Current Link Speed	Provides the current link speed of the port.
• Configured Link Speed	Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.Copper interface:■ Auto – It is default mode. Set up Auto negotiation.■ 10Mbps HDX - Force sets 10Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.■ 10Mbps FDX - Force sets 10Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ 100Mbps HDX - Force sets 100Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.■ 100Mbps FDX - Force sets 100Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ 1Gbps FDX - Force sets 1000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ Disable – Shut down the port manually.Fiber interface:■ 10G FDX –It is default mode. Force sets 10000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ 2.5G FDX – Force sets 2.5G Full-Duplex mode■ 1G FDX - Force sets 1000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ Automate – Set up 10G Auto negotiation.■ Disable – Shut down the port manually.
• Flow Control	When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner.When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
• Maximum Frame Size	Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS. The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 10056 bytes.

When setting each port to run at 100M Full-, 100M Half-, 10M Full-, and 10M Half-speed modes. The Auto-MDIX function will disable.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.

4.3.1.2 Port Statistics Overview

This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports. The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure

4-3-1-2 appears.

Port Statistics Overview

Port	Packets		Bytes		Errors		Drops		Filtered
	Received	Transmitted	Received	Transmitted	Received	Transmitted	Received	Transmitted	Received
1	1076	1047	158972	862468	0	0	0	0	0
2	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
3	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
4	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
5	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
6	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
7	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
8	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0

Figure 4-3-1-2: Port Statistics Overview Page Screenshot

The displayed counters are:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Packets	The number of received and transmitted packets per port.
• Bytes	The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.
• Errors	The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port.
• Drops	The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.
• Filtered	The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

Buttons

Download

Download the Port Statistics Overview result in EXCEL file.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears the counters for all ports.

Print

Print the Port Statistics Overview result.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.3.1.3 Port Statistics Details

This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display. The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and transmit, and the error counters for receive and transmit. The Detailed Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-3-1-3 appears.

Detailed Port Statistics Port 1

Receive Total		Transmit Total
Rx Packets	2335	Tx Packets	2066
Rx Octets	431172	Tx Octets	1531131
Rx Unicast	2039	Tx Unicast	2050
Rx Multicast	48	Tx Multicast	11
Rx Broadcast	248	Tx Broadcast	5
Rx Pause	0	Tx Pause	0
Receive Size Counters		Transmit Size Counters
Rx 64 Bytes	1465	Tx 64 Bytes	242
Rx 65-127 Bytes	175	Tx 65-127 Bytes	53
Rx 128-255 Bytes	66	Tx 128-255 Bytes	523
Rx 256-511 Bytes	553	Tx 256-511 Bytes	203
Rx 512-1023 Bytes	76	Tx 512-1023 Bytes	284
Rx 1024-1526 Bytes	0	Tx 1024-1526 Bytes	761
Rx 1527- Bytes	0	Tx 1527- Bytes	0
Receive Queue Counters		Transmit Queue Counters
Rx 00	2283	Tx 00	0
Rx 01	0	Tx 01	0
Rx 02	0	Tx 02	0
Rx 03	0	Tx 03	0
Rx 04	0	Tx 04	0
Rx 05	0	Tx 05	0
Rx 06	0	Tx 06	0
Rx 07	0	Tx 07	2066
Receive Error Counters		Transmit Error Counters
Rx Drops	52	Tx Drops	0
Rx CRC/Alignment	0	Tx Late/Exc. Coll.	0
Rx Undersize	0
Rx Oversize	0
Rx Fragments	0
Rx Jabber	0
Rx Filtered	52

Figure 4-3-1-3: Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Receive Total and Transmit Total

Object Description
• Rx and Tx Packets	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets
• Rx and Tx Octets	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes, including FCS, but excluding framing bits.
• Rx and Tx Unicast	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.
• Rx and Tx Multicast	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.
• Rx and Tx Broadcast	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.
• Rx and Tx Pause	A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that has an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.

Receive and Transmit Size Counters

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes.

Receive and Transmit Queue Counters

The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.

Receive Error Counters

Object Description
• Rx Drops	The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion.
• Rx CRC/Alignment	The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.
• Rx Undersize	The number of short frames received with valid CRC.
• Rx Oversize	The number of long frames received with valid CRC.
• Rx Fragments	The number of short frames received with invalid CRC.
• Rx Jabber	The number of long frames received with invalid CRC.
• Rx Filtered	The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.
2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port.

Transmit Error Counters

Object Description
• Tx Drops	The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.
• Tx Late/Exc. Coll.	The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for all ports.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.3.1.4 Port Mirror

Configure port Mirroring on this page. This function provides monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied. It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary.

• To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
• The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.

Port Mirror Application

graph TD
    A["Source Port"] --> B["Switch"]
    C["Target Port"] --> B
    B --> D["Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro"]
    D --> E["Tx: 101010 Rx: 111000"]
    E --> F["Mirroring"]
    F --> G["Tx: 101010 Rx: 111000"]

Figure 4-3-1-4-1: Port Mirror Application

The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:

• All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).
• All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).

Mirror Port Configuration

The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4-3-1-4-2 appears.and click the session ID to Figure 4-3-1-4-3

Mirror & RMirror Configuration Table

Figure 4-3-1-4-2: Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot

Figure 4-3-1-4-3: Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Session	Select session id to configure.
• Mode	To Enabled/Disabled the mirror or Remote Mirroring function
• Type	MirrorThe switch is running on mirror mode.Thesource port(s) anddestination portare located on this switch.SourceThe switch is a source node for monitor flow.Thesource port(s),reflector portare located on this switch.RMirror destinationThe switch is an end node for monitor flow.Thedestination port(s)is located on this switch.
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID points out where the monitor packet will copy to. The default VLAN ID is 200.
• Reflector Port	The reflector port is a method to redirect the traffic to Remote Mirroring VLAN. Any device connected to a port set as a reflector port loses connectivity until the Remote Mirroring is disabled.In the stacking mode, you need to select switch ID to select the correct device.If you shut down a port, it cannot be a candidate for reflector port.If you shut down the port which is a reflector port, the remote mirror function cannot work
Source VLAN(s)Configuration	The switch can supports VLAN-based Mirroring. If you want to monitor some VLANs on the switch, you can set the selected VLANs on this field.
Remote MirroringPort Configuration	The following table is used for port role selecting.■ Port: The logical port for the settings contained in the same row..■ Source: Select mirror mode.Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored.Both Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the Destination port.Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the Destination port.Frames transmitted are not mirrored.Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the Destination port.Frames received are not mirrored■ Destination: Select destination port.This checkbox is designed for mirror or Remote Mirroring.The destination port is a switched port that you receive a copy of traffic from the source port.

For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port. Because of this, mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.1.5 Name Map

Interface Name to Port Number Map Help

Many Web pages use a port number to express an interface, whereas CLI uses interface names. The table on this page provides a means to convert from one to the other.

Interface Name to Port Number Map

Interface Name	Port Number
Gi 1/1	1
Gi 1/2	2
Gi 1/3	3
Gi 1/4	4
Gi 1/5	5
Gi 1/6	6
Gi 1/7	7
Gi 1/8	8
10G 1/1	9
10G 1/2	10

4.3.1.6 DDMI

Configure DDMI on this page.

DDMI Configuration

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the DDMI mode operation. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable DDMI mode operation.Disabled: Disable DDMI mode operation.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

SFP Monitor Event Alert: □ Sent trap

Warning Temperature: 75 degrees C

Apply Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	DDMI port.
• Vendor	Indicates Vendor name SFP vendor name.
• Part Number	Indicates Vendor PN Part number provided by SFP vendor.
• Serial Number	Indicates Vendor SN Serial number provided by vendor.
• Revision	Indicates Vendor rev Revision level for part number provided by vendor.
• Data Code	Indicates Date code Vendor's manufacturing date code.
• Transceiver	Indicates Transceiver compatibility.
• speed	Display speed data
• Wave Length	Display Wave Length data
• Distance	Display Distance data
• SFP Event Alert Monitoring	This option is for user to make a temperature monitoring trap that if SFP module operating temperature is over the warning limit, a system log will be issued.
• Warning Temperature	This option is for use to set a temperature control trap for the SFP module. When the operating temperature of the SFP module reaches the warning limit, an alarm log will be issued.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.1.8 DDMI Detailed

Display DDMI detailed information on this page.

Transceiver Information

Vendor	-
Part Number	-
Serial Number	-
Revision	-
Data Code	-
Transceiver	-

DDMI Information

Type	Current	Alarm/Warning	Low Warning Threshold	High Warning Threshold	Low Alarm Threshold	High Alarm Threshold
Temperature [C]	-	-	-	-	-	-
Voltage [V]	-	-	-	-	-	-
Tx Bias [mA]	-	-	-	-	-	-
Tx Power [mW]	-	-	-	-	-	-
Rx Power [mW]	-	-	-	-	-	-

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Vendor	Indicates SFP vendor name.
Part Number	Indicates part number provided by SFP vendor.
Serial Number	Indicates part number provided by SFP vendor.
Revision	Indicates revision level for part number provided by SFP vendor.
Data Code	Indicates vendor's manufacturing date code.
Transceiver	Indicates SFP transceiver compatibility.
DDMI Infomration	Display DDMI infomration on this page.
Current	The current value of temperature, voltage, Tx bias, Tx power, and Rx power.
Alarm/Warning	Indicates whether there is an alarm or warning.
Low Warning Threshold	The low warning threshold value of temperature, voltage, Tx bias, Tx power, and Rx power.
High Warning Threshold	The high warning threshold value of temperature, voltage, Tx bias, Tx power, and Rx power.
Low Alarm Threshold	The low alarm threshold value of temperature, voltage, Tx bias, Tx power, and Rx power.
High Alarm Threshold	The high alarm threshold value of temperature, voltage, Tx bias, Tx power, and Rx power.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.2 Link Aggregation

Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs). Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy.

Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG, can be of different media types (UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types), provided they operate at the same speed.

Aggregated Links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the relevant links.

Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non-aggregated port, including auto-negotiation, speed, Duplex setting, etc.

The device supports the following Aggregation links :

■ Static LAGs (Port Trunk) – Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group.
■ Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them.

graph TD
    A["Router 1"] --> B["Router 2"]
    C["Router 3"] --> B
    D["Router 4"] --> B
    B --> E["Router"]
    F["Laptop 1"] --> E
    G["Laptop 2"] --> E
    H["Laptop 3"] --> E
    I["Laptop 4"] --> E
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    note right of B: Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation (Up to 4 Gbps)

Figure 4-3-2-1: Link Aggregation

The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links. Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network. LACP operation requires full-duplex mode, more detail information refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.

Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:

• The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ45, 100 Mbps fiber).
• The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions (see below).
• Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports.
• None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port.
• All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.
• The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole.
• Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop.
• Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop.

It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to 5 groups). If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregation group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group, then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports.

The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow (for example, a TCP connection) are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port. Recording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible. The aggregation code is based on the following information:

• Source MAC
• Destination MAC
  • Source and destination IPv4 address.
• Source and destination TCP/UDP ports for IPv4 packets

Normally, all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports. Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports. Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device (only limited by the quantity of ports on the device.) To configure a proper traffic distribution, the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed.

4.3.2.1 Common

This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group. The aggregation hash mode settings are global.

Hash Code Contributors

The Common Aggregation Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-2-1 appears.

Common Aggregation Configuration

Figure 4-3-2-1 : Common Aggregation Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Source MAC Address	The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Source MAC Address is enabled.
• Destination MAC Address	The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Destination MAC Address is disabled.
• IP Address	The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.
• TCP/UDP Port Number	The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable. By default, TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.

4.3.2.2 Groups

This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group. The aggregation hash mode settings are global.

The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-2-2 appears.

Aggregation Group Configuration

Figure 4-3-2-2: Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

.Object	Description
• Group ID	Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal" indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.
• Port Members	Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By default, no ports belong to any aggregation group.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.2.3 Static Aggregation

This page is used to see the staus of ports in Aggregation group

Aggregation Status

Aggr ID	Name	Type	Speed	Configured Ports	Aggregated Ports
No aggregation groups

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Aggr ID	The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.
• Name	Name of the Aggregation group ID.
• Type	Type of the Aggregation group(Static or LACP).
• Speed	Speed of the Aggregation group.
• Configured ports	Configured member ports of the Aggregation group.
• Aggregated ports	Aggregated member ports of the Aggregation group.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.2.4 LACP Configuration

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG.

This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-2-4 appears.

LACP System Configuration

System Priority

32768

LACP Port Configuration

Port	LACP	Timeout	Prio
*		<> √	32768
1	No	Fast √	32768
2	No	Fast √	32768
3	No	Fast √	32768
4	No	Fast √	32768
5	No	Fast √	32768
6	No	Fast √	32768
7	No	Fast √	32768
8	No	Fast √	32768
9	No	Fast √	32768
10	No	Fast √	32768

Figure 4-3-2-4 : LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• LACP Enabled	Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner.
• Key	The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group, while ports with different keys cannot.The default setting is “Auto”
• Role	The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each second, while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).
• Timeout	The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast will transmit LACP packets each second, while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet.
• Priority	The Priority controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role. Lower number means greater priority.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.2.5 LACP System Status

This page provides a status overview of all LACP instances. The LACP Status Page displays the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status. The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4-3-2-5 appears.

LACP System Status

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Local System ID

Priority	MAC Address
32768	a8-f7-e0-52-20-a1

Partner System Status

Aggr ID	Partner System ID	Partner Prio	Partner Key	Last Changed	Local Ports
No ports enabled or no existing partners

Figure 4-3-2.5: LACP System Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Aggr ID	The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.For LLAG the id is shown as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'
• Partner System ID	The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.
• Partner Key	The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.
• Partner Priority	The priority of the aggregation partner.
• Last Changed	The time since this aggregation changed.
• Local Ports	Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.2.6 LACP Internal Port Status

This page provides a status overview for the LACP internal (i.e. local system) status for all ports. Only ports that are part of an LACP group are shown.

LACP Internal Port Status

Figure 4-3-2.6: LACP internal Port Status Page Screenshot

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• State	The current port state:
• Down:	The port is not active.
• Active:	The port is in active state
• Standby	The port is in standby state.
• Key	The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together
• Priority	The priority assigned to this aggregation group.
• Activity	The LACP mode of the group (Active or Passive).
• Timeout	The timeout mode configured for the port (Fast or Slow).
• Aggregation	Show whether the system considers this link to be "aggregateable"; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.
• Synchronization	Show whether the system considers this link to be "IN_SYNC"; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct LAG, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the LAG is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.
• Collecting	Show if collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled.
• Distributing	Show if distribution of outgoing frames on this link is enabled.
• Defaulted	Show if the Actor's Receive machine is using Defaulted operational Partner information.
• Expired	Show if that the Actor's Receive machine is in the EXPIRED state.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.2.7 LACP Neighbor Port Status

This page provides a status overview for the LACP neighbor status for all ports. Only ports that are part of an LACP group are shown.

LACP Neighbor Port Status

Port

State

Aggr ID

Partner Key

Partner Port

Partner Port Prio

Activity

Timeout

Aggregation

Synchronization

Collecting

Distributing

Defaulted

Expired

No LACP neighbor status available

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• State	The current port state:Down: The port is not active.Active: The port is in active state.Standby: The port is in standby state.
• Aggr ID	The aggregation group ID which the port is assigned to.
• Partner Key	The key assigned to this port by the partner.
• Partner Port	The partner port number associated with this link.
• Partner Port Priority	The priority assigned to this partner port .
• Activity	The LACP mode of the group (Active or Passive).
• Timeout	The timeout mode configured for the partner port (Fast or Slow).
• Aggregation	Show whether the partner considers this link to be "aggregateable"; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.
• Synchronization	Show whether the partner considers this link to be "IN_SYNC"; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct LAG, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the LAG is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.
• Collecting	Show if collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled.
• Distributing	Show if distribution of outgoing frames on this link is enabled.
• Defaulted	Show if the partners Receive machine is using Defaulted operational Partner information.
• Expired	Show if that the partners Receive machine is in the EXPIRED state.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.2.8 LACP Port Statistics

This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports.

LACP Statistics
Auto-refresh □ Refresh Clear

Port	LACP Received	LACP Transmitted	Discarded
			Unknown	Illegal
No ports enabled

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• LACP Received	Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.
• LACP Transmitted	Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.
• Discarded	Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears the counters for all ports.

4.3.3 VLANs

4.3.3.1 VLAN Overview

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily.

VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains. A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated.

1. No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs.
2. The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag-unaware..

The Managed Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN. As new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_VLAN port member list. The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.

This section has the following items:

■ VLAN Port Configuration Enables VLAN group
■ VLAN Membership Status Displays VLAN membership status
■ VLAN Port Status Displays VLAN port status
■ SVL Shared VLAN Learning Configuration
■ VLAN Translation VLAN Translation Port Configuration
■ VLAN Translation Mappings VLAN Translation Mapping Table
■ Private VLAN Creates/removes primary or community VLANs
■ Port Isolation Enables/disablse port isolation on port
■ MAC-based VLAN Configures the MAC-based VLAN entries
■ MAC-based VLAN Status Displays MAC-based VLAN entries
■ Protocol-based VLAN Configures the protocol-based VLAN entries
■ Protocol-based VLAN Membership Displays the protocol-based VLAN entries

4.3.3.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.

An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups (such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).

VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.

This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features:

■ Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard
■ Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs
■ End stations can belong to multiple VLANs
■ Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
■ Priority tagging

IEEE 802.1Q Standard

IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).

VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast, multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.

VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging.:

■ The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers.
■ The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally.

Some relevant terms:

• Tagging - The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet.
• Untagging - The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header.

802.1Q VLAN Tags

The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address. Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority, 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.

The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained.

802.1Q Tag

graph TD
    A["User Priority"] --> B["3 bits"]
    C["CFI"] --> D["1 bit"]
    E["VLAN ID (VID)"] --> F["12 bits"]
    B --> G["TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier)"]
    D --> G
    F --> H["TCI (Tag Control Information)"]
    G --> I["2 bytes"]
    H --> I
    I --> J["Preamble Destination"]
    I --> K["Source Address"]
    I --> L["VLAN TAG Ethernet Type"]
    I --> M["Data FCS"]
    J --> N["Address 6 bytes"]
    K --> O["Address 6 bytes"]
    L --> P["4 bytes"]
    M --> Q["46-1500 bytes"]
    N --> R["6 bytes"]
    O --> S["6 bytes"]
    P --> T["4 bytes"]
    Q --> U["4 bytes"]

The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original Ether Type/Length or Logical Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be recalculated.

Adding an IEEE802.1Q Tag

graph TD
    A["Dest. Addr."] --> B["Src. Addr."]
    B --> C["Length/E. type"]
    C --> D["Data"]
    D --> E["Old CRC"]
    E --> F["New CRC"]
    G["Dest. Addr."] --> H["Src. Addr."]
    H --> I["E. type"]
    I --> J["Tag"]
    J --> K["Length/E. type"]
    K --> L["Data"]
    L --> M["New CRC"]
    N["Priority"] --> O["CFI"]
    O --> P["VLAN ID"]
    Q["Original Ethernet"] --> E
    R["New Tagged Packet"] --> J

Port VLAN ID

Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact. This allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices (and indeed, the entire network – if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).

Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the switch. If no VLAN are

defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID, in so far as VLAN are concerned. Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, the VID is.

Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network. The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same network.

A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them.

Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before packets are transmitted – should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet should be tagged.

Default VLANs

The Switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the "default". As new VLAN are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."

- Assigning Ports to VLANs

Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.

VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.

VLAN Classification

When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.

Port Overlapping

Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as

file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.

■ Untagged VLANs

Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.

4.3.3.3 VLAN Port Configuration

This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN. The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page. All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.

Understand nomenclature of the Switch

IEEE 802.1Q Tagged and Untagged

Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.

• Tagged: Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN information intact. The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions.
• Untagged: Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter the packet. Thus, all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1Q VLAN information. (Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network device.

Frame Income Frame Leave	Income Frame is tagged	Income Frame is untagged
Leave port is tagged	Frame remains tagged	Tag is inserted
Leave port is untagged	Tag is removed	Frame remain untagged

Table 4-3-3-3-1: Ingress / Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag / Untag Table

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q)

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks. Q-in-Q tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different

customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer's frames when they enter the service provider's network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.

A service provider's customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported. VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096.

graph TD
    subgraph_Customer_A_s_LAN_Headquarters["Customer A's LAN Headquarters"]
        A1["VLAN 1-20"] --> B1["MAN Edge Switch"]
        A2["VLAN 1-30"] --> B2["MAN Edge Switch"]
    end

    subgraph_Customer_B_s_LAN_Headquarters["Customer B's LAN Headquarters"]
        B1 --> C1["MAN Edge Switch"]
        B2 --> C2["MAN Edge Switch"]
    end

    subgraph_Customer_B_s_LAN_Factory["Customer B's LAN Factory"]
        C1 --> D1["MAN Edge Switch"]
        C2 --> D2["MAN Edge Switch"]
    end

    B1 -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| C1
    B2 -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| C2

    style B1 fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style B2 fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style C1 fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style C2 fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333

The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge, aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN (Metro Access Network) space. One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers' VLANs. This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering the MAN. When leaving the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is again available.

This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags.

In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table requirements is reduced.

Global VLAN Configuration

The Global VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-3-3-2 appears.

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Figure 4-3-3-3-2 : Global VLAN Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Allowed Access VLANs	This field shows the allowed Access VLANs, it only affects ports configured as Access ports. Ports in other modes are members of all VLANs specified in the Allowed VLANs field.By default, only VLAN 1 is enabled. More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound.The following example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300: 1,10-13,200,300. Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.
• Ethertype for Custom S-ports	This field specifies the ethertype/TPID (specified in hexadecimal) used for Custom S-ports. The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S-Custom-Port.

Port VLAN Configuration

The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-3-3-3 appears.

Port VLAN Configuration

Port	Mode	Port VLAN	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Ingress Acceptance	Egress Tagging	Allowed VLANs	Forbidden VLANs
*		1					1
1	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
2	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
3	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
4	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
5	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
6	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
7	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN
8	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN

Figure 4-3-3-3-3: Port VLAN Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port		This is the logical port number for this row.
• Mode	Access	Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations. Dynamic features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes. Access ports have the following characteristics:Member of exactly one VLAN, the Port VLAN (Access VLAN), which by default is 1Accepts untagged and C-tagged framesDiscards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLANOn egress all frames classified to the Access VLAN are transmitted untagged. Other (dynamically added VLANs) are transmitted tagged
	Trunk	Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously, and are normally used to connect to other switches. Trunk ports have the following characteristics:By default, a trunk port is member of all VLANs (1-4095)The VLANs that a trunk port is member of may be limited by the use of Allowed VLANsFrames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are discardedBy default, all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Native VLAN) get tagged on egress. Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get C-tagged on egressEgress tagging can be changed to tag all frames, in which case only tagged frames are accepted on ingress
	Hybrid	Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways, but adds additional port configuration features. In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports, hybrid ports have these abilities:Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware, C-tag aware, S-tag aware, or S-custom-tag awareIngress filtering can be controlledIngress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured independently
• Port VLAN		Determines the port's VLAN ID (PVID). Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095, default being 1.On ingress, frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware, the frame is untagged, or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port, but the frame is priority tagged (VLAN ID = 0).On egress, frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging configuration is set to untag Port VLAN.
		The Port VLAN is called an "Access VLAN" for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode.
• Port Type		Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type, that is, whether a frame's VLAN tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN, and if so, which TPID it reacts on. Likewise, on egress, the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag, if a tag is required.■ Unaware:On ingress, all frames, whether carrying a VLAN tag or not, get classified to the Port VLAN, and possible tags are not removed on egress.■ C-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with a C-tag.■ S-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 or 0x88A8 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with an S-tag.■ S-Custom-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID = 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype configured for Custom-S ports get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with the custom S-tag.
• Ingress Filtering		Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering. Access and Trunk ports always have ingress filtering enabled.■ If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded.■ If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine.However, the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of.
• Ingress Acceptance		Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress.■ Tagged and UntaggedBoth tagged and untagged frames are accepted.■ Tagged OnlyOnly tagged frames are accepted on ingress. Untagged frames are discarded.■ Untagged OnlyOnly untagged frames are accepted on ingress. Tagged frames are discarded.
Egress Tagging		This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode. Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress.■Untag Port VLANFrames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged. Other frames are transmitted with the relevant tag.■Tag AllAll frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted with a tag.■Untag AllAll frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted without a tag.
• Allowed VLANs		Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become members of. The field's syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.By default, a Trunk or Hybrid port will become member of all VLANs, and is therefore set to 1-4095. The field may be left empty, which means that the port will not become member of any VLANs.
• Forbidden VLANs		A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs. This is particularly useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be prevented from dynamically adding ports to VLANs. The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question. The syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.By default, the field is left blank, which means that the port may become a member of all possible VLANs.

The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.3.4 VLAN Membership Status

This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users. The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4-6-4 appears.

VLAN Membership Status for Combined users

	Port Members
VLAN ID	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10
1	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓

Figure 4-3-3-4: VLAN Membership Status for Combined User Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN User	A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID, UVID. Currently we support following VLAN: - Admin: This is referred as static. - NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server. - GVRP: GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol or Generic VLAN Registration Protocol) is a protocol that facilitates control of virtual local area networks (VLANs) within a larger network. - Voice VLAN: Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones. - MVR: MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
• Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID. If a port is included in a VLAN, an image will be displayed. If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image will be displayed. If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port, then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port.
• VLAN Membership	The VLAN Membership Status page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box). When ALL VLAN Users are selected, it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users, and this is by default. VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports.

Buttons

: Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

J: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.3.5 VLAN Port Status

This page provides VLAN Port Status. The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4-3-3-5 appears.

VLAN Port Status for Combined users

Combined Auto-refresh Refresh
Port	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Frame Type	Port VLAN ID	Tx Tag	Untagged VLAN ID	Conflicts
1	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
2	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
3	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
4	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
5	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
6	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
7	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
8	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No

Figure 4-3-3-5: VLAN Port Status for Combined users Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Port Type	Show the VLAN Awareness for the port.If VLAN awareness is enabled, the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port. VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag.If VLAN awareness is disabled, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed.
• Ingress Filtering	Show the ingress filtering for a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is discarded.
Frame Type	Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received on that port are discarded.
Port VLAN ID	Shows the PVID setting for the port.
Tx Tag	Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.
Untagged VLAN ID	Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). Port's UVID determines the packet's behavior at the egress side.
Conflicts	Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not. When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration, the following conflicts can occur:■ Functional Conflicts between feature.■ Conflicts due to hardware limitation.■ Direct conflict between user modules.

Buttons

Static

: Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.3.6 SVL

This page allows for controlling SVL configuration on the switch. In SVL, one or more VLANs map to a Filter ID (FID). By default, there is a one-to-one mapping from VLAN to FID, in which case the switch acts as an IVL bridge, but with SVL multiple VLANs may share the same MAC address table entries..

Shared VLAN Learning Configuration

graph TD
    A["Delete"] --> B["FID"]
    B --> C["VLANs"]
    D["Add FID"] --> E["Apply"]
    D --> F["Reset"]

Figure 4-3-3-6: Shared VLAN Learning Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	A previously allocated FID can be deleted by the use of this button.
FID	The Filter ID (FID) is the ID that VLANs get learned on in the MAC table when SVL is in effect.No two rows in the table can have the same FID and the FID must be a number between 1 and 4095.
VLANs	List of VLANs mapped into FID.The syntax is as follows: Individual VLANs are separated by commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound.The following example will map VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300: 1,10-13,200,300. Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters. The range of valid VLANs is 1 to 4095.The same VLAN can only be a member of one FID. A message will be displayed if one VLAN is grouped into two or more FIDs.All VLANs must map to a particular FID, and by default VLAN x maps to FID x.This implies that if FID x is defined, then VLAN x is implicitly a member of FID x unless it is specified for another FID. If FID x doesn't exist, a confirmation message will be displayed, asking whether to continue adding VLAN x implicitly to FID x.

Buttons

Add a new row to the SVL table. The FID will be pre-filled with the first unused FID.

Click to apply changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.4 VLAN Translation

4.3.4.1 Port to Group Configuration

This page allows you to configure switch Ports to use a given VLAN Translation Mapping Group. This will enable all VLAN Translation mappings of that group (if any) on the selected switch port.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

VLAN Translation Port Configuration

Port	Group Configuration
	Default	Group ID
*	□	<> √
1	□	1 √
2	□	2 √
3	□	3 √
4	□	4 √
5	□	5 √
6	□	6 √
7	□	7 √
8	□	8 √
9	□	9 √
10	□	10 √

Apply Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure the VLAN Translation Mapping Group. SVL is in effect.No two rows in the table can have the same FID and the FID must be a number between 1 and 4095.
• Default	To set the switch port to use the default VLAN Translation Group click the checkbox and press Save.
• Group ID	The VLAN Translation mappings are organized into Groups, identified by the Group ID. This way a port is configured to use a number of VLAN Translation mappings easily by simply configuring it to use a given group. Then number of possible groups in a switch is equal to the number of ports present in this switch.A port can be configured to use any of the groups, but only one at any given time.Multiple ports can be configured to use the same group. A valid Group ID is an integer value from 1 to 10.Note: By default, each port is set to use the group with Group ID equal to the port number. For example, port #1 is by default set to use group with GID = 1.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.5 VLAN Translation Mappings

4.3.5.1 VLAN Translation Mappings

This page allows you to create mappings of VLANs -> Translated VLANs and organize these mappings into global Groups.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Remove All

VLAN Translation Mapping Table

Group ID	Direction	VID	TVID
				⊕

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Group ID	The VLAN Translation mappings are organized into Groups, identified by the Group ID. This way a port is configured to use a number of VLAN Translation mappings easily by simply configuring it to use a given group. Then number of possible groups in a switch is equal to the number of ports present in this switch. A port can be configured to use any of the groups, but only one at any given time. Multiple ports can be configured to use the same group. A valid Group ID is an integer value from 1 to 10.Note: By default, each port is set to use the group with Group ID equal to the port number. For example, port #1 is by default set to use group with GID = 1.
• Direction	Indicates the direction of the VLAN Translation and it refers to the switch. The direction can be 'Ingress', where the translation takes place on the VLAN ID of frames entering the switch port, 'Egress', where the translation takes place on the VLAN ID of frames exiting the switch port, or 'Both', where the translation takes place on both of the above directions.
• VID	Indicates the VLAN ID of the mapping (i.e. 'source' VLAN). A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095.
• TVID	Indicates the translated VLAN ID to which a VLAN ID of a frame will be translated to. A valid translated VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095.
• Modification Buttons	You can modify each VLAN Translation mapping in the table using the following buttons:e: Edits the mapping row.

: Deletes the mapping.

: Adds a new mapping.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page

Remove All

Click to remove all VLAN Translation mappings.

4.3.6 Private VLANs

4.3.6.1 Private VLAN Configuration

The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here. Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here.

Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.

A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By default, all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.

A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs. The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4-3-6-1 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Private VLAN Membership Configuration

Figure 4-3-6-1: Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next save.
Private VLAN ID	Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.
Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To include a port in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Private VLAN	Click to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the private VLAN can be configured as needed. The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range. Any values outside this range are not accepted, and a warning message appears. Click "OK" to discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to the editing and make a correction.

The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save".

The button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.6.2 Port Isolation

Overview

When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN, communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented. Two application examples are provided in this section:

• Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN, but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN.
• Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other

graph TD
    A["Internet"] -->|Permit| B["Router"]
    C["Public Servers"] -->|Permit| B
    B --> D["Isolate"]
    B --> E["Isolate"]
    B --> F["Isolate"]
    B --> G["Isolate"]
    D <--> H["Access Denied"]
    E <--> I["Access Denied"]
    F <--> J["Access Denied"]
    G <--> K["Access Denied"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

For private VLANs to be applied, the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place, one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs. Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups:

■ Promiscuous ports

— Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN

■ Isolated ports

— Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN

The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN.

This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN. A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN. The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4-3-6-2 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Port Isolation Configuration

Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-6-2: Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port Members	A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port isolation is enabled on that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port.By default, port isolation isdisabledon all ports.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.7 VCL

4.3.7.1 MAC-based VLAN

The MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding and deleting MAC-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static entries. The MAC-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-3-7-1 appears.

MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration

Figure 4-3-7-1: MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save.
MAC Address	Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry. To include a port in a MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the MAC-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New MAC-based VLAN	Click “Add New Entry” to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the table, and the MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save". A MAC-based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click "Save".The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC-based VLANs.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

<<

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC-based VLAN Table.

>>

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.7.2 IP Subnet-based VLAN

The IP subnet to VLAN ID mappings can be configured here. This page allows adding, updating and deleting IP subnet to VLAN ID mapping entries and assigning them to different ports.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Configuration

				Port Members
Delete	IP Address	Mask Length	VLAN ID	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10
Currently no entries present

Add New Entry

Apply Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a mapping, check this box and press save. The entry will be deleted in the stack.
IP Address	Indicates the subnet's IP address (Any of the subnet's host addresses can be also provided here, the application will convert it automatically).
Mask Length	Indicates the subnet's mask length.
VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID the subnet will be mapped to. IP Subnet to VLAN ID is a unique matching.
• Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet to VLAN ID mapping entry. To include a port in a mapping, simply check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked.
• Adding a New IP subnet-based VLAN	Click to add a new IP subnet to VLAN ID mapping entry. An empty row is added to the table, and the mapping can be configured as needed. Any IP address/mask can be configured for the mapping. Legal values for the VLAN ID are 1 to 4095.The IP subnet to VLAN ID mapping entry is enabled when you click on "Save". The button can be used to undo the addition of new mappings. The maximum possible IP subnet to VLAN ID mappings are limited to 128

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.7.3 Protocol-based VLAN

This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch. The Protocol-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-3-7-3 appears.

Figure 4-3-7-3: Protocol to Group Mapping Table Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Delete	To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save.
Frame Type	Frame Type can have one of the following values:1. Ethernet2. LLC3. SNAPNote: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected.
Value	Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu.Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:1. For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff2. For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)3. For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type (EtherType) field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP.In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be etype (0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.
Group Name	A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9).Note: special character and underscore(_) are not allowed.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry	Click “Add New Entry” to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table; Frame Type, Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed.The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new entry in mapping table.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.7.4 Protocol-based VLAN Membership

This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch. The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4-3-7-4 appears.

Protocol to Group Mapping Table

Figure 4-3-7-4: Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save
Group Name	A valid Group Name is a string of almost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9), no special character is allowed. Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page.
VLAN ID	Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1-4095.
Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping. To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry	Click “Add New Entry” to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table, the Group Name, VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095. The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.8 GVRP

GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol or Generic VLAN Registration Protocol) is a protocol that facilitates control of virtual local area networks (VLANs) within a larger network. It defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network.

GVRP - enabled Switches
VLAN Table
VLAN-1

Two blue rectangular blocks connected by a blue line, each with internal arrow symbols (no text or labels)

Switch-A GVRP Enable
Switch-B GVRP Enable
Switch-A – New VLAN ID Manually Added

VLAN Table
VLAN-1 VLAN-20

graph LR
    A["Device 1"] -->|GVRD Plane Pocket| B["Device 2"]
    B --> C["VLAN Table / VLAN-1"]

Switch-A GVRP Enable
GVRP Joins packet VID=20

Switch-B GVRP Enable
VLAN Table

Switch-B Learning Dynamic VLAN from Switch-A
VLAN Table
VLAN-1 VLAN-20

graph LR
    A["Switch-A\nGVRP Enable"] --> B["Switch-B\nGVRP Enable"]
    style A fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    note right of B: "VLAN Table\nVLAN-1\nVLAN-20 Dynamic"

VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.

4.3.8.1 GVRP Configuration

This page allows you to configure the global GVRP configuration settings that are commonly applied to all GVRP enabled ports. as well, as screen in Figure 4-3-8-1 appears.

Figure 4-3-8-1: GVRP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
Enable GVRP globally	The GVRP feature is globally enabled by setting the check mark in the checkbox named Enable GVRP and pressing the Save button.
GVRP protocol timers
Join-time	Join-time is a value in the range of 1-20cs, i.e. in units of one hundredth of a second.The default value is 20cs.
Leave-time	Leave-time is a value in the range of 60-300cs, i.e. in units of one hundredth of a second.The default is 60cs.
LeaveAll-time	LeaveAll-time is a value in the range of 1000-5000cs, i.e. in units of one hundredth of a second.The default is 1000cs
Max number of VLANs	When GVRP is enabled, a maximum number of VLANs supported by GVRP is specified. By default this number is 20. This number can only be changed when

GVRP is turned off.

Buttons

Refresh

: Click to refresh the page. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.8.2 GVRP Port Configuration

This configuration can be performed either before or after GVRP is configured globally - the protocol operation will be the same. as well. as screen in Figure 4-3-8-2 appears.

GVRP Port Configuration

Port	Mode
*		▼
1	Disabled	▼
2	Disabled	▼
3	Disabled	▼
4	Disabled	▼
5	Disabled	▼
6	Disabled	▼
7	Disabled	▼

Apply

Reset

Figure 4-3-8-2: GVRP Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Port	The logical port that is to be configured.
• Mode	Mode can be either 'Disabled' or 'GVRP enabled'. These values turn the GVRP feature off or on respectively for the port in question.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to refresh the page. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.9 MRP

4.3.9.1 Port Configuration

This page allows you to configure the MRP generic settings for all switch ports.

The displayed settings are:

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

MRP Overall Port Configuration

Port	Join Timeout	Leave Timeout	LeaveAll Timeout	Periodic Transmission
*	20	60	1000	□
1	20	60	1000	□
2	20	60	1000	□
3	20	60	1000	□
4	20	60	1000	□
5	20	60	1000	□
6	20	60	1000	□
7	20	60	1000	□
8	20	60	1000	□
9	20	60	1000	□
10	20	60	1000	□

Apply Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the following configuration applies.
• Join Timeout	Controls the timeout of the Join Timer for all MRP Applications on this switch port. This value is restricted to 1-20 centiseconds.
• Leave Timeout	Controls the timeout of the Leave Timer for all MRP Applications on this switch port. This value is restricted to 60-300 centiseconds.
• LeaveAll Timeout	Controls the timeout of the LeaveAll Timer for all MRP Applications on this switch port. This value is restricted to 1000-5000 centiseconds.
• Periodic Transmission	Enable or disable the PeriodicTransmission feature for all MRP Applications on this switch port.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.9.2 MVRP Global Configuration

This page allows you to configure the MVRP global and per port settings altogether. The page is divided into a global section and a per-port configuration section.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

MVRP Global Configuration

Global State	Disabled
Managed VLANs	1-4094

MVRP Port Configuration

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Global State	Enable or disable the MVRP protocol globally. This will enable or disable the protocol globally and at the same time on the switch ports that are MVRP enabled.
• Managed VLANs	This field shows the managed VLANs, i.e. the VLANs that MVRP will operate upon. By default, only VLANs 1-4094 are managed, i.e. the entire range as defined in IEEE802.1Q-2014 for MVRP. However this range can be limited by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound. The following example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300: 1,10-13,200,300. Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.

MVRP Port Configuration

• Port	The port number for which the following configuration applies.
• Enabled	Enable or disable the MVRP protocol on this switch port. This will enable or disable the protocol on the switch port given that MVRP is also globally enabled.
• Default	To set the switch port to use the default VL

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.9.3 MVRP Statistics

This page provides statistics for the MVRP protocol for all switch ports.

MVRP Statistics

Port	Failed Registrations	Last PDU Origin
1	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
2	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
3	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
4	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
5	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
6	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
7	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
8	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
9	0	00-00-00-00-00-00
10	0	00-00-00-00-00-00

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	The Port column shows the list of ports for which
• Default	To set the switch port to use the default VLAN Tran
• Group ID	The VLAN Translation mappings are organized int
• Default	To set the switch port to use the default VLAN Trans
• Default	To set the switch port to use the default VL

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears the counters for all ports.

4.3.10 Spanning Tree

4.3.10.1 Theory

The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:

■ STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
■ RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
■ MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)

The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.

This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the following before making any changes from the default values.

The Switch STP performs the following functions:

■ Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements.
- Creates multiple spanning trees – from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified groups.
■ Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in the tree.
■ Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.

Bridge Protocol Data Units

For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:

■ The unique switch identifier
■ The path cost to the root associated with each switch port
■ The port identifier

STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the following information:

■ The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch
■ The path cost to the root from the transmitting port

■ The port identifier of the transmitting port

The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission.

The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:

■ One switch is elected as the root switch
■ The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch
A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root.
A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.
■ Ports included in the STP are selected.

Creating a Stable STP Topology

It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch, STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.

When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root-port change.

STP Port States

The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.

Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:

■ Blocking – the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets
■ Listening – the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state
- □□Learning – the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets
■ Forwarding – the port is forwarding packets
■ Disabled – the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first

A port transitions from one state to another as follows:

■ From initialization (switch boot) to blocking
■ From blocking to listening or to disabled
■ From listening to learning or to disabled
■ From learning to forwarding or to disabled
■ From forwarding to disabled

■ From disabled to blocking

graph TD
    A["Switch"] --> B["Blocking"]
    B --> C["Listening"]
    C --> D["Learning"]
    D --> E["Forwarding"]
    E --> F["Disable"]
    F --> B
    C --> G["Disable"]
    G --> F

Figure 4-3-10-1-1: STP Port State Transitions

You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.

2. STP Parameters

STP Operation Levels

The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.

On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges.

On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports.

The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:

Parameter	Description	Default Value
Bridge Identifier(Not user configurable except by setting priority below)	A combination of the User-set priority and the switch's MAC address.The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts: a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 + MAC	32768 + MAC
Priority	A relative priority for each switch – lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge	32768
Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of the hello message by the switch		2 seconds
Maximum Age Timer	Measures the age of a received BPDU for a port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer.	20 seconds
Forward Delay Timer	The amount time spent by a port in the learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state.	15 seconds

The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:

Variable	Description	Default Value
Port Priority	A relative priority for each port –lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port	128
Port Cost	A value used by STP to evaluate paths – STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path	200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports0 - Auto

Default Spanning-Tree Configuration

Feature Default Value
Enable state STP disabled for all ports
Port priority 128
Port cost 0
Bridge Priority	32,768

User-Changeable STA Parameters

The Switch's factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows:

Priority – A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.

Hello Time – The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.

The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age; otherwise, a configuration error will occur.

Max. Age – The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.

Forward Delay Timer – The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the

Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.

Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters:

Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)

Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)

Port Priority – A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port.

Port Cost – A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.

3. Illustration of STP

A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram. In this example, you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied.

If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example, STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings.

Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there.

Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.

graph TD
    A["Bridge ID = 15"] -->|Port cost = 20,000| B["B"]
    A -->|Port cost = 20,000| C["C"]
    B -->|Port cost = 20,000| A
    B -->|Port cost = 20,000| C
    C -->|Port cost = 20,000| A
    C -->|Port cost = 20,000| B
    B -->|Port cost = 200,000| A
    B -->|Port cost = 200,000| C
    A -->|LAN1| A
    C -->|LAN3| C
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

Figure 4-3-10-1-2: Before Applying the STA Rules

In this example, only the default STP values are used.

```mermaid
graph TD
    A["Root Bridge"] -->|Designated Port| B["Node B"]
    A -->|Designated Port| C["Node C"]
    B -->|Root Port| A
    C -->|Root Port| A
    B -->|LAN2| A
    C -->|LAN3| A
    B -->|Blocked| C
    C -->|Blocked| B
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A

    %% Note: The diagram shows a hierarchical relationship between the Root Bridge and its three designated branches. Node 3 is labeled 'Port 3'. Node 2 and 3 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge respectively. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge respectively. Node 3 is also connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and's designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 2 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 2 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 1 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 2 is connected to the Root Bridge and its designated bridge. Node 3 is connected out of the Root Bridge, which connects to the other two terminal nodes. Node 1 and 2 are connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 1 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 2 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 1 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 2 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 3 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to the other terminal nodes. Node 1 is connected to the Root Bridge, which connects to another terminal node.
    Note: The diagram illustrates a hierarchical or hierarchical structure with multiple branching paths connecting each terminal node into their respective terminal nodes. Nodes are labeled with their respective port numbers in parentheses. The diagram includes arrows indicating direction of flow from left to right. Nodes are grouped by terminal node, but specific labels are not explicitly provided in the image. The diagram uses standard text with arrows pointing rightward from left to right. The diagram contains annotations such as 'LAN1', 'LAN2', 'LAN3' at top, 'LAN1', 'LAN2', 'LAN3' at bottom left, right, bottom right, bottom left, bottom right respectively. Note: The diagram contains only one of these labeled nodes without explicit numerical values. Note: The diagram does not contain any data series or units that can be extracted from it.

Figure 4-3-10-1-3: After Applying the STA Rules

The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost

between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 20,000) on switch A are connected to one (optional) Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link (default port cost = 200,000). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.

4.3.10.2 System Configuration

This page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch. The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols:

• Compatible -- Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.
• Normal -- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) : Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.
• Extension – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) : Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs (VLANs). This "Per-VLAN" Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree.

The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-10-2 appears.

STP Bridge Configuration
Basic Settings

Protocol Version	MSTP
Bridge Priority	32768
Hello Time	2
Forward Delay	15
Max Age	20
Maximum Hop Count	20
Transmit Hold Count	6

Advanced Settings

Figure 4-3-10-2: STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Basic Settings

Object Description
Protocol Version	The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are:STP (IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol)RSTP (IEEE 802.2w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)MSTP (IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)
Bridge Priority	Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the STP/RSTP bridge.
Hello Time	The interval between sending STP BPDU's. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 seconds, default is 2 seconds
Forward Delay	The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds-Default: 15-Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]-Maximum: 30
Max Age	The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds.-Default: 20-Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].-Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)]
Maximum Hop Count	This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
Transmit Hold Count	The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded, transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.

Advanced Settings

Object Description
• Edge Port BPDU Filtering	Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.
• Edge Port BPDU Guard	Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will beremoved from the active topology.
• Port Error Recovery	Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for normal STP operation. The condition is also cleared by a system reboot.
• Port Error Recovery Timeout	The time that has to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).

The Managed Switch implements the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol. When selecting “Compatibles” mode, the system uses the RSTP (802.1w) to be compatible and to co-work with another STP (802.1D)'s BPDU control packet.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.10.3 Bridge Status

This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances. The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, where the column displays the following information: The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4-3-10-3 appears.

MSTI	Bridge ID	Root			Topology Flag	Topology Change Last
		ID	Port	Cost
CIST	80:00-00:30:4F:11:22:55	80:00-00:30:4F:11:22:55	-	0	Steady	-
Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh

Figure 4-3-10-3: STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MSTI	The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status.
• Bridge ID	The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.
• Root ID	The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.
• Root Port	The switch port currently assigned the root port role.
• Root Cost	Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge this is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.
• Topology Flag	The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance.
• Topology Change Last	The time since last Topology Change occurred.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.3.10.4 CIST Port Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-10-4-1 appears.

STP CIST Port Configuration
CIST Aggregated Port Configuration

Port	STP Enabled	Path Cost			Priority	Admin Edge	Auto Edge	Restricted		BPDU Guard	Point-to- Point
								Role	TCN
-	□	Auto	√		128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Forced True

CIST Normal Port Configuration

Port	STP Enabled	Path Cost			Priority	Admin Edge	Auto Edge	Restricted		BPDU Guard	Point-to- Point
								Role	TCN
*	□						□	□	□	□
1	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
2	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
3	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
4	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
5	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
6	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
7	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto
8	□	Auto			128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Auto

Figure 4-3-10-4-1: STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical STP port.
• STP Enabled	Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port.
• Path Cost	Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports.Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
• Priority	Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. (See above).Default: 128Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
• AdminEdge	Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as being set or cleared. (The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized).
• AutoEdge	Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port. This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are received on the port or not.
• Restricted Role	If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known as Root Guard.
• Restricted TCN	If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information. It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that region, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently.
• BPDU Guard	If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary to the similar bridge setting, the port Edge status does not effect this setting.A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well.
• Point-to-point	Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than a shared medium. This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false.Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path cost "0" is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.

Port Type	IEEE 802.1D-1998	IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet	50-600	200,000-20,000,000
Fast Ethernet	10-60	20,000-2,000,000
Gigabit Ethernet	3-10	2,000-200,000

Table 4-3-10-4-2: Recommended STP Path Cost Range

Port Type	Link Type	IEEE 802.1D-1998	IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet	Half Duplex	100	2,000,000
	Full Duplex	95	1,999,999
	Trunk	90	1,000,000
Fast Ethernet	Half Duplex	19	200,000
	Full Duplex	18	100,000
	Trunk	15	50,000
Gigabit Ethernet	Full Duplex	4	10,000
	Trunk	3	5,000

Table 4-3-10-4-3: Recommended STP Path Costs

Port Type	Link Type	IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet	Half Duplex	2,000,000
	Full Duplex	1,000,000
	Trunk	500,000
Fast Ethernet	Half Duplex	200,000
	Full Duplex	100,000
	Trunk	50,000
Gigabit Ethernet	Full Duplex	10,000
	Trunk	5,000

Table 4-3-10-4-4: Default STP Path Costs

4.3.10.5 MSTI Priorities

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly change them as well. The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4-3-10-5 appears.

Figure 4-3-10-5: MSTI Priority Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MSTI	The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active.
• Priority	Controls the bridge priority. Lower numerical values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.10.6 MSTI Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly change them as well. The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-10-6 appears.

MSTI Configuration

Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma.

Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST. (The default bridge instance).

Configuration Identification

Configuration Name	00-30-4f-11-22-33
Configuration Revision	0

MSTI Mapping

MSTI	VLANs Mapped
MSTI1
MSTI2
MSTI3
MSTI4
MSTI5
MSTI6
MSTI7

Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-10-6: MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Configuration Identification

Object Description
Configuration Name	The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and revision (see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI's. (Intra-region). The name is at most 32 characters.
Configuration Revision	The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer between 0 and 65535.

MSTI Mapping

Object Description
• MSTI	The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped.
• VLANs Mapped	The list of VLAN's mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be separated with comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. A unused MSTI should just be left empty. (i.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.)

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.10.7 MSTI Ports Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly change them as well. A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options.

This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports. The aggregation settings are global. The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-10-7-1 & Figure 4-3-10-7-2 appears.

Figure 4-3-10-7-1: MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

MSTI Port Configuration

Object Description
• Select MSTI	Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration.

MST1 MSTI Port Configuration

MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration

Port	Path Cost			Priority
-	Auto			128

MSTI Normal Ports Configuration

Port	Path Cost		Priority
*
1	Auto		128
2	Auto		128
3	Auto		128
4	Auto		128
5	Auto		128
6	Auto		128
7	Auto		128

Figure 4-3-10-7-2: MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

MSTx MSTI Port Configuration

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.
• Path Cost	Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
• Priority	Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost.

Buttons

Click to set MSTx configuration

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.

The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4-3-10-8 appears.

Figure 4-3-10-8: STP Port Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical STP port.
• CIST Role	The current STP port role of the ICST port. The port role can be one of the following values:■ AlternatePort■ BackupPort■ RootPort■ DesignatedPort■ Disable
• CIST State	The current STP port state of the CIST port . The port state can be one of the following values:■ Disabled■ Learning■ Forwarding
• Uptime	The time since the bridge port was last initialized.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds

4.3.10.9 Port Statistics

This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.

The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-3-10-9 appears.

STP Statistics

Figure 4-3-10-9: STP Statistics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.
• MSTP	The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• RSTP	The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• STP	The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• TCN	The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• Discarded Unknown	The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
• Discarded Illegal	The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears the counters for all ports.

4.3.11 IGMP Snooping

The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing. The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group.

About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping

Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the 'queried'. This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets will not be forwarded to that sub network.

graph TD
    A["IPTV Server"] -->|A| Switch1["Switch"]
    A -->|A| Switch2["Switch"]
    B["Multicast Transmitter"] -->|B| Switch3["Switch"]
    C["Multicast Receiver"] -->|B| Switch4["Switch"]
    D["Multicast Receiver"] -->|D| Switch5["Switch"]
    E["Multicast Receiver"] -->|E| Switch6["Switch"]
    F["Multicast Receiver"] -->|F| Switch7["Switch"]
    G["Multicast Receiver"] -->|G| Switch8["Switch"]
    H["Multicast Receiver"] -->|H| Switch9["Switch"]
    I["Multicast Receiver"] -->|I| Switch10["Switch"]
    J["Multicast Receiver"] -->|J| Switch11["Switch"]
    K["Multicast Receiver"] -->|K| Switch12["Switch"]
    L["Multicast Receiver"] -->|L| Switch13["Switch"]
    M["Multicast Receiver"] -->|M| Switch14["Switch"]
    N["Multicast Receiver"] -->|N| Switch15["Switch"]
    O["Multicast Receiver"] -->|O| Switch16["Switch"]
    P["Multicast Receiver"] -->|P| Switch17["Switch"]
    Q["Multicast Receiver"] -->|Q| Switch18["Switch"]
    R["Multicast Receiver"] -->|R| Switch19["Switch"]
    S["Multicast Receiver"] -->|S| Switch20["Switch"]
    T["Multicast Receiver"] -->|T| Switch21["Switch"]
    U["Multicast Receiver"] -->|U| Switch22["Switch"]
    V["Multicast Receiver"] -->|V| Switch23["Switch"]
    W["Multicast Receiver"] -->|W| Switch24["Switch"]
    X["Multicast Receiver"] -->|X| Switch25["Switch"]
    Y["Multicast Receiver"] -->|Y| Switch26["Switch"]
    Z["Multicast Receiver"] -->|Z| Switch27["Switch"]
    AA["Multicast Receiver"] -->|A| Switch3
    AB["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch3
    AC["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch4
    AD["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch5
    AE["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch6
    AF["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch7
    AG["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch8
    AH["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch9
    AI["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch10
    AJ["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch11
    AK["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch12
    AL["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch13
    AM["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch14
    AN["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch15
    AO["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch16
    AP["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch17
    AQ["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch18
    AR["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch19
    AS["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch20
    AT["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch21
    AU["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch22
    AV["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch23
    AW["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch24
    AX["Multicast Transmitter"] --> Switch25
    AY["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch3
    AZ["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch4
    BA["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch5
    BB["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch6
    BC["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch7
    BD["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch8
    BE["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch9
    BF["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch10
    BG["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch11
    BH["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch12
    BI["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch13
    BJ["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch14
    BK["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch15
    BL["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch16
    BM["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch17
    BN["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch18
    BO["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch19
    BP["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch20
    BQ["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch21
    BR["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch22
    BS["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch23
    BT["Multicast Receiver"] --> Switch24

Multicast Service

graph TD
    A["IPTV Server"] -->|I don't want the stream| B["Switch"]
    A -->|I don't want the stream| C["Router"]
    D["Multicast Transmitter"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    D -->|I don't want the stream| C
    E["Multicast Receiver"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    F["Multicast Receiver"] -->|I don't want the stream| C
    G["IP"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    G -->|I don't want the stream| C
    H["Switch"] --> B
    H --> C
    I["Switch"] --> B
    I --> C
    J["Switch"] --> B
    J --> C
    K["Switch"] --> B
    K --> C

Multicast Flooding

graph TD
    A["IPTV Server"] -->|Multicast Transmitter| B["IGMP Snooping Switch"]
    A -->|Multicast Transmitter| C["Router"]
    A -->|Multicast Transmitter| D["IGMP Snooping Switch"]
    B -->|IGMP Snooping Switch| E["Router"]
    C -->|IGMP Snooping Switch| F["Router"]
    D -->|IGMP Snooping Switch| G["Router"]
    E --> H["Multicast Receiver"]
    F --> I["Multicast Receiver"]
    G --> J["Multicast Receiver"]
    B --> K["Multicast Receiver"]
    C --> L["Multicast Receiver"]
    D --> M["Multicast Receiver"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cff,stroke:#333

IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control

IGMP Versions 1 and 2

Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group. IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data. The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:

IGMP Message Format

Octets

Type Response Time	Checksum
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)

The IGMP Type codes are shown below:

Type Meaning
0x11	Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)
0x11	Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is Present)
0x16	Membership Report (version 2)
0x17	Leave a Group (version 2)
0x12	Membership Report (version 1)

IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks.

The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.

A host sends an IGMP "report" to join a group

A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).

A host will send a "leave" report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).

Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members on the network.

The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.

IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.

The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:

graph TD
    A["Non-Member"] -->|Leave Group (Stop Timer)| B["Delaying Member"]
    A -->|Leave Group| C["Idle Member"]
    B -->|Query Received (Start Timer) Report Received (Stop Timer) Timer Expried (Send report)| C
    C -->|Join Group (Send Report Start Timer)| A

IGMP State Transitions

■ IGMP Querier

A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected "querier" and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Multicast routers use this information, abng with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.

4.3.11.1 Profile Table

This page provides IPMC Profile related configurations. The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams. It is allowed to create at maximum 64 Profiles with at maximum 128 corresponding rules for each. The Profile Table screen in Figure 4-3-11-1 appears.

IPMC Profile Configurations

IPMC Profile Table Setting

Delete	Profile Name	Profile Description	Rule
Delete

Add New IPMC Profile

Apply

Reset

Figure 4-3-11-1: IPMC Profile Configuration Page

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Global Profile Mode	Enable/Disable the Global IPMC Profile. System starts to do filtering based on profile settings only when the global profile mode is enabled.
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
• Profile Name	The name used for indexing the profile table. Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.
• Profile Description	Additional description, which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numeric characters, about the profile. No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description. Use "_" or "-" to separate the description sentence.
• Rule	When the profile is created, click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of the designated profile. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button. You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following buttons: ☐: List the rules associated with the designated profile. ☑: Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile.

Buttons

Add New IPMC Profile : Click to add new IPMC profile. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Save".

Apply : Click to apply changes

Reset : Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.11.2 Address Entry

This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile. The address entry is used to specify the address range that will be associated with IPMC Profile. It is allowed to create at maximum 128 address entries in the system. The Profile Table screen in Figure 4-3-11-2 appears.

IPMC Profile Address Configuration

Navigate Address Entry Setting in IPMC Profile by 20 entries per page.

Delete	Entry Name	Start Address	End Address
Delete

Figure 4-3-11-2: IPMC Profile Address Configuration Page

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry.The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
Entry Name	The name used for indexing the address entry table.Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.
Start Address	The starting IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.
End Address	The ending IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.

Buttons

Add New Address (Range) Entry : Click to add new address range. Specify the name and configure the addresses. Click "Save".

Apply : Click to apply changes

Reset : Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.11.3 IGMP Snooping Configuration

This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration. The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-11-3 appears.

Figure 4-3-11-3: IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Snooping Enabled	Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.
• Unregistered IPMCv4Flooding Enabled	Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding.The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled.When IGMP Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting.
• IGMP SSM Range	SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enable	Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwardingunnecessary leave messages to the router side.
Proxy Enable	Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessaryjoin and leave messages to the router side.
Router Port	Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports. A router port is a port on theEthernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port.■ Auto:Select “Auto” to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the portas IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets.■ Fix:The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMPRouter port. Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicastserver or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port.■ None:The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMPRouter port. The Managed Switch will not keep any record of anIGMP router being connected to this port. Use this mode when youconnect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non-querierManaged Switch and don’t want the multicast stream to be flooded byuplinking switch through the port that is connected to the IGMPquerier.
Fast Leave	Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throtting	Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.11.4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-11-4 appears.

Figure 4-3-11-4: IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping Enable	Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected.
Querier Election	Enable the IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP Non-Querier.
Querier Address	Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election.When the Querier address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN.When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4 management address. Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value.By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1
Compatibility	Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network.The allowed selection is IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3.Default compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.
PRI	(PRI) Priority of Interface. It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level generated by the system. These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic.The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0
• RV	Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network.The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
• QI	Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is 125 seconds.
• QRI	Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries.The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
• LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)	Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count.The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
• URI	Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group.The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

k<

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

Add New IGMP VLAN

: Click to add new IGMP VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry.

Click "Save". The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.11.5 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.

IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report is dropped.

IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either "deny" or "replace". If the action is set to deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group. The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-11-5 appears.

Figure 4-3-11-5: IGMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Filtering Profile	Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.11.6 IGMP Snooping Status

This page provides IGMP Snooping status. The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4-3-11-6 appears.

Auto-refresh

Refresh

Clear

IGMP Snooping Status

Statistics

VLAN ID

Querier Version

Host Version

Querier Status

Queries Transmitted

Queries Received

V1 Reports Received

V2 Reports Received

V3 Reports Received

V2 Leaves Received

Router Port

Port	Status
1	-
2	-
3	-
4	-
5	-
6	-
7	-
8	-
9	-

Figure 4-3-11-6: IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• Querier Version	Working Querier Version currently.
• Host Version	Working Host Version currently.
• Querier Status	Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
• Querier Transmitted	The number of Transmitted Querier.
• Querier Received	The number of Received Querier.
• V1 Reports Received	The number of Received V1 Reports.
• V2 Reports Received	The number of Received V2 Reports.
• V3 Reports Received	The number of Received V3 Reports.
• V2 Leave Received	The number of Received V2 Leave.
• Router Port	Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Status	Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.11.7 IGMP Group Information

Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this Page. The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table. The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table. The IGMP Groups Information screen in Figure 4-3-11-7 appears.

IGMP Snooping Group Information

Auto-refresh

Refresh

Start from VLAN 1 and group Address 224.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page.

		Port Members
VLAN ID	Groups	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10
1	239.255.255.250	✓

Figure 4-3-11-7: IGMP Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Groups	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port Members	Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.11.8 IGMPv3 SFM Information

Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this page. The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port No. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM (Source Specific Multicast) Information table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SSM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "Group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table. The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4-3-11-8appears.

IGMP SFM Information

Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page

VLAN ID	Group	Port	Mode	Source Address	Type	Hardware Filter/Switch
1	239.255.102.18	1	Exclude	None	Deny	Yes
1	239.255.255.250	1	Exclude	None	Deny	Yes

Figure 4-3-11-8: IGMP SSM Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Group	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Mode	Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
• Source Address	IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128.
• Type	Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
• Hardware Filter/Switch	Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.12 MLD Snooping

4.3.12.1 MLD Snooping Configuration

This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration. The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-12-1 appears.

MLD Snooping Configuration

Port Related Configuration

Port	Router Port		Fast Leave	Throttling
*		✓
1	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓
2	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓
3	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓
4	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓
5	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓
6	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓
7	Auto	✓		Unlimited ✓

Figure 4-3-12-1: MLD Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Snooping Enabled	Enable the Global MLD Snooping.
• Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled	Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding.The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled.When MLD Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting.
• MLD SSM Range	SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
• Leave Proxy Enable	Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side.
• Proxy Enable	Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessaryjoin and leave messages to the router side.
• Router Port	Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as a router port. The allowed selection isAuto, Fix, Fone, default compatibility value is Auto.
• Fast Leave	Enable the fast leave on the port.
• Throtting	Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.12.2 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-12-2 appears.

MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration

Figure 4-3-12-2: IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
MLD Snooping Enable	Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for MLD Snooping.
Querier Election	Enable to join MLD Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as a MLD Non-Querier.
Compatibility	Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed selection is MLD-Auto, Forced MLDv1, Forced MLDv2, default compatibility value is MLD-Auto.
PRI	(PRI) Priority of Interface. It indicates the MLD control frame priority level generated by the system. These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic. The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0
RV	Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
QI	Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is125 seconds.
• QRI	Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
• LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)	Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
• URI	Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

k<

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

Add New MLD VLAN

:Click to add new MLD VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Save". The

specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.12.3 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan. The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.

MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. A MLD filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the MLD join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the MLD join report is dropped.

MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either "deny" or "replace". If the action is set to deny, any new MLD join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group. The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-12-3 appears.

MLD Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration

Figure 4-3-12-3: MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Filtering Group	Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.12.4 MLD Snooping Status

This page provides MLD Snooping status. The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4-3-12-4 appears.

Auto-refresh

Refresh

Clear

MLD Snooping Status

Statistics

VLAN ID

Querier Version

Host Version

Querier Status

Queries Transmitted

Queries Received

¥1 Reports Received

¥2 Reports Received

¥1 Leaves Received

Router Port

Port	Status
1	-
2	-
3	-
4	-
5	-
6	-
7	-
8	-
9	-

Figure 4-3-12-4: MLD Snooping Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• Querier Version	Working Querier Version currently.
• Host Version	Working Host Version currently.
• Querier Status	Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE"."DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
• Querier Transmitted	The number of Transmitted Querier.
• Querier Received	The number of Received Querier.
• V1 Reports Received	The number of Received V1 Reports.
• V2 Reports Received	The number of Received V2 Reports.
• V1 Leave Received	The number of Received V1 Leaves.
• Router Port	Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Status	Indicates whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.12.5 MLD Group Information

Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page. The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table. The MLD Groups Information screen in Figure 4-3-12-5 appears.

Figure 4-3-12-5: MLD Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Groups	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port Members	Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

k: Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.12.6 MLDv2 Information

Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MLD SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry. Each page shows up to 99 entries from

the MLD SFM Information table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table. The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4-3-12-6 appears.

Figure 4-3-12-6: MLD SSM Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Group	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Mode	Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
• Source Address	IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128.
• Type	Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
• Hardware Filter/Switch	Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.13 MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)

The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs.

In a multicast television application, a PC or a network television or a set-top box can receive the multicast stream.
■ Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box or PC sends an IGMP/MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address.
■ Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.

It is allowed to create at maximum 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN. There will be totally at maximum 256 group addresses for channel settings.

graph TD
    A["Service Provider"] --> B["Multicast Server"]
    B --> C["Service Network"]
    C --> D["MVR Layer 2 Switch"]
    D --> E["Receiver Port"]
    D --> F["Receiver Port"]
    D --> G["Receiver Port"]
    E --> H["Set-top Box"]
    F --> I["Set-top Box"]
    G --> J["Set-top Box"]
    C --> K["Source Port"]
    K --> D
    style A fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333

This page provides MVR related configuration.

4.3.13.1 MVR Configuratio

MVR Configurations

VLAN Interface Setting (Role [I:Inactive / S:Source / R:Receiver])

Delete

MVR VID

MVR Name

IGMP Address

Mode

Tagging

Priority

LLQI

Interface Channel Profile

Add New MVR VLAN

Immediate Leave Setting

Port	Immediate Leave
*
1	Disabled
2	Disabled
3	Disabled
4	Disabled
5	Disabled
6	Disabled
7	Disabled
8	Disabled

Figure 4-3-13-1: MVR Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MVR Mode	Enable/Disable the Global MVR.The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP/MLD Snooping.It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group table is full.
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
• MVR VID	Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports.
• MVR Name	MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVRVLAN. Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 16. MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers. When the optional MVR VLAN name is given, it should contain at least one alphabet. MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries.
• IGMP Address	Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames. The default IGMP address is not set (0.0.0.0).When the IGMP address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN.When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4 management address. Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1.
• Mode	Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode, MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports. In Compatible mode, MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports. The default is Dynamic mode.
• Tagging	Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID. The default is Tagged.
• Priority	Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner. The default Priority is 0.
• LLQI	Define the maximum time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership. The value is in units of tenths of a seconds. The range is from 0 to 31744. The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one-half second.
• Interface Channel Setting	When the MVR VLAN is created, select the IPMC Profile as the channel filtering condition for the specific MVR VLAN. Summary about the Interface Channel Profiling (of the MVR VLAN) will be shown by clicking the view button. Profile selected for designated interface channel is not allowed to have overlapped permit group address.
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Port Role	Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles.Inactive: The designated port does not participate MVR operations.Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports. Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data. It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports.Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting.I indicates Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates ReceiverThe default Role is Inactive.
• Immediate Leave	Enable the fast leave on the port.

Buttons

Add New MVR VLAN

Click to add new MVR VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Save"

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.13.2 MVR Status

This page provides MVR status. The MVR Status screen in Figure 4-3-13-2 appears.

VLAN ID	IGMP/MLD Queries Received	IGMP/MLD Queries Transmitted	IGMPv1 Joins Received	IGMPv2/MLDv1 Reports Received	IGMPv3/MLDv2 Reports Received	IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leaves Received
No more entries
Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh Clear

Figure 4-3-13-2: MVR Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	The Multicast VLAN ID.
• IGMP/MLD Queries Received	The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
• IGMP/MLD Queries Transmitted	The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
• IGMPv1 Joins Received	The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins.
• IGMPv2/MLDv1 Reports Received	The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports, respectively.
• IGMPv3/MLDv2 Reports Received	The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports, respectively.
• IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leaves Received	The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones, respectively.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.13.3 MVR Groups Information

Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page. The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table. The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4-3-13-3 appears.

Figure 4-3-13-3: MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN	VLAN ID of the group.
• Groups	Group ID of the group displayed.
• Port Members	Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.13.4 MVR SFM Information

Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MVR SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information Table. The MVR SFM Information screen in Figure 4-3-13-4 appears.

Figure 4-3-13-4: MVR SFM Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Group	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Mode	Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
• Source Address	IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128. When there is no any source filtering address, the text "None" is shown in the Source Address field.
• Type	Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
• Hardware Filter / Switch	Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4/IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table.

4.3.14 LLDP

4.3.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.

4.3.14.2 LLDP Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings. The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-14-2 appears.

LLDP Configuration
LLDP Parameters

Tx Interval	30	seconds
Tx Hold	4	times
Tx Delay	2	seconds
Tx Reinit	2	seconds

LLDP Port Configuration

			Optional TLVs
Port	Mode	CDP Aware	Port Description	System Name	System Description	System Capabilities	Management Address
*
1	Disabled
2	Disabled
3	Disabled
4	Disabled
5	Disabled
6	Disabled
7	Disabled

Figure 4-3-14-2: LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

LLDP Parameters

Object Description
• Tx Interval	The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by theTx Intervalvalue. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds. Default:30 secondsThis attribute must comply with the following rule:(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) ≤65536, and Transmission Interval >= (4 * Delay Interval)
• Tx Hold	Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set toTx Holdmultiplied byTx Intervalseconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) ≤ 65536.Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.
• Tx Delay	If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value ofTx Delayseconds. Tx Delaycannot be larger than 1/4 of theTx Intervalvalue. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.This attribute must comply with the rule:(4 * Delay Interval) ≤Transmission Interval
• Tx Reinit	When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinitcontrols the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.

LLDP Port Configuration

The LLDP port settings relate to the switch, as reflected by the page header.

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.
• Mode	Select LLDP mode.■ Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed.■ Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will send out LLDP information.■ Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDPinformation received from neighbors.■ Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors.
CDP Aware	Select CDP awareness.The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames (The switch doesn't transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled.Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours' table are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours' table as shown below.CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table.CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field. Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the LLDP neighbours' table.If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch.Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn't removed immediately, but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.
Port Description	Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Name	Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Description	Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Capabilities	Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Management Address	Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP information transmitted.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.14.3 LLDP Neighbor

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4-3-14-3 appears.

Figure 4-3-14-3: LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Local Port	The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
• Chassis ID	The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.
• Remote Port ID	The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port.
• Port Description	Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit.
• System Name	System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.
• System Capabilities	System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible capabilities are:1. Other2. Repeater3. Bridge4. WLAN Access Point5. Router6. Telephone7. DOCSIS cable device8. Station only9. ReservedWhen a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is disabled, the capability is followed by (-).
• Management Address	Management Address is the neighbor unit's address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management. This could for instance hold the neighbor's IP address.

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.14.4 LLDP MED Configuration

This page allows you to configure the LLDP-MED. The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-14-4 appears.

LLDP-MED Configuration

Fast Start Repeat Count

Fast start repeat count

4

LLDP-MED Interface Configuration

	Transmit TLVs
Port	Capabilities	Policies	Location	Device Type
*	□	□	□
1	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼
2	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼
3	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼
4	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼
5	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼
6	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼
7	☑	☑	☑	Connectivity ▼

Figure 4-3-14-4: LLDPMED Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Fast start repeat count

Object Description

• Fast start repeat count

Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types (for example only advertise the voicenetwork policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy.With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to achieve these related properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is detected, will an LLDP-MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port. The LLDP-MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new LLDP-MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours.Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours, it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame. WithFast start repeat countit is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The recommended value is 4 times, given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP frame with new information is received.It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices, and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including Network Connectivity Devices, or other types of links.

LLDP-MED Interface Configuration

Object Description
• Interface	The interface name to which the configuration applies.
• Transmit TLVs - Capabilities	When checked the switch's capabilities is included inLLDP-MEDinformation transmitted
• Transmit TLVs - Policies	When checked the configured policies for the interface is included inLLDP-MEDinformation transmitted.
• Transmit TLVs - Location	When checked the configured location information for the switch is included inLLDP-MEDinformation transmitted.
• Transmit TLVs - PoE	When checked the configured PoE (Power Over Ethernet) information for the interface is included inLLDP-MEDinformation transmitted
• Device Type	Any LLDP-MED Device is operating as a specific type of LLDP-MED Device, which may be either a Network Connectivity Device or a specific Class of Endpoint Device, as defined below.A Network Connectivity Device is a LLDP-MED Device that provides access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint DevicesAn LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies :1. LAN Switch/Router2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions that can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.An Endpoint Device a LLDP-MED Device that sits at the network edge and provides some aspect of IP communications service, based on IEEE 802 LAN technology.The main difference between a Network Connectivity Device and an Endpoint Device is that only an Endpoint Device can start the LLDP-MED information exchange.Even though a switch always should be a Network Connectivity Device, it is possible to configure it to act as an Endpoint Device, and thereby start the LLDP-MED information exchange (In the case where two Network Connectivity Devices are connected together)

Coordinates Location

Object Description
• Latitude	Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator.
• Longitude	Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian.
• Altitude	Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits.It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside abuilding, 0.0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance.
• Map Datum	TheMap Datumused for the coordinates given in this Option■WGS84:(Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich.■NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near tidal water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).■NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.

Civic Address Location

IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).

Object Description
Country code	The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE or US.
State	National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
County	County, parish, gun (Japan), district.
City	City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen
City district	City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan)
Block (Neighborhood)	Neighborhood, block
Street	Street - Example: Poppelvej
Leading street direction	Leading street direction - Example: N
Trailing street suffix	Trailing street suffix - Example: SW
Street suffix	Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz
House no.	House number - Example: 21
House no. suffix	House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2
Landmark	Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University
Additional location info	Additional location info - Example: South Wing
Name	Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn
Zip code	Postal/zip code - Example: 2791
Building	Building (structure) - Example: Low Library
Apartment	Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42
• Floor	Floor - Example: 4
• Room no.	Room number - Example: 450F
• Place type	Place type - Example: Office
• Postal community name	Postal community name - Example: Leonia
• P.O. Box	Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345
• Additional code	Additional code - Example: 1320300003

Emergency Call Service

Emergency Call Service (e.g. E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.

Object Description
• Emergency Call Service	Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.

Policies

Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.

Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time' network policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.

The network policy attributes advertised are:

1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)

This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port.

The application types specifically addressed are:

1. Voice
2. Guest Voice
3. Softphone Voice
4. Video Conferencing
5. Streaming Video
6. Control / Signaling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above)

A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.

It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN.

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.
Policy ID	ID for the policy. This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the policies that shall be mapped to the specific ports.
Application Type	Intended use of the application types:■ Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.■ Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy.■ Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.■ Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.■ Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single 'tagged' data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged' VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.■ Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.■ Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.■ Video Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy.
• Tag	Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an 'untagged' VLAN.■ Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.■ Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
• VLAN ID	VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003
• L2 Priority	L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE 802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.
• DSCP	DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
• Adding a new policy	Click Add New Policy to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy. Click "Save". The number of policies supported is 32

Port Policies Configuration

Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration applies.
• Policy ID	The set of policies that shall apply for a given port. The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.14.5 LLDP-MED Neighbor

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP-MED neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP-MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4-3-14-5 appears. The columns hold the following information:

LLDP-MED Neighbour Information

Port 1
Device Type	Capabilities
Endpoint Class III	LLDP-MED Capabilities, Network Policy, Extended Power via MDI - PD, Inventory
Application Type	Policy	Tag	VLAN ID	Priority	DSCP
Voice	Defined	Untagged	-	-	46
Voice Signaling	Defined	Untagged	-	-	32
Auto-negotiation	Auto-negotiation status	Auto-negotiation Capabilities	MAU Type
Supported	Enabled	1000BASE-T half duplex mode, 1000BASE-X, -LX, -SX, -CX full duplex mode , Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex inks, Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links	100BaseTXFD - 2 pair category 5 UTP, full duplex mode

Figure 4-3-14-5: LLDP-MED Neighbor Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Fast start repeat count

Object Description
• Port	The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
• Device Type	LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device DefinitionLLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies:1. LAN Switch/Router2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA-1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.LLDP-MED Endpoint Device DefinitionWithin the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class. Fore-example will anyLLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I),and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and Generic Endpoints (Class I).LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057, however do not support IP media or act as an end-user communication appliance. Such devices may include (but are not limited to) IP Communication Controllers, other communication related servers, or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA-1057.Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location, network policy, power management, and inventory management.LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class (Class I), and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming. Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) Voice / Media Gateways, Conference Bridges, Media Servers, and similar.Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network layer policy discovery.LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint (Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices. Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) end user communication appliances, such as IP Phones, PC-based softphones, or other communication appliances that directly support the end user.Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier (including ECS / E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory management
• LLDP-MED Capabilities	LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's LLDP-MED capabilities.The possible capabilities are:1. LLDP-MED capabilities2. Network Policy3. Location Identification4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE5. Extended Power via MDI - PD6. Inventory7. Reserved
Application Type	Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device.The possible application types are shown below.Voice- for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.Voice Signaling- for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media.Guest Voice- to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.Guest Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.Softphone Voice- for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or laptops.Video Conferencing- for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.Streaming Video- for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.Video Signaling- for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media.
Policy	Policyindicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device. Can be either Defined or UnknownUnknown:The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.Defined:The network policy is defined.
TAG	TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN. Can be Tagged or UntaggedUntagged:The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.Tagged:The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format
VLAN ID	VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE802.1Q-2003. A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.
• Priority	Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. One of eight priority levels (0 through 7)
• DSCP	DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63).
• Auto-negotiation	Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the link partner.
• Auto-negotiation status	Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at the link partner. If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation status is disabled, the 802.3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto-negotiation.
• Auto-negotiation Capabilities	Auto-negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC/PHY capabilities.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.14.6 Port Statistics

This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic. Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch, while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch. The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4-3-14-6 appears.

LLDP Global Counters

Global Counters
Clear global counters	√
Neighbor entries were last changed 1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:00+00:00 (75569 secs. ago)
Total Neighbors Entries Added	0
Total Neighbors Entries Deleted	0
Total Neighbors Entries Dropped	0
Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out	0

LLDP Statistics Local Counters

Local Interface	Tx Frames	Rx Frames	Rx Errors	Frames Discarded	TLVs Discarded	TLVs Unrecognized	Org. Discarded	Age-Outs	Clear
*	*	*	*	*	*	*	*	*	□
1	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
2	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
3	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
4	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
5	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
6	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
7	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√
8	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	√

Figure 4-3-14-6: LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Global Counters

Object Description
Clear global counters	If checked the global counters are cleared when Clear is pressed.
Neighbor entries were last changed	It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected.
Total Neighbors Entries Added	Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors Entries Deleted	Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors Entries Dropped	Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full.
Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out	Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.

LLDP Statistics Local Counters

The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:

Object Description
• Local Port	The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
• Tx Frames	The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
• Rx Frames	The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
• Rx Errors	The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
• Frames Discarded	If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.
• TLVs Discarded	Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.
• TLVs Unrecognized	The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.
• Org. Discarded	The number of organizationally TLVs received.
• Age-Outs	Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid (age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time, the LLDP information is removed, and theAge-Outcounter is incremented.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears the local counters. All counters (including global counters) are cleared upon reboot.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.15 MAC Address Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time.

4.3.15.1 MAC Table Configuration

The MAC Address Table is configured on this page. Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here. The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-15-1 appears.

graph TD
    A["Disable Automatic Aging"] --> B["300 seconds"]
    C["Aging Time"] --> B
    D["1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8"] --> E["Port Members"]
    F["Auto"] --> G["Disable"]
    F --> H["Secure"]
    I["Learning-disabled VLANs"] --> J["Port Members"]
    K["Delete"] --> L["VLAN ID"]
    M["Mac Address"] --> N["1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1'"]
    O["Add New Static Entry"] --> P["Apply Reset"]

Figure 4-3-15-1: MAC Address Table Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Aging Configuration

By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.

Object Description
Disable Automatic Aging	Enables/disables the automatic aging of dynamic entries
Aging Time	The time after which a learned entry is discarded. By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.(Range: 10-10000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

MAC Table Learning

If the learning mode for a given port is grayed out, another module is in control of the mode, so that it cannot be changed by the user. An example of such a module is the MAC-Based Authentication under 802.1X.

Object Description
• Auto	Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received.
• Disable	No learning is done.
• Secure	Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.Note: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non-secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface.

Static MAC Table Configuration

The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain 64 entries. The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members	Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry.
Adding a New Static Entry	Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table.Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address, and port members for the new entry. Click "Save".

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.15.2 MAC Address Table Status

Dynamic MAC Table

Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries, and is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by MAC address. The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4-3-15-2 appears.

MAC Address Table

Start from VLAN 1 and MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 with 20 entries per page.

Query by:

Port Members

Type

VLAN

MAC Address

CPU

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Dynamic

1

00-30-4F-9E-B7-DF

✓

Static

1

01-00-5E-00-00-01

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Static

1

33-33-00-00-00-01

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Static

1

33-33-FF-11-22-34

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Static

1

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Figure 4-3-15-2: MAC Address Table Status Page Screenshot

Navigating the MAC Table

Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table.

The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table.

Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match.

In addition, the two input fields will - upon a "Refresh" button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.

The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "no more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the "|<<" button to start over.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Type	Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry.
• VLAN	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.
• Port Members	The ports that are members of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

Clear

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

<<

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.3.16 Loop Protection

This chapter describes enabling loop protection function that provides loop protection to prevent broadcast loops in Managed Switch.

4.3.16.1 Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations, and possibly change them as well as screen in Figure 4-3-16-1 appears.

Loop Protection Configuration General Settings

Port Configuration

Port	Enable	Action		Tx Mode
*	☐	<All>	✓	<All> ▼
1	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
2	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
3	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
4	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
5	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
6	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
7	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
8	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
9	☐	Shutdown Port	✓	Disable ▼
				Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-16-1: Loop Protection Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Enable Loop Protection	Controls whether loop protection is enabled (as a whole).

Port Configuration

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the port.
• Enable	Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port.
• Action	Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. Valid values are Shutdown Port, Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.
• Tx Mode	Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU's.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.16.2 Loop Protection Status

This page displays the loop protection port status of the switch; screen in Figure 4-3-16-2 appears.

Figure 4-3-16-2: Loop Protection Status Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The Managed Switch port number of the logical port.
• Action	The currently configured port action.
• Transmit	The currently configured port transmit mode.
• Loops	The number of loops detected on this port.
• Status	The current loop protection status of the port.
• Loop	Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.
• Time of Last Loop	The time of the last loop event detected.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.3.17 UDLD

Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) is a data link layer protocol from Cisco Systems to monitor the physical configuration of the cables and detect unidirectional links. UDLD complements the Spanning Tree Protocol which is used to eliminate switching loops..

4.3.17.1 UDLD Port Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current UDLD configurations, and possibly change them as well. as screen in Figure 4-3-17-1 appears.

Figure 4-3-17-1: UDLD Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Port	Port number of the switch.
• UDLD Mode	Configures theUDLDMode on a port. Valid values are Disable, Normal and Aggressive. Default mode is Disable.Disable: In disabled mode, UDLD functionality doesn't exists on port..Normal: In normal mode, if the link state of the port was determined to be unidirectional, it will not affect the port state.Aggressive: In aggressive mode, unidirectional detected ports will get shutdown. To bring back the ports up, need to disableUDLDon that port
• Message Interval	Configures the period of time between UDLD probe messages on ports that are in the advertisement phase and are determined to be bidirectional. The range is from 7 to 90 seconds(Default value is 7 seconds)(Currently default time interval is supported, due to lack of detailed information in RFC 5171).

Buttons

Save

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.17.2 UDLD Status

This page displays the UDLD status of the ports as well. as screen in Figure 4-3-17-2 appears.

Figure 4-3-17-2: UDLD status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

UDLD port status

Object Description
• UDLD Admin State	The current port state of the logical port, Enabled if any of state(Normal,Aggressive) is Enabled.
• Device ID(local)	The ID of Device
• Device Name(local)	Name of the Device.
• Bidirectional State	The current state of the port.

Neighbour Status

Object Description
• Port	The current port of neighbour device
• Device ID	The current ID of neighbour device.
• Link Status	The current link status of neighbour port.
• Device Name	Name of the Neighbour Device.

Buttons

Refresh

: Click to refresh the page immediately..

4.3.18 Link OAM

4.3.18.1 Statistics

This page provides detailed OAM traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display. The displayed counters represent the total number of OAM frames received and transmitted for the selected port. Discontinuities of these counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system. as screen in Figure 4-3-18-1 appears.

Detailed Link OAM Statistics for Port 1

Receive Total	Transmit Total
Rx OAM Information PDU's 0	Tx OAM Information PDU's 0
Rx Unique Error Event Notification 0	Tx Unique Error Event Notification 0
Rx Duplicate Error Event Notification 0	Tx Duplicate Error Event Notification 0
Rx Loopback Control 0	Tx Loopback Control 0
Rx Variable Request 0	Tx Variable Request 0
Rx Variable Response 0	Tx Variable Response 0
Rx Org Specific PDU's 0	Tx Org Specific PDU's 0
Rx Unsupported Codes 0	Tx Unsupported Codes 0
Rx Link Fault PDU's 0	Tx Link Fault PDU's 0
Rx Dying Gasp 0	Tx Dying Gasp 0
Rx Critical Event PDU's 0	Tx Critical Event PDU's 0

Figure 4-3-18-1: Link OAM Statistic Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Rx and Tx OAM	The number of received and transmitted OAM Information PDU's. Discontinuities
Information PDU's	of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system.
Rx and Tx Unique Error Event Notification	A count of the number of unique Event OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface. Event Notifications may be sent in duplicate to increase the probability of successfully being received, given the possibility that a frame may be lost in transit. Duplicate Event Notification transmissions are counted by Duplicate Event Notification counters for Tx and Rx respectively.A unique Event Notification OAMPDU is indicated as an Event Notification OAMPDU with a Sequence Number field that is distinct from the previously transmitted Event Notification OAMPDU Sequence Number.
Rx and Tx Duplicate Error Event Notification	A count of the number of duplicate Event OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface. Event Notification OAMPDUs may be sent in duplicate to increase the probability of successfully being received, given the possibility that a frame may be lost in transit.A duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU is indicated as an Event Notification OAMPDU with a Sequence Number field that is identical to the previously transmitted Event Notification OAMPDU Sequence Number.
Rx and Tx Loopback Control	A count of the number of Loopback Control OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface.
Rx and Tx Variable Request	A count of the number of Variable Request OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface.
Rx and Tx Variable Response	A count of the number of Variable Response OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface.
Rx and Tx Org Specific PDU's	A count of the number of Organization Specific OAMPDUs transmitted on this interface.
Rx and Tx Unsupported Codes	A count of the number of OAMPDUs transmitted on this interface with an unsupported op-code.
Rx and Tx Link fault PDU's	A count of the number of Link fault PDU's received and transmitted on this interface.
Rx and Tx Dying Gasp	A count of the number of Dying Gasp events received and transmitted on this interface.
Rx and Tx Critical Event PDU's	A count of the number of Critical event PDU's received and transmitted on this interface.

Buttons

Refresh

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears the counters for the selected port.

4.3.18.2 Port Status

This page provides Link OAM configuration operational status. The displayed fields shows the active configuration status for the selected port. as well. as screen in Figure 4-3-18-2 appears.

Detailed Link OAM Status for Port 1

Port 1 Auto-refresh Refresh
PDU Permission	Receive only
Discovery State	Fault state
Peer MAC Address	----

Local		Peer
Mode	Passive	Mode	----
Unidirectional Operation Support	Disabled	Unidirectional Operation Support	----
Remote Loopback Support	Disabled	Remote Loopback Support	----
Link Monitoring Support	Enabled	Link Monitoring Support	----
MIB Retrieval Support	Disabled	MIB Retrieval Support	----
MTU Size	1500	MTU Size	----
Multiplexer State	Forwarding	Multiplexer State	----
Parser State	Forwarding	Parser State	----
Organizational Unique Identification	a8-f7-e0	Organizational Unique Identification	----
PDU Revision	0	PDU Revision	----

Figure 4-3-18-2: Port Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
PDU Permission	This field is available only for the Local DTE.It displays the current permission rules set for the local DTE. Possible values are■ Link fault■ Receive only■ Information exchange only■ ANY
Discovery State	Displays the current state of the discovery process.Possible states are■ Fault state■ Active state■ Passive state■ SEND_LOCAL_REMOTE_STATE■ SEND_LOCAL_REMOTE_OK_STATE■ SEND_ANY_STATE
• Mode	The Mode in which the Link OAM is operating, Active or Passive.
• Unidirectional Operation Support	This feature is not available to be configured by the user. The status of this configuration is retrieved from the PHY.
• Remote Loopback Support	If status is enabled, DTE is capable of OAM remote loopback mode.
• Link Monitoring Support	If status is enabled, DTE supports interpreting Link Events.
• MIB Retrieval Support	If status ie enabled DTE supports sending Variable Response OAMPDUs.
• MTU Size	It represents the largest OAMPDU, in octets, supported by the DTE.This value is compared to the remotes Maximum PDU Size and the smaller of the two is used.
• Multiplexer State	When in forwarding state, the Device is forwarding non-OAMPDUs to the lower sublayer. Incase of discarding, the device discards all the non-OAMPDU's.
• Parser State	■ When in forwarding state, Device is forwarding non-OAMPDUs to higher sublayer.■ When in loopback, Device is looping back non-OAMPDUs to the lower sublayer.■ When in discarding state, Device is discarding non-OAMPDUs.
• Organizational Unique Identification	24-bit Organizationally Unique Identifier of the vendor.
• PDU Revision	It indicates the current revision of the Information TLV.The value of this field shall start at zero and be incremented each time something in the Information TLV changes. Upon reception of an Information TLV from a peer, an OAM client may use this field to decide if it needs to be processed (an Information TLV that is identical to the previous Information TLV doesn't need to be parsed as nothing in it has changed).

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.3.18.3 Event Status

This page allows the user to inspect the current Link OAM Link Event configurations, and change them as well. as screen in Figure 4-3-18-3 appears.

Detailed Link OAM Link Status for Port 1

Local Frame Error Status	Remote Frame Error Status
Sequence Number 0
Frame Error Event Timestamp 0	Frame Error Event Timestamp 0
Frame error event window 0	Frame error event window 0
Frame error event threshold 0	Frame error event threshold 0
Frame errors 0	Frame errors 0
Total frame errors 0	Total frame errors 0
Total frame error events 0	Total frame error events 0
Local Frame Period Status	Remote Frame Period Status
Frame Period Error Event Timestamp 0	Frame Period Error Event Timestamp 0
Frame Period Error Event Window 0	Frame Period Error Event Window 0
Frame Period Error Event Threshold 0	Frame Period Error Event Threshold 0
Frame Period Errors 0	Frame Period Errors 0
Total frame period errors 0	Total frame period errors 0
Total frame period error events 0	Total frame period error events 0
Local Symbol Period Status	Remote Symbol Period Status
Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp 0	Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp 0
Symbol Period Error Event Window 0	Symbol Period Error Event Window 0
Symbol Period Error Event Threshold 0	Symbol Period Error Event Threshold 0
Symbol Period Errors 0	Symbol Period Errors 0
Total symbol period errors 0	Total symbol period errors 0
Total Symbol period error events 0	Total Symbol period error events 0
Local Event Seconds Summary Status	Remote Event Seconds Summary Status
Error Frame Seconds Summary Event Timestamp 0	Error Frame Seconds Summary Event Timestamp 0
Error Frame Seconds Summary Event window 0	Error Frame Seconds Summary Event window 0
Error Frame Seconds Summary Event Threshold 0	Error Frame Seconds Summary Event Threshold 0
Error Frame Seconds Summary Errors 0	Error Frame Seconds Summary Errors 0
Total Error Frame Seconds Summary Errors 0	Total Error Frame Seconds Summary Errors 0
Total Error Frame Seconds Summary Events 0	Total Error Frame Seconds Summary Events 0

Figure 4-3-18-3: Link OAM Statistic Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• Sequence Number	This two-octet field indicates the total number of events occurred at the remote end.
• Frame Error Event Timestamp	This two-octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated, in terms of 100 ms intervals.
• Frame error event window	This two-octet field indicates the duration of the period in terms of 100 ms intervals. 1) The default value is one second. 2) The lower bound is one second. 3) The upper bound is one minute.
• Frame error event threshold	This four-octet field indicates the number of detected errored frames in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated. 1) The default value is one frame error. 2) The lower bound is zero frame errors. 3) The upper bound is unspecified.
• Frame errors	This four-octet field indicates the number of detected errored frames in the period.
• Total frame errors	This eight-octet field indicates the sum of errored frames that have been detectedsince the OAM sublayer was reset.
• Total frame error events	This four-octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sublayer was reset.
• Frame Period Error Event Timestamp	This two-octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated, in terms of 100 ms intervals.
• Frame Period Error Event Window	This four-octet field indicates the duration of period in terms of frames.
• Frame Period Error Event Threshold	This four-octet field indicates the number of errored frames in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated.
• Frame Period Errors	This four-octet field indicates the number of frame errors in the period.
• Total frame period errors	This eight-octet field indicates the sum of frame errors that have been detected since the OAM sublayer was reset.
• Total frame period error events	This four-octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Period Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sublayer was reset
• Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp	This two-octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated, in terms of 100 ms intervals.
• Symbol Period Error Event Window	This eight-octet field indicates the number of symbols in the period.
• Symbol Period Error Event Threshold	This eight-octet field indicates the number of errored symbols in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated.
• Symbol Period Errors	This eight-octet field indicates the number of symbol errors in the period.
• Total symbol period errors	This eight-octet field indicates the sum of symbol errors since the OAM sublayer was reset.
• Total Symbol period error events	This four-octet field indicates the number of Errored Symbol Period Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sublayer was reset.
• Error Frame Seconds Summary Event Timestamp	This two-octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated, in terms of 100 ms intervals, encoded as a 16-bit unsigned integer.
• Error Frame Seconds Summary Event window	This two-octet field indicates the duration of the period in terms of 100 ms intervals, encoded as a 16-bit unsigned integer.
• Error Frame Seconds Summary Event Threshold	This two-octet field indicates the number of errored frame seconds in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated, encoded as a 16-bit unsigned integer.
• Error Frame Seconds Summary Errors	This two-octet field indicates the number of errored frame seconds in the period, encoded as a 16-bit unsigned integer.
• Total Error Frame Seconds Summary Errors	This four-octet field indicates the sum of errored frame seconds that have been detected since the OAM sublayer was reset.
• Total Error FrameSeconds SummaryEvents	This four-octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Seconds SummaryEvent TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sublayer was reset,encoded as a 32bit unsigned integer.

Buttons

Refresh

: Click to refresh the page.

Clear

: Click to clear the data.

4.3.18.4 Port Settings

This page allows the user to inspect the current Link OAM port configurations, and change them as well, as screen in Figure 4-3-18-4 appears.

Port	OAM Enabled	OAM Mode	Loopback Support	Link Monitor Support	MIB Retrieval Support	Loopback Operation
*	□	<All> ▼	□	□	□	□
1	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
2	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
3	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
4	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
5	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
6	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
7	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
8	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
9	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
10	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
11	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
12	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
13	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
14	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	B
15	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
16	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
17	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□
18	□	Passive ▼	□	✓	□	□

Figure 4-3-18-4: Port Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
OAM Enabled	Controls whether Link OAM is enabled on this switch port. Enabling Link OAM provides the network operators the ability to monitor the health of the network and quickly determine the location of failing links or fault conditions.
OAM Mode	Configures the OAM Mode as Active or Passive. The default mode is Passive.■ Active modeDTE's configured in Active mode initiate the exchange of Information OAMPDUs as defined by the Discovery process. Once the Discovery process completes, Active DTE's are permitted to send any OAMPDU while connected to a remote OAM peer entity in Active mode. Active DTE's operate in a limited respect if the remote OAM entity is operating in Passive mode. Active devices should not respond to OAM remote loopback commands and variable requests from a Passive peer.■ Passive modeDTE's configured in Passive mode do not initiate the Discovery process.Passive DTE's react to the initiation of the Discovery process by the remote DTE. This eliminates the possibility of passive to passive links. Passive DTE's shall not send Variable Request or Loopback Control OAMPDUs.
Loopback Support	Controls whether the loopback support is enabled for the switch port. Link OAM remote loopback can be used for fault localization and link performance testing.Enabling the loopback support will allow the DTE to execute the remote loopback command that helps in the fault detection.
Link Monitor Support	Controls whether the Link Monitor support is enabled for the switch port. On enabling the Link Monitor support, the DTE supports event notification that permits the inclusion of diagnostic information.
MIB Retrieval Support	Controls whether the MIB Retrieval Support is enabled for the switch port. On enabling the MIB retrieval support, the DTE supports polling of various Link OAM based MIB variables' contents.
Loopback Operation	If the Loopback support is enabled, enabling this field will start a loopback operation for the port.

Buttons

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.18.5 Event Settings

This page allows the user to inspect the current Link OAM Link Event configurations, and change them as well, as screen in Figure 4-3-18-5 appears.

Link Event Configuration for Port 1

Port 1 ▼

Event Name	Error Window	Error Threshold
Error Frame Event	1	1
Symbol Period Error Event	1	1
Seconds Summary Event	60	1

Save | Reset

Figure 4-3-18-5: Event Settings Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• Event Name	Name of the Link Event which is being configured.
• Error Window	Represents the window period in the order of 1 sec for the observation of various link events.
• Error Threshold	Represents the threshold value for the window period for the appropriate Link event so as to notify the peer of this error.
• Error Frame Event	The Errored Frame Event counts the number of errored frames detected during the specified period. The period is specified by a time interval (Window in order of 1 sec). This event is generated if the errored frame count is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period (Period Threshold). Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sublayer. Error Window for 'Error Frame Event' must be an integer value between 1-60 and its default value is '1'. Whereas Error Threshold must be between 0-4294967295 and its default value is '1'.
• Symbol Period Error Event	ved in a time interval on the underlying physical layer. This event is generated if the symbol error count is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period. Error Window for 'Symbol Period Error Event' must be an integer value between 1-60 and its default value is '1'. Whereas Error Threshold must be between 0-4294967295 and its default value is '1'.
• Seconds Summary Event	The Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event TLV counts the number of errored frame seconds that occurred during the specified period. The period is specified by a time interval. This event is generated if the number of errored frame seconds is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period. An errored frame second is a one second interval wherein at least one frame errorwas detected. Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sublayer. Error Window for 'Seconds Summary Event' must be an integer value between 10-900 and its default value is '60'. Whereas Error Threshold must be between 0-65535 and its default value is '1'.

Buttons

Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.18.6 MIB Retrieval

This page allows you to configure Link OAM MIB Retrieval, as screen in Figure 4-3-18-6 appears.

Figure 4-3-18-6: MIB Retrieval Page Screenshot

4.3.19 CFM

4.3.19.1 Global Configuration

Configure CFM Global parameters on this page.

CFM Global Configuration

Sender Id TLV	None
Port Status TLV	Enable
Interface Status TLV	Disable
Organisation Specific TLV	Disable
Organisation Specific TLV OUI	000000
Organisation Specific TLV Subtype	0
Organisation Specific TLV Value

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Sender Id TLV	Choose whether and what to use as Sender ID TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch. Can be overridden by Domain and Service level configuration.NoneChassisManageChassisManage
Port Status TLV	Choose whether to send Port Status TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.Can be overridden by Domain and Service level configuration.Enable Send Port Status TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.Disable Do not send Port Status TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.
Interface Status TLV	Choose whether to send Interface Status TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch. Can be overridden by Domain and Service level configuration.Enable Send Interface Status TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.Disable Do not Send Interface Status TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.
Organisation Specific TLV	Choose whether to send Organisation Specific TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch. Can be overridden by Domain and Service level configuration.Enable Send Organisation Specific TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.Disable Do not send Organisation Specific TLVs in CCMs generated by this switch.
Organisation Specific TLV OUI	This is the three-bytes OUI transmitted with the Organization-Specific TLVs. Enter as 6 characters 0-9, a-f.
Organisation Specific TLV Subtype	This is the subtype transmitted with the Organization-Specific TLV. Can be any value in range [0; 255]
Organisation Specific TLV Value	This is the value transmitted in the Organization-Specific TLVs. Value is a printable character string of length 0-63.
Default	To set the switch port to use the default VL

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.20 sFlow

4.3.20.1 sFlow Configuration

This page allows for configuring sFlow. The configuration is divided into two parts: Configuration of the sFlow receiver (a.k.a. sFlow collector) and configuration of per-port flow and counter samplers.

sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory, which means that a reboot will disable sFlow sampling.

Refresh

sFlow Configuration

Agent Configuration

IP Address

127.0.0.1

Receiver Configuration

Owner		<none>	Release
IP Address/Hostname		0.0.0.0
UDP Port		6343
Timeout		0	seconds
Max. Datagram Size		1400	bytes

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
IP Address	The IP address used as Agent IP address in sFlow datagrams. It serves as a unique key that will identify this agent over extended periods of time.Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
Owner	Basically, sFlow can be configured in two ways: Through local management using the Web or CLI interface or throughSNMP. This read-only field shows the owner of the current sFlow configuration and assumes values as follows:If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains.If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains.If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying the sFlow receiver.If sFlow is configured through SNMP, all controls - except for the Release-button - are disabled to avoid inadvertent reconfiguration.The button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow sampling.The button is disabled if sFlow is currently unclaimed. If configured through SNMP, the release must be confirmed (a confirmation request will appear).
IP Address/Hostname	The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
UDP Port	TheUDP port on which the sFlow receiver listens to sFlow datagrams. If set to 0 (zero), the default port (6343) is used.
Timeout	The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner is released. While active, the current time left can be updated with a click on the Refresh-button. If locally managed, the timeout can be changed on the fly without affecting any other settings. Valid range is 0 to 2147483647 seconds.
Max. Datagram Size	The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. This should be set to a value that avoids fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams. Valid range is 200 to 1468 bytes with default being 1400 bytes.

Port Configuration

Port	Flow Sampler			Counter Poller
	Enabled	Sampling Rate	Max. Header	Enabled	Interval
*	□	0	128	□	0
1	□	0	128	□	0
2	□	0	128	□	0
3	□	0	128	□	0
4	□	0	128	□	0
5	□	0	128	□	0
6	□	0	128	□	0
7	□	0	128	□	0
8	□	0	128	□	0
9	□	0	128	□	0
10	□	0	128	□	0

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Flow Sampler Enabled	Enables/disables flow sampling on this port.
• Flow Sampler Sampling Rate	The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling. Set to N to sample on average 1/Nth of the packets transmitted/received on the port.Not all sampling rates are achievable. If an unsupported sampling rate is requested, the switch will automatically adjust it to the closest achievable. This will be reported back in this field. Valid range is 1 to 32767.
• Flow Sampler Max. Header	The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to the sFlow datagram. Valid range is 14 to 200 bytes with default being 128 bytes. To have room for any frame, the maximum datagram sizes should be roughly 100 bytes larger than the maximum header size. If the maximum datagram size does not take into account the maximum header size, samples may be dropped.
• Counter Poller Enabled	Enables/disables counter polling on this port.
• Counter Poller Interval	With counter polling enabled, this specifies the interval - in seconds - between counter poller samples. Valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds.

Buttons

Release

: See description under Owner.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.

Apply

: Click to apply changes. Note that sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4 Routing

4.4.1 IP Configuration

The IP Configuration includes the IP Configuration, IP Interface and IP Routes. The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration. The maximum number of interfaces supported is 128 and the maximum number of routes is 128. The screen in Figure 4-4-1 appears.

Figure 4-4-1: IP Configuration Page Screenshot

The current column is used to show the active IP configuration.

Object Description
IP Configurations	Domain Name	Configure the Switch Domain Name
	Mode	Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router. In Host mode, IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed. In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces.
	DNS Server	This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch. The following modes are supported:■ No DNS serverNo DNS server will be used..■ Configure IPv4 or IPv6Explicitly specify the name of local domain.Make sure the configured domain name meets your organization's given domain.■ From any DHCPv6 interfacesThe first domain name offered from a DHCPv6 lease to a DHCPv6-enabled interface will be used.■ From this DHCPv6 interface

User's Manual of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Managed Switches

			Specify from which DHCPv6-enabled interface a provided domain name should be preferred.
	DNS Proxy		When DNS proxy is enabled, system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS server, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network.
• IP Interface	Delete		Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.
	VLAN		The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the IP interface. This field is only available for input when creating a new interface.
	IPv4 DHCP	Enabled	Enable the DHCP client by checking this box.
		Fallback	The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease.
		Current Lease	For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column shows the current interface address, as provided by the DHCP server.
	IPv4 Address		Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation.
			Mask Length
	DHCPv6	Enable	Enable the DHCPv6 client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will configure the IPv6 address of the interface using the DHCPv6 protocol
		Rapid Commit	Enable the DHCPv6 Rapid-Commit option by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the DHCPv6 client terminates the waiting process as soon as a Reply message with a Rapid Commit option is received. This option is only manageable when DHCPv6 client is enabled.
		Current Lease	For DHCPv6 interface with an active lease, this column shows the interface address provided by the DHCPv6 server
	IPv6 Address		Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch. An IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:)
			Mask Length
			The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 1 and 128 bits for an IPv6 address.
• IP Routes	Delete		Select this option to delete an existing IP route.
	Network		The destination IP network or host address of this route. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0 or IPv6 :: notation.
	Mask Length		The destination IP network or host mask, in number of bits (prefix length).
	Gateway		The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.
	Next Hop VLAN	The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway.

Buttons

Add Interface

: Click to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 128 interfaces are supported.

Add Route

: Click to add a new IP route. A maximum of 32 routes are supported.

Apply

: Click to apply changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.2 IP Status

IP Status displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbor cache (ARP cache) status. The screen in Figure 4-4-2 appears.

IP Interfaces

Interface	Type	Address	Status
OS:lo	LINK	00-00-00-00-00-00
OS:lo	IPv4	127.0.0.1/8
OS:lo	IPv6	fe80:1::1/64
OS:lo	IPv6	::1/128
VLAN1	LINK	00-30-4f-11-22-33
VLAN1	IPv4	192.168.0.100/20
VLAN1	IPv6	fe80:2::230:4fff:fe11:2233/64

IP Routes

Network	Gateway	Status
127.0.0.1/32	127.0.0.1
192.168.0.0/24	VLAN1
192.168.0.0/20	VLAN1
224.0.0.0/4	127.0.0.1
::1/128	::1

Neighbour cache

IP Address	Link Address
192.168.0.123	VLAN1:00-30-4f-91-e6-45
fe80:2::230:4fff.fe11:2233	VLAN1:00-30-4f-11-22-33

Figure 4-4-2: IP Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Interfaces	Interface	The name of the interface.
	Type	The address type of the entry. This may be LINK or IPv4.
	Address	The current address of the interface (of the given type).
	Status	The status flags of the interface (and/or address).
• IP Routes	Network	The destination IP network or host address of this route.
	Gateway	The gateway address of this route.
	Status The status flags of the route.
• Neighbor Cache	IP Address	The IP address of the entry.
	Link Address	The Link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP address given exists.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page.

4.4.3 IPv4 Routing Info. Base

This is IPv4 route entry table. It is used to provide the route entries status information. The screen in Figure 4-4-3 appears.

Figure 4-4-3: IP Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object	Description
Protocol	The protocol of the route.DHCP: The route is created by DHCP-connected: The destination network is connected directly.Static: The route is created by user.OSPF: The route is created by OSPF.
Network/Prefix	Network and prefix (example 10.0.0.0/16) of the given route entry.
NextHop	The IP address of nexthop. Value '0.0.0.0' indicates the link is directly connected.
Distance	The distance of the route.
Metric	The metric of the route.
Interface	The interface where the ip packet is outgoing.
Uptime (hh:ss:mm)	The time till the route is created. The unit is second.
State	Indicate if the destination network is reachable or not.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled..

4.4.4 IPv6 Routing Info. Base

This is IPv6 route entry table. It is used to provide the route entries status information. The screen in Figure 4-4-4 appears.

Routing Information Base

Codes: C - connected, S - static, O - OSPF, R - RIP, * - selected route, D - DHCP installed route

Figure 4-4-4: IP Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Protocol	The protocol of the route.DHCP: The route is created by DHCP-connected: The destination network is connected directly.Static: The route is created by user.OSPF: The route is created by OSPF.
Network/Prefix	Network and prefix (example 10.0.0.0/16) of the given route entry.
NextHop	The IP address of nexthop. Value '0.0.0.0' indicates the link is directly connected.
Distance	The distance of the route.
Metric	The metric of the route.
Interface	The interface where the ip packet is outgoing.
Uptime (hh:ss:mm)	The time till the route is created. The unit is second.
State	Indicate if the destination network is reachable or not.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled..

4.4.5 OSPF

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a routing protocol for Internet Protocol (IP) networks. It uses a link state routing (LSR) algorithm and falls into the group of interior gateway protocols (IGPs), operating within a single autonomous system (AS).

To implement OSPF for a large network, you must first organize the network into logical areas to limit the number of OSPF routers that actively exchange Link State Advertisements (LSAs). You can then define an OSPF interface by assigning an IP interface configured on this switch to one of these groups. This OSPF interface will send and receive OSPF traffic to neighboring OSPF routers. You can further optimize the exchange of OSPF traffic by specifying an area range that covers a large number of subnetwork addresses. This is an important technique for limiting the amount of traffic exchanged between

Area Border Routers (ABRs). And finally, you must specify a virtual link to any OSPF area that is not physically attached to the OSPF backbone. Virtual links can also be used to provide a redundant link between contiguous areas to prevent areas from being partitioned, or to merge backbone areas.

graph TD
    subgraph Area 0 (Backbone Area)
        A["Router A (ASBR)"] --> B["Router B"]
        B --> C["Router C (ABR)"]
        C --> D["Router D (ABR)"]
        D --> E["Router E"]
        E --> F["Router F (ABR)"]
        F --> G["Router G (ASBR)"]
        G --> H["Router H"]
        H --> I["Router I ABR"]
        I --> J["Router J"]
        J --> K["Router K"]
        K --> L["Router L"]
        L --> M["Router M"]
        M --> N["Router N"]
        N --> O["Router O"]
        O --> P["Router P"]
        P --> Q["Router Q"]
        Q --> R["Router R"]
        R --> S["Router S"]
        S --> T["Router T"]
        T --> U["Router U"]
        U --> V["Router V"]
        V --> W["Router W"]
        W --> X["Router X"]
        X --> Y["Router Y"]
        Y --> Z["Router Z"]
        Z --> AA["Router AA"]
        AA --> AB["Router AB"]
        AB --> AC["Router AC"]
        AC --> AD["Router AD"]
        AD --> AE["Router AE"]
        AE --> AF["Router AF"]
        AF --> AG["Router AG"]
        AG --> AH["Router AH"]
        AH --> AI["Router AI"]
        AI --> AJ["Router AJ"]
        AJ --> AK["Router AK"]
        AK --> AL["Router AL"]
        AL --> AM["Router AM"]
        AM --> AN["Router AN"]
        AN --> AO["Router AO"]
        AO --> AP["Router AP"]
        AP --> AQ["Router AQ"]
        AQ --> AR["Router AR"]
        AR --> AS["Router ASBRA"]
        AS --> AT["Router AT"]
        AT --> AU["RIP"]
    end
    subgraph Area 1 (Network 1)
        B2["Network 2"] --> B3["Router C (ABR)"]
    end
    subgraph Area 2 (Network 2)
        G1["Network 3"] --> G2["Router G (ASBR)"]
        G3["Router G (ASBR)"] --> G4["Router F (ABR)"]
        G5["Router F (ASBR)"] --> G6["Router H"]
    end
    subgraph Area 3 (Network 3)
        H1["Network 4"] --> H2["Router H"]
    end
    subgraph Area 4 (Network 4)
        H3["Network 7"] --> H4["Router H"]
    end
    subgraph Area 5 (Network 5)
        I1["Network 5"] --> I2["Router I ABR"]
    end
    subgraph Area 6 (Network 6)
        J1["Router J"]
    end
    subgraph Area 7 (Network 7)
        K1["Virtual Link"] --> K2["Virtual Link"]
    end

graph TD
    LSA -->|32| RouterA
    LSA -->|20| RouterA
    RouterA -->|17| RouterB
    RouterB --> RouterD
    RouterD -->|10| RouterC
    RouterC -->|10| RouterD

Neighbor	Metric
B	8
C	32
D	20

LSA of Router A

4.4.5.1 Global Configuration

This is OSPF router configuration table. It is a general group to configure the OSPF common router parameters. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-1 appears.

OSPF Global Configuration

Clear OSPF Process
OSPF Router Mode			Enable ▼
Router ID			Auto 192.168.0.100 Specific 0.0.0.0
Default Passive Mode			False ▼
Default Metric			Auto Specific 0
Redistribute	Static	Metric Type	None ▼
		Metric Value	0
	Connected	Metric Type	None ▼
		Metric Value	0

Figure 4-4-5-1: OSPF Global Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
OSPF Router Mode	Enable/Disable the OSPF router mode.
Router ID	The OSPF Router ID in IPv4 address format(A.B.C.D).When the router's OSPF Router ID is changed, if there is one or more fully adjacent neighbors in current OSPF area, the new router ID will take effect after restart OSPF process. Notice that the router ID should be unique in the Autonomous System and value '0.0.0.0' is invalid since it is reserved for the default algorithm.Auto: The default algorithm will choose the largest IP address assigned to the router.Specific: User specified router ID.
Default Passive Mode	Configure all interfaces as passive-interface by default.When an interface is configured as a passive-interface, the OSFP routing updates sending is suppressed, therefore the interface does not establish adjacencies (No OSPF Hellos). The subnet of all interfaces (both passive and active) is advertised by the OSPF router.
Default Metric	User specified default metric value for the OSPF routing protocol. The field is significant only when the arugment 'IsSpecificDefMetric' is TRUEAuto: The default metric is calculated automatically based on the routing protocols.Specific: User specified default metric.
Static Redistribute Metric Type	The OSPF redistributed metric type for the connected interfaces.None: The static routes are not redistributed.Specified Metric Value: User specified metric for the static routes.External Type 1: External Type 1 of the static routes.External Type 2: External Type 2 of the static routes.
Static Redistribute Metric Value	User specified metric value for the connected interfaces. The field is significant only when the arugment 'ConnectedRedistMetricType' is configured as 'metricTypeSpecified'.The allowed range is 0 to 1677214.
Connected Redistribute Metric Type	The OSPF redistributed metric type for the static routes.None: The connected interfaces are not redistributed.Specified Metric Value: User specified metric for the connected interfaces routes.External Type 1: External Type 1 of the connected interfaces routes.External Type 2: External Type 2 of the connected interfaces routes.
Connected Redistribute Metric Value	User specified metric value for the static routes.The field is significant only when the arugment 'StaticRedistMetricType' is configured as 'metricTypeSpecified'.The allowed range is 0 to 1677214.

Buttons

Clear OSPF Process

Click to reset the current OSPF process.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.2 Network Area

OSPF protocol broadcast messages (i.e., Link State Advertisements) are restricted by area to limit their impact on network performance. Before assigning an Area ID to a specific OSPF interface, you must first specify the Area ID in this table. Each entry in this table identifies a logical group of OSPF routers that actively exchange Link State Advertisements (LSAs) to ensure that they share an identical view of the network topology. You can configure the area as a normal one which can send and receive external Link State Advertisements (LSAs), a stubby area that cannot send or receive external LSAs, or a not-so-stubby area (NSSA) that can import external route information into its area.

graph LR
    subgraph Area 0 (Backbone Area)
        A["Router 1"] -->|192.168.1.1/24| B["Router 2"]
        B -->|192.168.3.2/24| C["Router 0"]
        C -->|192.168.0.1/24| D["Router 0"]
        D -->|192.168.0.2/24| E["Router 0"]
        E -->|192.168.2.1/24| F["Router 0"]
        F -->|192.168.2.2/24| G["Router 0"]
        G -->|192.168.2.1/24| H["Router 0"]
        H -->|192.168.3.1/24| I["Router 0"]
        I -->|220.135.70.20| J["Router 0"]
    end
    subgraph Area 1
        K["Router 1"] --> L["Router 0"]
    end
    subgraph Area 2
        M["Router 2"] --> N["Router 0"]
    end

Following is OSPF area configuration table. It is used to specify the OSPF enabled interface(s). When OSPF is enabled on the specific interface(s), the router can provide the network information to the other OSPF routers via those interfaces. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-2 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-2: OSPF Network Area Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Network Address	IPv4 network address.
Mask Length	IPv4 network mask length.
Area ID The OSPF area	ID.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.3 Passive Interface

This is OSPF router interface configuration table. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-3 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-3: Passive Interface Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Interface	Interface identification.
Passive Interface	Enable the interface as OSPF passive-interface.

Buttons

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.4 Stub Area

This is OSPF stub area configuration table. The configuration is used to reduce the link-state database size and therefore the memory and CPU requirement by forbidding some LSAs. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-4 appears.

OSPF Area Stub Configuration

Figure 4-4-5-4: Stub Area Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Area ID The OSPF area	ID.
No Summary	The value is true means the area is a totally stub area, which summary-LSAs(Type-3) except for the default route and AS-external-LSAs(Type-5) are blocked.The value is false means the area is a stub area, which summary-LSAs(Type-3) except for the default route are blocked.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Save:

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.5 Area Authentication

This is OSPF area authentication configuration table. It is used to applied the authentication to all the interfaces belong to the area. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-5 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-5: Area Authentication Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Area ID The OSPF area	ID.
Auth. Type	The authentication type on an area is applied to all the interfaces belong to that area.The authentication type on an IP interface or a virtual link overrides the authentication type on an area and is useful if different interfaces in the same area use different authentication types.Specify the authenticaton type.Simple Password: Simple password authentication.Message Digest: MD5 digest authentication.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Save :

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.6 Area Range

This is OSPF area range configuration table. It is used to summarize the intra area paths from a specific address range in one summary-LSA(Type-3) and advertised to other areas or configure the address range status as 'DoNotAdvertise' which the summary-LSA(Type-3) is suppressed. The area range configuration is used for Area Border Routers (ABRs) and only router-LSAs(Type-1) and network-LSAs (Type-2) can be summarized. The AS-external-LSAs(Type-5) cannot be summarized because the scope is OSPF autonomous system (AS). The AS-external-LSAs(Type-7) cannot be summarized because the feature is not supported yet.. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-6 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-6: Area Range Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Area ID The OSPF area	ID.
Network Address	IPv4 network address.
Mask Length	IPv4 network mask length.
Advertised	When the value is true, it summarizes intra area paths from the address range in one summary-LSA(Type-3) and advertised to other areas. Otherwise, the intra area paths from the address range are not advertised to other areas.
Auto/Specific	When 'Auto' is selected, the cost value is set to 0 automatically and isn't allowed to be configured.
Cost	User specified cost (or metric) for this summary route. It is allowed to be configured only when 'Specific' is selected and the allowed range is 0 to 65535.. The allowed range is 1 to 16777215 and the default setting is 'auto cost' mode.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Save

Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.7 Interface Configuration

graph TD
    subgraph Area 0 (Backbone Area)
        A["Router"] -->|192.168.0.2/24| B["Router"]
        A -->|192.168.2.2/24| C["Router"]
        C -->|192.168.2.1/24| A
    end
    subgraph Area 1
        D["Router"] -->|192.168.1.1/24| B
        D -->|192.168.1.2/24| E["Router"]
        E -->|192.168.1.2/24| D
    end
    A -->|OSPF Interface| B
    C -->|OSPF Interface| B

This is interface configuration parameter table. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-7 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-7: Interface Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Interface	Interface identification.
Priority	User specified router priority for the interface.The allowed range is 0 to 255 and the default value is 1.
Cost	User specified cost for this interface. It's link state metric for the interface. The field is significant only when 'IsSpecificCost' is TRUE.The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default setting is 'auto cost' mode.
FastHelloPackets	How many Hello packets will be sent per second.The allowed range is 1 to 10 and the default setting is disabled.
Hello Interval	How many Hello packets will be sent per second.The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 10 (seconds).Hello Packet
Dead Interval	The time interval (in seconds) between hello packets.The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 40 (seconds).
Retransmit Interval	The time interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisement(LSA) retransmissions for adjacencies.The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 5 (seconds).
Auth. Type	The authentication type.Simple Password: It's using a plain text authentication. A password must be configured, but the password can be read by sniffer the packets.Message Digest: It's message-digest algorithm 5 (MD5) authentication. Keying material must also be configured. This is the most secure method.Null Authentication: No authentication.Area Configuration: Refer to Area authentication setting.
Change Simple Password	It is used to change the simple password (fill with plain text). The allowed input length is 1 to 8.
MD Key	Click the icon to edit the message digest key for the entry.

Buttons

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.8 Virtual Link

All OSPF areas must connect to the backbone. If an area does not have a direct physical connection to the backbone, you can configure a virtual link that provides a logical path to the backbone. To connect an isolated area to the backbone, the logical path can cross a single nonbackbone area to reach the backbone. To define the path, you must specify one endpoint on the ABR that connects the isolated area to the common nonbackbone area, and the other endpoint on the ABR that connects this common nonbackbone area and the backbone itself. (However, note that you cannot configure a virtual link that runs through a stub or NSSA area.)

Virtual links can also be used to create a redundant link between any area and the backbone to help prevent partitioning, or to connect two existing backbone areas into a common backbone.

To configure a virtual link, specify the transit area through which the endpoint routers connect, and the address of the router on this side of the link.

graph TD
    subgraph Area 0 (Backbone Area)
        A["Router A"] --> B["Router B"]
        C["Router A"] --> D["Router B"]
        E["Router A"] --> F["Router B"]
        G["Router A"] --> H["Router B"]
        I["Router A"] --> J["Router B"]
        K["Router A"] --> L["Router B"]
        M["Router A"] --> N["Router B"]
        O["Router A"] --> P["Router B"]
        Q["Router A"] --> R["Router B"]
        S["Router A"] --> T["Router B"]
        U["Router A"] --> V["Router B"]
        W["Router A"] --> X["Router B"]
        Y["Router A"] --> Z["Router B"]
        AA["Router A"] --> AB["Router B"]
        AC["Router A"] --> AD["Router B"]
        AE["Router A"] --> AF["Router B"]
        AG["Router A"] --> AH["Router B"]
        AI["Router A"] --> AJ["Router B"]
        AK["Router A"] --> AL["Router B"]
        AM["Router A"] --> AN["Router B"]
        AO["Router A"] --> AP["Router B"]
        AQ["Router A"] --> AR["Router B"]
        AS["Router A"] --> AT["Router B"]
        AU["Router A"] --> AV["Router B"]
        AW["Router A"] --> AX["Router B"]
        AY["Virtual Link"] -.-> AZ["Virtual Link"]
    end

Following is OSPF virtual link configuration table. The virtual link is established between 2 ABRs to overcome that all the areas have to be connected directly to the backbone area. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-8 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-8: Virtual Link Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Area ID OSPF Area ID.
Router ID OSPF router ID.
Hello Interval	The time interval (in seconds) between hello packets. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 10 (seconds).
Dead Interval	The number of seconds to wait until the neighbour is decalred to be dead. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 40 (seconds).
Retransmit Interval	The time interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisement(LSA) retransmissions for adjacencies. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 5 (seconds).
Auth. Type	The authentication type on an area.Simple Password: It's using a plain text authentication. A password must be configured, but the password can be read by sniffer the packets.Message Digest: It's message-digest algorithm 5 (MD5) authentication. Keying material must also be configured. This is the most secure method.Null Authentication: No authentication.Area Configuration: Refer to Area authentication setting.
Change SimplePassword	It is used to change the simple password (fill with plain text). The allowed input length is 1 to 8.
MD Key	Click the icon to edit the message digest key for the entry.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Save:

Click to save changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.5.9 Global Status

This is OSPF router status table. It is used to provide the OSPF router status information. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-9 appears.

OSPF Global Status

Figure 4-4-5-9: Virtual Link Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Router ID OSPF router ID.
SPF Delay	Delay time (in seconds) of SPF calculations.
SPF Hold Time	Minimum hold time (in milliseconds) between consecutive SPF calculations.
SPF Max. Wait Time	Maximum wait time (in milliseconds) between consecutive SPF calculations.
Last Executed SPF Time Stamp	Time (in milliseconds) that has passed between the start of the SPF algorithm execution and the current time.
Min. LSA Interval	Minimum interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisements.
Min. LSA Arrival	Maximum arrival time (in milliseconds) of link-state advertisements.
External LSA Count	Number of external link-state advertisements.
External LSA Checksum	Number of external link-state checksum.
Attached Area Count	Number of areas attached for the router.

Buttons

Clear OSPF Process

Click to reset the current OSPF process.

Auto-refresh

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.5.10 Area Status

This is OSPF network area status table. It is used to provide the OSPF network area status information. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-10 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-10: Area Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Area ID The Area ID.
Backbone	Indicate if it's backbone area or not.
Area Type The area type.
Active Interfaces	Number of active interfaces attached in the area.
Auth. Type	The authentication type in the area.
SPF Executed Times	Number of times SPF algorithm has been executed for the particular area.
LSA Count	Number of the total LSAs for the particular area.
Router LSA Count	Number of the router-LSAs(Type-1) of a given type for the particular area.
Router LSA Checksum	The the router-LSAs(Type-1) checksum.
Network LSA Count	Number of the network-LSAs(Type-2) of a given type for the particular area.
Network LSA Checksum	The the network-LSAs(Type-2) checksum.
Summary LSA Count	Number of the summary-LSAs(Type-3) of a given type for the particular area.
Summary LSA Checksum	The the summary-LSAs(Type-3) checksum.
ASBR Summary LSA Count	Number of the ASBR-summary-LSAs(Type-4) of a given type for the particular area.
ASBR Summary LSA Checksum	The the ASBR-summary-LSAs(Type-4) checksum.

Buttons

Auto-refresh

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.5.11 Neighbor Status

This is OSPF IPv4 neighbor status table. It is used to provide the OSPF neighbor status information. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-11 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-11: Neighbor Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Neighbor ID	The Neighbor ID.
Priority	The priority of OSPF neighbor. It indicates the priority of the neighbor router. This item is used when selecting the DR for the network. The router with the highest priority becomes the DR.
State	The state of OSPF neighbor. It indicates the functional state of the neighbor router.
Dead Time	Dead timer. It indicates the amount of time remaining that the router waits to receive an OSPF hello packet from the neighbor before declaring the neighbor down.
Interface Address	The IP address.
Interface	The network interface.

Buttons

Auto-refresh

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.5.12 Interface Status

This is OSPF interface status table. It is used to provide the OSPF interface status information. The screen in Figure 4-4-5-12 appears.

Figure 4-4-5-12: Interface Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Interface	Interface identification.
Interface Address	IPv4 network address.
Area ID The OSPF area	ID.
Router ID	The OSPF router ID.
State	The state of the link.
DR ID	The router ID of DR.
DR Address	The IP address of DR.
BDR ID	The router ID of BDR.
BDR Address	The IP address of BDR.
Priority	The OSPF priority. It helps determine the DR and BDR on the network to which this interface is connected.
Cost	The cost of the interface.
Hello	Hello timer. A time interval that a router sends an OSPF hello packet.
Dead	Dead timer. Dead timer is a time interval to wait before declaring a neighbor dead. The unit of time is the second.
Wait	This interval is used in Wait Timer. Wait timer is a single shot timer that causes the interface to exit waiting and select a DR on the network. Wait Time interval is the same as Dead time interval.
Retransmit	Retransmit timer. A time interval to wait before retransmitting a database description packet when it has not been acknowledged.
Hello Timer	Hello due timer. An OSPF hello packet will be sent on this interface after this due time.
Nbr Count	Neighbor count. This is the number of OSPF neighbors discovered on this interface.
Adjacent Nbr Count	Adjacent neighbor count. This is the number of routers running OSPF that are fully adjacent with this router.
Passive	Indicate if the interface is passive interface.
Transmit Delay	The estimated time to transmit a link-state update packet on the interface.

Buttons

Auto-refresh

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.6 OSPF Database

Navigating the OSPF Link State Database Table

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

4.4.6.1 Global Configuration

The OSPF LSA link state database information table.

OSPF Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF area ID of the link state advertisement. It is not required for external LSA.
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Router Link Count	The link count of the LSA. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Router Link State' (Type 1).

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.7 Detail Database

4.4.7.1 Router

Navigating the OSPF Router Link State Database Table

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF Router Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF option field which is present in OSPF hello packets, which enables OSPF routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• Router Link Count	The link count of the LSA. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Router Link State' (Type 1).

Buttons

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

<<: Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

<< Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

| Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.7.2 Network

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF Network Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Advertising Router	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF option field which is present in OSPF hello packets, which enablesOSPF routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• NetworkMask	Network mask length. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Network Link State' (Type 2).

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.7.3 Summary

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF Summary Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF option field which is present in OSPF hello packets, which enables OSPF routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• NetworkMask	Network mask length. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
• Metric	User specified metric for this summary route. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).

Buttons

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

<<: Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

<< Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

| Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.7.4 ASBR Summary

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF ASBR Summary Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF option field which is present in OSPF hello packets, which enables OSPF routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• NetworkMask	Network mask length. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
• Metric	User specified metric for this summary route. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.7.5 External

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF External Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
Link State ID	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
Options	The OSPF option field which is present in OSPF hello packets, which enables OSPF routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.
Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
NetworkMask	Network mask length. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
MetricType	The External type of the LSA. The field is significant only when the link state typeis 'External/NSSA External Link State' (Type 5, 7).
• Metric	User specified metric for this summary route. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
• ForwardAddress	The IP address of forward address. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'External/NSSA External Link State' (Type 5, 7).

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.7.6 NSSA External

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF NSSA External Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
Options	The OSPF option field which is present in OSPF hello packets, which enables OSPF routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.
Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
NetworkMask	Network mask length. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
MetricType	The External type of the LSA. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'External/NSSA External Link State' (Type 5, 7).
Metric	User specified metric for this summary route. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
ForwardAddress	The IP address of forward address. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'External/NSSA External Link State' (Type 5, 7).

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.8 OSPFv3

4.4.8.1 Global Configuration

This is OSPF6 router configuration table. It is a general group to configure the OSPF6 common router parameters.

OSPF6 Global Configuration

Apply Reset

Clear OSPF6 Process

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• OSPF6 Router Mode	Enable/Disable the OSPF6 router mode.
• Default Router ID	The OSPF6 Router ID in IPv4 address format(A.B.C.D).When the router's OSPF6 Router ID is changed, if there is one or more fully adjacent neighbors in current OSPF6 area, the new router ID will take effect after restart OSPF6 process. Notice that the router ID should be unique in the Autonomous System and value '0.0.0.0' is invalid since it is reserved for the default algorithm.Auto: The default algorithm will choose the largest IP address assigned to the router.Specific: User specified router ID.The allowed range is from 0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.254.
• Static Redistribute	The OSPF redistributeenabled for the static routes or not.Enable: The static routes are redistributed.Disable: The static routes are not redistributed
• Connected Redistribute	The OSPF redistribute enabled for connected route or not.Enable: The connected interfaces are redistributed.Disbale: The connected interfaces are not redistributed.
• Administrative istance	The OSPF6 administrative distance.

Buttons

Clear all statistics

: Click to reset the current OSPF6 process.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.8.2 Passive Interface

This is OSPF6 router interface configuration table.

OSPF6 Passive Interface Configuration

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification.
• Interface Area ID	The OSPF6 interface Area ID.Only valid if 'is_specific_id' is true

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.8.3 Stub Area

This is OSPF6 stub area configuration table. The configuration is used to reduce the link-state database size and therefore the memory and CPU requirement by forbidding some LSAs.

OSPF6 Area Stub Configuration

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID.
• No Summary	The value is true to configure the inter-area routes do not inject into this stub area.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.8.4 Area Range

This is OSPF6 area range configuration table. It is used to summarize the intra area paths from a specific address range in one summary-LSA(Type-0x2003) and advertised to other areas or configure the address range status as 'DoNotAdvertise' which the summary-LSA(Type-0x2003) is suppressed. The area range configuration is used for Area Border Routers (ABRs) and only router-LSAs(Type-0x2001) and network-LSAs (Type-0x2002) can be summarized. The AS-external-LSAs(Type-0x4005) cannot be summarized because the scope is OSPF6 autonomous system (AS). The AS-external-LSAs(Type-0x4007) cannot be summarized because the feature is not supported yet

OSPF6 Area Range Configuration

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID.
Network Address	IPv6 network address.
Mask Length	IPv6 network mask length.
Advertised	When the value is true, it summarizes intra area paths from the address range in one Inter-Area Prefix LSA(Type-0x2003) and advertised to other areas.Otherwise, the intra area paths from the address range are not advertised to

	other areas.	Buttons
• Auto/Specific	When 'Auto' is selected, the cost value is set to 0 automatically and isn't allowed to be configured.	Add New Entry
• Cost	User specified cost (or metric) for this summary route. It is allowed to be configured only when 'Specific' is selected. The allowed range is 0 to 16777215 and the default setting is 'auto cost' mode.	Click to add new

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.8.5 Interfaces Configuration

This is interface configuration parameter table.

OSPF6 Interface Configuration

Interface	Priority	Passive Interface	Cost			Interval
						Hello	Dead	Retransmit
*	1	□	<>	√	1	10	40	5
VLAN 1	1	□	Auto	√	1	10	40	5

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification.
• Priority	User specified router priority for the interface. The allowed range is 0 to 255 and the default value is 1.
• Passive Interface	Indicates whether the interface is passive or not
• Cost	User specified cost for this interface. It's link state metric for the interface. The field is significant only when 'IsSpecificCost' is TRUE. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default setting is 'auto cost' mode.
• Hello Interval	How many Hello packets will be sent per second. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 10 (seconds).
• Dead Interval	The time interval (in seconds) between hello packets. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 40 (seconds).
• Retransmit Interval	The time interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisement(LSA) retransmissions for adjacencies. The allowed range is 3 to 65535 and the default value is 5 (seconds).

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.8.6 Global Status

This is OSPF6 router status table. It is used to provide the OSPF6 router status information.

OSPF6 Global Status

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Router ID	OSPF6 router ID.
• SPF Delay	Delay time (in seconds) of SPF calculations.
• SPF Hold Time	Minimum hold time (in milliseconds) between consecutive SPF calculations.
• SPF Max. Wait Time	Maximum wait time (in milliseconds) between consecutive SPF calculations
• Last Executed SPF Time Stamp	Time (in milliseconds) that has passed between the start of the SPF algorithm execution and the current time.
• Attached Area Count	Number of areas attached for the router.

Buttons

Clear all statistics

: Click to reset the current OSPF6 process.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds. Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.8.7 Area Status

This is OSPF6 network area status table. It is used to provide the OSPF6 network area status information.

OSPF6 Area Status

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Area ID	Backbone	Area Type	Active Interfaces	SPF Executed Times	LSA Count
No entry exists

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The Area ID.
• Backbone	Indicate if it's backbone area or not.
• Area Type	The area type.
• Active Interfaces	Number of active interfaces attached in the area.
• SPF Executed Times	Number of times SPF algorithm has been executed for the particular area.
• LSA Count	Number of the total LSAs for the particular area.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds. Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.8.8 Neighbor Status

This is OSPF6 IPv6 neighbor status table. It is used to provide the OSPF6 neighbor status information.

OSPF6 Neighbor Status

Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh
Neighbor ID	Priority	State	Dead Time	Interface Address	Interface
No entry exists

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Neighbor ID	The Neighbor ID.
• Priority	The priority of OSPF6 neighbor. It indicates the priority of the neighbor router. This item is used when selecting the DR for the network. The router with the highest priority becomes the DR.
• State	The state of OSPF6 neighbor. It indicates the functional state of the neighbor router.
• Dead Time	Dead timer. It indicates the amount of time remaining that the router waits to receive an OSPF6 hello packet from the neighbor before declaring the neighbor down.
• Interface Address	The IP address.
• Interface	The network interface.
• efault	To set the switch port to use the default VL

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds. Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.8.9 Interface Status

This is OSPF6 interface status table. It is used to provide the OSPF6 interface status information.

OSPF6 Interface Status

Interface

Interface Address

Area ID

Router ID

State

DR

BDR

Pri

Cost

Interval Configuration(sec)

Passive

Transmit Delay

ID

ID

Hello

Dead

Retransmit

No entry exists

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification.
• Interface Address	IPv6 network address.
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID.
• Router ID	The OSPF6 router ID.
• State	The state of the link.
• DR ID	The router ID of DR.
• BDR ID	The router ID of BDR.
• Priority	The OSPF6 priority. It helps determine the DR and BDR on the network to which this interface is connected.
• Cost	The cost of the interface.
• Hello	Hello timer. A time interval that a router sends an OSPF6 hello packet.
• Dead	Dead timer. Dead timer is a time interval to wait before declaring a neighbor dead. The unit of time is the second.
• Retransmit	Retransmit timer. A time interval to wait before retransmitting a database description packet when it has not been acknowledged.
Passive	Indicate if the interface is passive interface.
Transmit Delay	The estimated time to transmit a link-state update packet on the interface.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.8.10 Routing Status

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from ID" input field allow the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF6 Routing Status

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Route Type	The OSPF6 route type.Intra Area: The destination is an OSPF6 route which is located on intra-area.Inter Area: The destination is an OSPF6 route which is located on inter-area%.Border Router: The destination is a border router.External Type-1: The destination is an external Type-1 route.External Type-2: The destination is an external Type-2 route.
• Destination	Network and prefix (example 10.0.0.0/16) of the given route entry.
• Area	It indicates which area the route or router can be reached via/to.
• NextHop	An lpv6 address represented as human readable test as specified in RFC5952
• Cost	The cost of the route.
• AS Cost	The cost of the route within the OSPF6 network. It is valid for external Type-2 route and always '0' for other route type.
• Border Router Type	The border router type of the OSPF6 route entry.i-ABR: The border router is an ABR.i-ASBR: The border router is an ASBR located on Intra-area.I-ASBR: The border router is an ASBR located on Inter-area.i-ABR/ASBR: The border router is an ASBR attached to at least 2 areas.
• Interface	The interface where the ip packet is outgoing.
• IsConnected	The destination is connected directly or not.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.9 OSPFv3 Database

4.4.9.1 General Database

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF6 Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID of the link state advertisement. It is not required for external LSA.
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF6 link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.10 Detail Database

4.4.10.1 Router

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF6 Router Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF6 link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF6 option field which is present in OSPF6 hello packets, which enables OSPF6 routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF6 routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• Router Link Count	The link count of the LSA. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Router Link State' (Type 1).

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.10.2 Network

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF6 Network Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF6 link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF6 option field which is present in OSPF6 hello packets, which enables OSPF6 routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF6 routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.10.3 Link

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF6 Link Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF6 link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF6 option field which is present in OSPF6 hello packets, which enables OSPF6 routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF6 routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• Number of Links	The count of the LSA.

Buttons

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.10.4 InterArea Prefix

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPF6 InterArea Prefix Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF6 link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF6 option field which is present in OSPF6 hello packets, which enables OSPF6 routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF6 routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• Prefix	IPv6 network address.
• Prefix Length	IPv6 network mask length.
• Metric	User specified metric for this summary route. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Inter_Area Prefix/Router Link State' (Type 3, 4).

Buttons

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.10.5 InterArea Router

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

OSPP6 InterArea Router Link State Database

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Area ID	The OSPF6 area ID of the link state advertisement
• Link State Type	The type of the link state advertisement.
• Link State ID	The OSPF6 link state ID. It identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the LSA.
• Advertising Router	The advertising router ID which originated the LSA.
• Age	The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
• Options	The OSPF6 option field which is present in OSPF6 hello packets, which enables OSPF6 routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to communicate their capability level to other OSPF6 routers.
• Sequence	The LS sequence number of the LSA.
• Checksum	The checksum of the LSA contents.
• Length	The Length in bytes of the LSA.
• Metric	User specified metric for this summary route. The field is significant only when the link state type is 'Summary/ASBR Summary Link State' (Type 3, 4).
• Default	To set the switch port to use the default VL

Buttons

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is

4.4.11 RIP

4.4.11.1 Global Configuration

This is RIP router configuration table. It is a general group to configure the RIP common router parameters.

RIP Global Configuration

RIP Router Mode			Disable
Version			Default
Timers	Update		30
	Invalid		180
	Garbage-Collection		120
Redistribute	Static	Mode	Disable
		Metric Value	Auto Specific 1
	Connected	Mode	Disable
		Metric Value	Auto Specific 1
	OSPF	Mode	Disable
		Metric Value	Auto Specific 1
	Default Metric Value		1
	Default Route		Disable
Default Passive Mode			Disable
Administrative Distance			120

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• RIP Router Mode	Enable/Disable the RIP router mode. Enable: Enable the the RIP router mode. Disable: Disable the the RIP router mode.
• Vesion	RIP version support. Default: Base on the default version process. The router sends RIPv2 and accepts both RIPv1 and RIPv2. When the router receives either version of REQUESTS or triggered updates packets, it replies with the appropriate version. Version 1: Receive/Send RIPv1 only. Version 2: Receive/Send RIPv2 only.
• Update Timer	The timer interval (in seconds) between the router sends the complete routing table to all neighboring RIP routers. The allowed range is 5 to 2147483.
• Invalid Timer	The invalid timer is the number of seconds after which a route will be marked invalid. The allowed range is 5 to 2147483.
Garbage Collection Timer	The garbage collection timer is the number of seconds after which a route will be deleted.The allowed range is 5 to 2147483.
Static Redistribute Mode	Indicate if the router redistribute the static routes intothe RIP domain or not.Enable: Enable static routes redistribution.Disable: Enable static routes redistribution.
Static Redistribute Metric Value	User specified metric value for the static routes. The field is significant only when the argument 'StaticRedistIsSpecificMetric' is TRUE. If the specific metric setting is removed while the static redistributed mode is enabled, the router will updates the original static redistributed routes with metric value 16 before updates to the new metric valueThe allowed range is 1 to 16.Auto: The redistributed metric value is refer to redistributed default metric value.Specific: User specified metric for the static routes.
Connected Redistribute Mode	Indicate if the router redistribute the directly connected routes with RIP not enabled into the RIP domain or not.Enable: Enable connected routes redistribution.Disable: Enable connected routes redistribution.
Connected Redistribute Metric Value	User specified metric value for the connected interfaces. The field is significant only when the argument 'ConnectedRedistIsSpecificMetric' is TRUE. If the specific metric setting is removed while the connected redistributed mode is enabled, the router will updates the original connected redistributed routes with metric value 16 before updates to the new metric value.The allowed range is 1 to 16.Auto: The redistributed metric value is refer to redistributed default metric value.Specific: User specified metric for the connected routes.
OSPF Redistribute Mode	Indicate if the router redistribute the OSPF routes into the RIP domain or not. The field is significant only when the OSPF protocol is supported on the device.Enable: Enable OSPF routes redistribution.Disable: Enable OSPF routes redistribution.
OSPF Redistribute Metric Value	User specified metric value for the RIP routes. The field is significant only when the OSPF protocol is supported on the device and argument'OspfRedistIsSpecificMetric' is TRUE. If the specific metric setting is removed while the OSPF redistributed mode is enabled, the router will updates the original OSPF redistributed routes with metric value 16 before updates to the new metric valueThe allowed range is 1 to 16.Auto: The redistributed metric value is refer to redistributed default metric value.Specific: User specified metric for the OSPF routes.
Redistribute Default Metric Value	The RIP default redistributed metric.It is used when the metric value isn't specified for the redistributed protocol type.The allowed range is 1 to 16.
• Redistribute Default Route	The RIP default route redistribution.
• Default Passive Mode	Configure all interfaces as passive-interface by default.
• Administrative Distance	The RIP administrative distance.The allowed range is 1 to 255.

Buttons

Clear RIP Process

Click to reset the current RIP process.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.11.2 Network Configuration

RIP Network Configuration Help

RIP Network Configuration

Delete	Network Address	Mask Length
No entry exists

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Network Address	IPv4 network address.
Mask Length	IPv4 network mask length.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.11.3 Neighbors Configuration

This is RIP neighbor connection table. It is used to configure the RIP router to send RIP updates to specific neighbors using the unicast, broadcast, or network IP address after update timer expiration. The maximum number of the RIP neighbor entries is 128.

RIP Neighbor Configuration

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Neighbor Address	lpv4 address encoded as "a.b.c.d", where a-d is a base-10 human readable integer in the range [0-255]The neighbor address can be an unicast(excluding loopback), broadcast, or network IP address.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.11.4 Passive Interface Configuration

This is RIP router interface configuration table.

RIP Passive Interface Configuration

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification.
• Passive Interface	Enable the interface as RIP passive-interface.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.11.5 Offset-list Configuration

This is RIP offset-list configuration table. The maximum number of the RIP offset-list entries is 130.

RIP Offset-List Configuration

Delete	VLAN ID	Direction	Access List Name	Offset Metric
	*	*	*	*
No entry exists

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID	The VLAN interface which the offset list applies to. The range of VLAN ID is from 0 to 4095. 0 means that the offset list applies to all interfaces.
Direction	The direction to add the offset to routing metric update.In: Apply to the inbound direction.Out: Apply to the outbound direction.
Access List Name	Access-list name. The valid name string length is from 1 to 31 and allows all printable characters excluding space character.
Offset Metric	The offset to incoming or outgoing routing metric. The allowed range is 0 to 16.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.11.6 Global Status

This indicates the global rip version. By default, the router sends RIPv2 and accepts both RIPv1 and RIPv2. When the router receive either version of REQUESTS or triggered updates packets, it replies with the appropriate version. Be aware that the RIP network class configuration when RIPv1 is involved in the topology. RIPv1 uses classful routing, the subnet information is not included in the routing updates. The limitation makes it impossible to have different-sized subnets inside of the same network class. In other words, all subnets in a network class must have the same size..

RIP Global Status

Clear RIP Process

Auto-refresh □

Refresh

Status Information RIP Router Mode Disabled

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Update Timer	The timer interval (in seconds) between the router sends the complete routing table to all neighboring RIP routers
Invalid Timer	The invalid timer is the number of seconds after which a route will be marked invalid.
Garbage-Collection Timer	The garbage collection timer is the number of seconds after which a route will be deleted.
Next Update Time	Specifies when the next round of updates will be sent out from this router in seconds.
Redistribute Default Metric	This indicates the default metric value of redistributed routes.
Redistribute Connected	This indicates the connected route is redistributed or not.
Redistribute Static	This indicates the static route is redistributed or not.
Redistribute OSPF	This indicates the OSPF route is redistributed or not.
Administrative Distance	This indicates administrative distance value

Buttons

Clear RIP Process

Click to reset the current RIP process.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.11.7 Interface Status

The RIP interface status information table.

RIP Interface Status
Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Interface	Send Version	Receive Version	Triggered Update	Passive	Auth. Type	Key-Chain Name
No entry exists

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Interface	Interface identification.
• Send Version	The RIP version for the advertisement transmission on the interface.
• Receive Version	The RIP version for the advertisement reception on the interface.
• Triggered Update	This indicates the interface enable triggered update or not.
• Passive	This indicates if the passive-interface is active on the interface or not.
• Key-Chain Name	This indicates the interface is associate with a specific key-chain name.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.4.11.8 Peer Information

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

RIP Peer Information

Start from Address 0.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page.

0 - 0 of 0 entry Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< << >> >>|

Gateway	Last Update Time	Version	Received Bad Packets	Received Bad Routes
No entry exists

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Gateway	Peer IPv4 address.
• Version	The RIP version number in the header of the last RIP packet received from the neighbor.
• Last Update Time	The time duration in seconds from the time the last RIP packet received from the neighbor to now.
• Received Bad Packets	The number of RIP response packets from the neighbor discarded as invalid.
• Received Bad Routes	The number of routes from the neighbor that were ignored because they were invalid.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic re\\fresh occurs

every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table

is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.11.9 Database

Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

The "Start from entry keys" input field allows the user to change the starting point in this table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next entry match.

In addition, these input fields will upon a button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.

RIP Database Information

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Type	The protocol type of the route.
• Sub-Type	The protocol sub-type of the route.
• Network	The destination IP address and mask of the route.
• Next Hop	The first gateway along the route to the destination.
• Metric	The metric of the route
• From	This indicates the route is learned an IP address or generated from one of the local interfaces
• External Metric	The field is significant only when the route is redistributed from other protocol type, for example, OSPF. This indicates the metric value from the original redistributed source.
• Tag	The tag of the route. It is used to provide a method of separating 'internal' RIP routes, which may have been imported from an EGP (Exterior gateway protocol)or another IGP (Interior gateway protocol). For example, routes imported from OSPF can have a route tag value which the other routing protocols can use to prevent advertising the same route back to the original protocol routing domain.
• Uptime	The time field is significant only when the route is learned from the neighbors. When the route destination is reachable (its metric value less than 16), the time field means the invalid time of the route. When the route destination is unreachable (its metric value great than 16), the time field means the garbage-collection time of the route.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic re\fresh occurs

every 3 seconds.

Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the entry prior to the first entry currently displayed. If the first entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, starting from the entry next to the last entry currently displayed. If the last entry of the table is displayed, the button is disabled.

Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.

4.4.12 Router

4.4.12.1 Key-Chain

This is router key chain name table. The maximum number of the router key-chain name entries is 64.

Router Key-Chain Configuration

Delete	Key Chain Name	Key ID
	*	*
No entry exists

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Key Chain Name	The name of the key-chain entry. The valid name string length is from 1 to 31 and allows all printable characters excluding space character.
Key ID	Click the icon to edit the key

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.12.2 Key-Chain Key ID

This is router key chain key ID configuration table.

Router Key-Chain Key IDs Configuration

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Key Chain Name	The name of the key-chain entry. The valid name string length is from 1 to 31 and allows all printable characters excluding space character.
Key ID	The key chain key ID. The valid range is from 1 to 255.
Change Key String	The key string. It is used to change the key string (fill with plain text). The valid string length is from 1 to 63.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4.12.3 Access-list

This is router access-list configuration table. The maximum number of the router access-list entries is 130.

Router Access-List Configuration

Delete	Name	Mode	Network Address	Mask Length
*	*	*	*	*
No entry exists

Add New Entry

Save Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Name	The name of the key-chain entry. The valid name string length is from 1 to 31 and allows all printable characters excluding space character.
Mode	The access right mode of the access-list entry. Permit: Permit the access right. Deny: Deny the access right.
Network Address	The IPv4 address of the access-list entry.
Mask Length	The network prefix size of the access-list entry.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add new entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5 QoS

4.5.1 General

Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic. QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic, such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific, time critical, and file-backup traffic.

QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic. You can use QoS on your system to:

• Control a wide variety of network traffic by:

• Classifying traffic based on packet attributes.

- Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, to set higher priorities to time-critical or business-critical applications).

- Applying security policy through traffic filtering.

- Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter.

- Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows.

- Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network.

- Manage network congestion.

QoS Terminology

- Classifier—classifies the traffic on the network. Traffic classifications are determined by protocol, application, source, destination, and so on. You can create and modify classifications. The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level.

- DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) — is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and/or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network.

- Service Level—defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic. You can create and modify service levels.

- Policy—comprises a set of "rules" that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business. That is, traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type.

- QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules (classifier plus service level combinations). The QoS profile is assigned to a port(s).

- Rules—comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic. Rules are associated with a QoS Profile (see above).

To implement QoS on your network, you need to carry out the following actions:

1. Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic.
2. Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch.
3. Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier.
4. Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).

4.5.1.1 Port Classification

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Classification settings for all switch ports. The Port classification screen in

Figure 4-5-1-1 appears.

Port	Ingress									Egress
	CoS	DPL	PCP	DEI	CoS ID	Tag Class.	DSCP Based	WRED Group	Map	Map
*	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	☐	✓
1	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
2	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
3	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
4	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
5	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
6	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
7	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼
8	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	0▼	Disabled	☐	1▼

Figure 4-5-1-1: QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• CoS	Controls the defaultCoSvalue.All frames are classified to a CoS. There is a one to one mapping between CoS,queue and priority. A CoS of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry.Note:If the default CoS has been dynamically changed, then the actual default CoS is shown in parentheses after the configured default CoS.
• DPL	Controls the defaultDPLvalue.All frames are classified to a Drop Precedence Level.The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry.
• PCP	Controls the defaultPCPvalue.All frames are classified to a PCP value.If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the PCP value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default PCP value.
• DEI	Controls the defaultDEIvalue.All frames are classified to a DEI value.If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DEI value.
• CoS ID	Controls the defaultCoSIDvalue.Every incoming frame is classified to a CoS ID, which later can be used as basis for rewriting of different parts of the frame.
• Tag Class.	Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.Disabled: Use defaultCoSandDPlfor tagged frames.Enabled: Use mapped versions ofPCPandDEIfor tagged frames.Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and/or mapping.Note: This setting has no effect if the port is VLAN unaware. Tagged frames received on VLAN unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS and DPL.
• DSCP Based	Click to EnableDSCPBased QoS Ingress Port Classification.
• WRED Group	Controls theWREDgroup membership.
• Ingress Map	Controls theIngress Mapselection through the Map ID. The Ingress Map ID ranges from0to255.An empty field indicates no map selection.
• Egress Map	Controls theEgress Mapselection through the Map ID. The Egress Map ID ranges from0to511.An empty field indicates no map selection

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.1.2 Queue Policing

This page allows you to configure the Queue Policer settings for all switch ports.. The Queue Policing screen in Figure 4-5-1-2 appears.

QoS Ingress Queue Policers

Port	Queue 0	Queue 1	Queue 2	Queue 3	Queue 4	Queue 5	Queue 6	Queue 7
	Enable	Enable	Enable	Enable	Enable	Enable	Enable	Enable
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Apply Reset

Figure 4-5-1-2 : QoS Ingress Port Classification Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Enable (E)	Enable or disable the queue policer for this switch port.
• Rate	Controls the rate for the queue policer. This value is restricted to 25-13128147 when "Unit" is kbps, and 1-13128 when "Unit" is Mbps. The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest value supported by the queue policer.This field is only shown if at least one of the queue policers are enabled.
• Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the queue policer rate as kbps or Mbps.This field is only shown if at least one of the queue policers are enabled.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.1.3 Port Tag Remarking

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports. The Port tag remarking screen in Figure 4-5-1-3 appears.

Figure 4-5-1-3: Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	he logical port for the settings contained in the same row.Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking
• Mode	Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.Mapped: Use mapped versions of CoS and DPL.

4.5.1.4 WERD

This page allows you to configure the Random Early Detection (RED) settings.. The Port Shaper screen in Figure 4-5-1-4 appears.

Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration

Group	Queue	DPL	Enable	Min	Max	Max Unit
1	0	1		0	0	Drop Probability ▼
1	0	2		0	0	Drop Probability ▼
1	0	3		46	112	Drop Probability ▼
1	1	1		226	197	Drop Probability ▼
1	1	2		0	0	Drop Probability ▼
1	1	3		0	0	Drop Probability ▼
1	2	1		0	0	Drop Probability ▼
1	2	2		0	0	Drop Probability ▼
1	2	3		145	255	Drop Probability ▼
1	3	1		223	197	Drop Probability ▼
1	3	2		0	0	Drop Probability ▼

Figure 4-5-1-4: QoS Egress Port Shapers Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Group	The WRED group number for which the configuration below applies.
• Queue	The queue number (CoS) for which the configuration below applies.
• DPL	The Drop Precedence Level for which the configuration below applies.
• Enable	Controls whether RED is enabled for this entry.
• Min	Controls the lower RED fill level threshold. If the queue filling level is below this threshold, the drop probability is zero. This value is restricted to 0-100%.
• Max	Controls the upper RED drop probability or fill level threshold for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level > 0 (yellow frames). This value is restricted to 1-100%.
• Max Unit	Selects the unit for Max. Possible values are:Drop Probability: Max controls the drop probability just below 100% fill level.Fill Level: Max controls the fill level where drop probability reaches 100%..

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.1.5 Statistics

This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports. The statistic screen in Figure 4-5-1-5 appears.

Queuing Counters

Port	Q0		Q1		Q2		Q3		Q4		Q5		Q6		Q7
	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx
12	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
12	26828	6284130	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	2244
34	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
45	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
56	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
67	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0

Figure 4-5-1-5: QoS statistics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Qn	There are 8 QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.
• Rx/Tx	The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

:Clears the counters for all ports

4.5.2 Bandwidth Control

4.5.2.1 Port Policing

This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports. The Port Policing screen in Figure 4-5-2-1 appears.

Figure 4-5-2-1: QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Enable	Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.
• Rate	Controls the rate for the policer. This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps" or "fps", and it is restricted to 1-3300 when the "Unit" is "Mbps" or "kfps".The default value is 500.
• Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate askbps, Mbps, fps or kfps.The default value is "kbps".
• Flow Control	If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.2.2 Port Scheduler

The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this page. The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper screen in Figure 4-5-2-2 appears.

Port	Mode	Weight
		Q0	Q1	Q2	Q3	Q4	Q5	Q6	Q7
1	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
2	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
3	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
4	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
5	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
6	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
7	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
8	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-

graph LR
    A["Queue Shaper"] --> B["Enable Rate Unit Excess"]
    C["Port 1"] --> D["500 kbps"]
    E["Q0"] --> F["S"]
    G["Q1"] --> H["S"]
    I["Q2"] --> J["S"]
    K["Q3"] --> L["S"]
    M["Q4"] --> N["S"]
    O["Q5"] --> P["S"]
    Q["Q6"] --> R["S"]
    S["Q7"] --> T["S"]
    U["STRICT"] --> V["S"]
    W["500 kbps"] --> X["Apply Reset Cancel"]

Figure 4-5-2-2: QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Schedule Mode	Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this switch port.
Queue Shaper Enable	Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.
Queue Shaper Rate	Controls the rate for the queue shaper.This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".The default value is 500.
Queue Shaper Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".The default value is "kbps".
Queue Shaper Excess	Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.
Queue Scheduler Weight	Controls the weight for this queue.This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".The default value is "17".
Queue Scheduler Percent	Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".
• Port Shaper Enable	Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.
• Port Shaper Rate	Controls the rate for the port shaper.This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".The default value is 500.
• Port Shaper Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".The default value is "kbps".

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel

: Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

4.5.2.3 Port Shaping

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports.. The Port shaping screen in Figure 4-5-2-3 appears.

QoS Egress Port Shapers

Port	Shapers
	Q0	Q1	Q2	Q3	Q4	Q5	Q6	Q7	Port
1/2	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
3/4	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
5/6	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
7/8	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-

graph LR
    A["Queue Shaper"] --> B["Enable Rate Unit Excess"]
    C["Port 1"] --> D["500 kbps"]
    E["Q0"] --> F["S"]
    G["Q1"] --> H["S"]
    I["Q2"] --> J["S"]
    K["Q3"] --> L["S"]
    M["Q4"] --> N["S"]
    O["Q5"] --> P["S"]
    Q["Q6"] --> R["S"]
    S["Q7"] --> T["S"]
    U["STRICT"] --> V["S"]
    W["500 kbps"] --> X["Apply Reset Cancel"]

Figure 4-5-2-3: QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Schedule Mode	Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this switch port.
Queue Shaper Enable	Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.
Queue Shaper Rate	Controls the rate for the queue shaper.This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".The default value is 500.
Queue Shaper Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".The default value is "kbps".
Queue Shaper Excess	Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.
Queue Scheduler Weight	Controls the weight for this queue.This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".The default value is "17".
Queue Scheduler Percent	Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".
• Port Shaper Enable	Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.
• Port Shaper Rate	Controls the rate for the port shaper.This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".The default value is 500.
• Port Shaper Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".The default value is "kbps".

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

4.5.3 Storm Control

4.5.3.1 Storm Policing

Global storm policers for the switch are configured on this page.

There is a unicast storm policer, multicast storm policer, and a broadcast storm policer.

These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present in the MAC Address table.

The displayed settings are:

Global Storm Policer Configuration

Frame Type	Enable	Rate	Unit
Unicast		10	fps
Multicast		10	fps
Broadcast		10	fps

Apply Reset

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Frame Type	The frame type for which the configuration below applies.

or the given frame type.

• Rate	Controls the rate for the global storm policer. This value is restricted to 10-13128147 when "Unit" is fps or kbps, and 1-13128 when "Unit" is kfps or Mbps. The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest value supported by the global storm policer. Supported rates are divisible by 10 fps or 25 kbps.
• Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the global storm policer rate as fps, kfps, kbps or Mbps.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.4 Differentiated Service

4.5.4.1 Port DSCP

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports. The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4-5-4-1 appears.

Figure 4-5-4-1: QoS Port DSCP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings.
• Ingress	In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports.There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:■Translate■Classify
• Translate	To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox.
• Classify	Classification for a port have 4 different values.■Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.■DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.■Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP.■All: Classify all DSCP.
• Egress	Port Egress Rewriting can be one of -■Disable: No Egress rewrite.■Enable: Rewrite enable without remapped.■Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value. The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table.■Remap DP Aware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value. Depending on the DP level of the frame, the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table or from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP1' table.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.4.2 DSCP-based QoS

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP-based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches. The DSCP-based QoS screen in Figure 4-5-4-2 appears.

DSCP-Based QoS Ingress Classification

DSCP	Trust	QoS Class	DPL
*	□	<All>✓	<All>✓
0 (BE)	□	0✓	0✓
1	□	0✓	0✓
2	□	0✓	0✓
3	□	0✓	0✓
4	□	0✓	0✓
5	□	0✓	0✓
6	□	0✓	0✓
7	□	0✓	0✓
8 (CS1)	□	0✓	0✓
9	□	0✓	0✓
			0✓

Figure 4-5-4-2: DSCP-based QoS Ingress Classification Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• DSCP	Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64.
• Trust	Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted DSCP values are mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level. Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as a non-IP frame.
• QoS Class	QoS Class value can be any of (0-7)
• DPL	Drop Precedence Level (0-1)

4.5.4.3 DSCP Translation

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches. DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress. The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4-4-4-3 appears.

DSCP	Ingress			Egress
	Translate		Classify	Remap
*
0 (BE)	0 (BE)			0 (BE)
1	1			1
2	2			2
3	3			3
4	4			4
5	5			5
6	6			6
7	7			7
8 (CS1)	8 (CS1)			8 (CS1)
9	9			9

Figure 4-5-4-3: DSCP Translation Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• DSCP	Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
• Ingress	Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map.There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation –■ Translate■ Classify
• Translate	DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.
• Classify	Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.
• Egress	There is following configurable parameter for Egress side -■ Remap
• Remap DP	Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.4.4 DSCP Classification

This page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value. The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4-5-4-4 appears.

Figure 4-5-4-4: DSCP Classification Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• QoS Class	Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7. QoS Class (0-7) can be mapped to followed parameters.
• DPL	Actual Drop Precedence Level.
• DSCP	Select DSCP value (0-63) from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.5 QCL

4.5.5.1 QoS Control List

This page shows the QoS Control List(QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row describes a QCE that is defined. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch.

Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list.

QoS Control List Configuration

QCE

Port

DMAC

SMAC

Tag Type

VID

PCP

DEI

Frame Type

Action

CoS

DPL

DSCP

PCP

DEI

Policy

Ingress Map

④

Figure 4-5-5-1: QoS Control List Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• QCE	Indicates the index of QCE.
• Port	Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
• DMAC	Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame. Possible values are:■ Any: All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed.■ Unicast: Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed.■ Multicast: Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed.■ Broadcast: Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed.The default value is 'Any'.
• SMAC	Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address, i.e. first three octet (byte) of MAC address.
• Tag Type	Indicates tag type. Possible values are:■ Any: Match tagged and untagged frames.■ Untagged: Match untagged frames.■ Tagged: Match tagged frames.The default value is 'Any'
• VID	Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'
• PCP	Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.
• DEI	Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0, 1 or 'Any'.
• Frame Type	Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:■ Any: The QCE will match all frame type.■ Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.■ LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.■ SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.■ IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.■ IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
• Action	Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame's content.There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.■ Class: Classified QoS class.■ DPL: Classified Drop Precedence Level.■ DSCP: Classified DSCP value.
• Modification Buttons	You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons:+: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.⊕: Edits the QCE.↑: Moves the QCE up the list.↓: Moves the QCE down the list.✕: Deletes the QCE.⊕: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL.

4.5.5.2 QCL Status

This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4-5-5-2 appears.

QoS Control List Status

User	QCE	Port	Frame Type	Action							Conflict
				CoS	DPL	DSCP	PCP	DEI	Policy	Ingress Map
No entries

Figure 4-5-5-2: QoS Control List Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• User	Indicates the QCL user.
• QCE#	Indicates the index of QCE.
• Port	Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
• Frame Type	Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:■ Any: The QCE will match all frame types.■ Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.■ LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.■ SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.■ IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.■ IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
• Action	Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame's content.There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.■ Class: Classified QoS class; if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue.■ DPL: Drop Precedence Level; if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column.■ DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column.
• Conflict	Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. As H/W resources are shared by multiple applications. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available, in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No'.Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H/W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing 'Resolve Conflict' button.

Buttons

Combined

: Select the QCL status from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Resolve Conflict

: Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry, in case the conflict status for any QCL entry

is 'yes'.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page.

4.5.6 Voice VLAN

4.5.6.1 Voice VLAN Configuration

The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port - one for voice, one for data.

Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-5-6-1 appears.

Figure 4-5-6-1: Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.■Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.
• VLAN ID	Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID. It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID, MVR VID, PVID etc.The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
• Aging Time	Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time. The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds. It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled.In other cases, it will based hardware age time.The actual age time will be situated in the [age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.
• Traffic Class	Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class.
• Mode	Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode.Possible port modes are:■Disabled: Disjoin from Voice VLAN.■Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.■Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
• Port Security	Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all non-telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds. Possible port modes are:■Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.■Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
• Port Discovery Protocol	Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to "LLDP" or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart auto detect process. Possible discovery protocols are:■OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.■LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.■Both: Both OUI and LLDP.

4.5.6.2 Voice VLAN OUI

Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process. The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4-5-6-2 appears.

Figure 4-5-6-2: Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Telephony OUI	An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
Description	The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to.The allowed string length is 0 to 32.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new access management entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6 Security

4.6.1 Access Security

4.6.1.1 Access Management

Configure access management table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. If the application's type match any one of the access management entries, it will allow access to the switch. The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-1-1 appears.

Figure 4-6-1-1: Access Management Configuration Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable access management mode operation level. Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next apply .
• VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry.
• Start IP address	Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.
• End IP address	Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.
• HTTP/HTTPS	Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry.
• SNMP	Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry.
• Telnet/SSH	Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new access management entry.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.1.2 Access Management Statistics

This page provides statistics for access management. The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4-6-1-2 appears.

Access Management Statistics

Interface	Received Packets	Allowed Packets	Discarded Packets
HTTP	0	0	0
SNMP	0	0	0
TELNET	0	0	0
SSH	0	0	0

Figure 4-6-1-2: Access Management Statistics Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Interface	The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch.
• Receive Packets	The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled.
• Allow Packets	The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled.
• Discard Packets	The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

: Clears all statistics.

4.6.1.3 SSH

Configure SSH on this page. This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

The status page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status. The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-1-3 appears.

Figure 4-6-1-3: SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the SSH mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SSH mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.1.4 HTTPS

Configure HTTPS on this page. The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-1-4 appears.

Figure 4-6-1-4: HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the HTTPS mode operation. When the current connection is HTTPS, to apply HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to an HTTP connection. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable HTTPS mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation.
• Automatic Redirect	Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. It only significant if HTTPS mode "Enabled" is selected. Automatically redirects web browser to an HTTPS connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled or redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are disabled. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
• Certificate Maintain	The operation of certificate maintenance.Possible operations are:None: No operation.Delete: Delete the current certificate.Upload: Upload a certificate PEM file. Possible methods are: Web Browser or URL.Generate: Generate a new self-signed RSA certificate.
• Certificate Pass Phrase	Enter the pass phrase in this field if your uploading certificate is protected by a specific passphrase.
• Certificate Upload	Upload a certificate PEM file into the switch. The file should contain the certificate and private key together. If you have two separated files for saving certificate and private key. Use the Linux cat command to combine them into a single PEM file.For example, cat my.cert my.key >my.pemNotice that the RSA certificate is recommended since most of the new version of browsers has removed support for DSA in certificate, e.g. Firefox v37 and Chrome v39.Possible methods are:Web Browser: Upload a certificate via Web browser.URL: Upload a certificate via URL, the supported protocols areHTTP, HTTPS, TFTP and FTP. The URL format is://[::@]::[]//. For example,tftp://10.10.10.10/new_image_path/new_image.dat,http://username:password@10.10.10.10:80/new_image_path/new_image.dat. A valid file name is a text string drawn from alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), hyphen (-), under score( ). The maximum length is 63 and hyphen must not be first character. The file name content that only contains '.' is not allowed.
• Certificate Status	Display the current status of certificate on the switch.Possible statuses are:Switch secure HTTP certificate is presented.Switch secure HTTP certificate is not presented.Switch secure HTTP certificate is generating ...

Buttons

Save

: Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.

4.6.2 AAA

This section is to control the access to the Managed Switch, including the user access and management control.

The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics:

■ User Authentication
■ IEEE 802.1X Port-based Network Access Control
■ MAC-based Authentication

Overview of 802.1X (Port-Based) Authentication

In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.

Overview of MAC-based Authentication

Unlike 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using static entries into the MAC Table. Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through a 3rd party switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users, equipment whose MAC

address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone, and only the MD5-Challenge method is supported.

The 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.

Overview of User Authentication

It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods, such as telnet and Web browser. This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options:

■ Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
■ Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
■ Local user name and Privilege Level control

RADIUS and TACACS+ are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware or TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name / password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch.

Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.

Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.

This section includes this conceptual information:

• Device Roles
  • Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange
• Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

■ Device Roles

With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.

graph TD
    A["Authentication server (RADIUS Server)"] --> C["Router"]
    B["Authentication server (TACACS+ Server)"] --> C
    C --> D["Authenticator (PLANET 802.1X aware Switch)"]
    D --> E["Supplicant (Client with 802.1X authentication)"]
    E --> F["Intranet"]
    E --> G["Intranet / Intranet"]
    H["Computer"] --> E
    I["Computer"] --> E
    J["Computer"] --> E
    K["Computer"] --> E
    L["Computer"] --> E
    M["Computer"] --> E
    N["Intranet"] --> E

Figure 4-5-2

• Client—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.)
• Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services. Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0. RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.
• Switch (802.1X device)—controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client. The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client.

■ Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange

The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.

However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity

If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated.

When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes authorized.

The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. "Figure 4-5-2" shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.

graph TD
    A["Client"] -->|EAPOL-Start| B["802.1X Switch"]
    B -->|EAP-Request/Identity| A
    B -->|EAP-Response/Identity| A
    B -->|EAP-Request/OTP| B
    B -->|EAP-Response/OTP| B
    B -->|EAP-Success| A
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Request| C["Authentication Server (RADIUS)"]
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Challenge| C
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Request| C
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Accept| C
    D["EAPOL-Logoff"] --> E["Port Unauthorized"]
    F["Port Authorized"] --> G["Port Unauthorized"]

Figure 4-5-2: EAP Message Exchange

■ Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally.

If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted access to the network.

In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state

If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails, and network access is not granted.

When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state.

If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized state.

4.6.2.1 Authentication Configuration

This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces. The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-2-1 appears.

Authentication Method Configuration

Client	Methods
console	local ▼	no ▼	no ▼
telnet	local ▼	no ▼	no ▼
ssh	local ▼	no ▼	no ▼
http	local ▼	no ▼	no ▼

Command Authorization Method Configuration

Client	Method	Cmd Lvl	Cfg Cmd
console	no ▼	0	□
telnet	no ▼	0	□
ssh	no ▼	0	□

Accounting Method Configuration

Client	Method	Cmd Lvl	Exec
console	no ▼
telnet	no ▼
ssh	no ▼

Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-2-1: Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Authentication Method Configuration

The authentication section allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces.

The table has one row for each client type and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Client	The management client for which the configuration below applies.
• Methods	Method can be set to one of the following values:no: Authentication is disabled and login is not possible.local: Use the local user database on the switch for authentication.radius: Use remote RADIUS server(s) for authentication.tacacs: Use remote TACACS+ server(s) for authentication..

Command Authorization Method Configuration

The command authorization section allows you to limit the CLI commands available to a user.

The table has one row for each client type and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Client	The management client for which the configuration below applies.
• Methods	Method can be set to one of the following values:no: Command authorization is disabled. User is granted access to CLI commands according to his privilege level.tacacs: Use remoteTACACS+server(s) for command authorization. If all remote servers are offline, the user is granted access to CLI commands according to his privilege leve
• Cmd Lvl	Authorize all commands with a privilege level higher than or equal to this level. Valid values are in the range 0 to 15.
• Cfg Cmd	Also authorize configuration commands

Accounting Method Configuration

The accounting section allows you to configure command and exec (login) accounting.

The table has one row for each client type and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
Client	The management client for which the configuration below applies.
Methods	Method can be set to one of the following values:no: Accounting is disabled.tacacs: Use remoteTACACS+server(s) for accounting.
Cmd Lvl	Enable accounting of all commands with a privilege level higher than or equal to this level.Valid values are in the range 0 to 15. Leave the field empty to disable command accounting.
Exec	Enable exec (login) accounting.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.2.2 RADIUS

This page allows you to configure the RADIUS Servers. The RADIUS Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-2-2 appears.

Figure 4-6-2-2: RADIUS Server Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Global Configuration

These setting are common for all of the RADIUS Servers.

Object Description
Timeout	Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
Retransmit	Retransmit is the number of times, in the range from 1 to 1000; a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit, it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time	The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
Key	The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the switch.
• NAS-IP-Address	The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.
• NAS-IPv6-Address	The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.
• NAS-Identifier	The identifier - up to 253 characters long - to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the NAS-Identifier is not included in the packet.

Server Configuration

The table has one row for each RADIUS Server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a RADIUS server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next Save.
Hostname	The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server.
Auth Port	The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication.
Acct Port	The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting.
Timeout	This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value.
Retransmit	This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value. Leaving it blank will use the global retransmit value.
Key	This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.

Buttons

Add New Server

Click to add a new RADIUS server. An empty row is added to the table, and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

Delete

: Click to undo the addition of the new server.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.2.3 TACACS+

This page allows you to configure the TACACS+ Servers. The TACACS+ Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-2-3 appears.

Figure 4-6-2-3: TACACS+ Server Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Global Configuration

These setting are common for all of the TACACS+ Servers.

Object Description
Timeout	Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a TACACS+ server before it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time	The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
Key	Specify to change the secret key or not. When "Yes" is selected for the option, you can change the secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and the switch.

Server Configuration

The table has one row for each TACACS+ server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a TACACS+ server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next Save.
Hostname	The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server.
Port	The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ server for authentication.
Timeout	This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value.
Key	This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.

Buttons

Add New Server

Click to ad a new TACACS+ server. An empty row is added to the table, and the

TACACS+ server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

Delete

: Click to undo the addition of the new server.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.2.4 RADIUS Overview

This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the authentication configuration page. The RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4-6-2-4 appears.

RADIUS Server Status Overview

#	IP Address	Authentication Port	Authentication Status	Accounting Port	Accounting Status
12			Disabled		Disabled
			Disabled		Disabled
34			Disabled		Disabled
			Disabled		Disabled
45			Disabled		Disabled
			Disabled		Disabled

Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh

Figure 4-6-2-4: RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview

Object Description
#	The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address	The IP address and UDP port number (in: notation) of this server.
Authentication Port	UDP port number for authentication.
Authentication Status	The current status of the server. This field takes one of the following values:Disabled: The server is disabled.Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
Accounting Port	UDP port number for accounting
Accounting Status	The current status of the server. This field takes one of the following values:Disabled: The server is disabled.Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.2.5 RADIUS Details

This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server. The RADIUS Authentication/Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4-6-2-5 appears.

RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server #1

Server #1
Receive Packets	Transmit Packets
Access Accepts 0	Access Requests	0
Access Rejects 0	Access Retransmissions	0
Access Challenges 0	Pending Requests	0
Malformed Access Responses 0	Timeouts	0
Bad Authenticators 0
Unknown Types 0
Packets Dropped 0
Other Info
IP Address	0.0.0.0:0
State	Disabled
Round-Trip Time	0 ms

RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server #1

Receive Packets		Transmit Packets
Responses	0	Requests	0
Malformed Responses	0	Retransmissions	0
Bad Authenticators	0	Pending Requests	0
Unknown Types	0	Timeouts	0
Packets Dropped	0
Other Info
IP Address			0.0.0.0:0
State			Disabled
Round-Trip Time			0 ms
Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh Clear

Figure 4-6-2-5: RADIUS Authentication/Accounting for Server Overview Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

RADIUS Authentication Statistics

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 - RADIUS Authentication Client MIB. Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Object Description
• Packet Counters	RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four transmit counters.
	Direction	Name	RFC4668 Name	Description
	Rx	Access	radiusAuthClientExtA	The number of RADIUS

	Accepts	ccessAccepts	Access-Accept packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx	Access Rejects	radiusAuthClientExtAccessRejects	The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx Access	Challenges	radiusAuthClientExtAccessChallenges	The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx Malformed	AccessResponses	radiusAuthClientExtMalformedAccessResponses	The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received from the server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.
Rx Bad	Authenticators	radiusAuthClientExtBadAuthenticators	The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server.
Rx Unknown	Types	radiusAuthClientExtUnknownTypes	The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
Rx Packets	Dropped	radiusAuthClientExtPacketsDropped	The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and

			dropped for some other reason.
	Tx AccessRequests	radiusAuthClientExtAccessRequests	The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to the server. This does not include retransmissions.
	Tx AccessRetransmissionss	radiusAuthClientExtAccessRetransmissionss	The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server.
	Tx PendingRequests	radiusAuthClientExtPendingRequests	The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when an Access-Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access-Accept, Access-Reject, Access-Challenge, timeout, or retransmission.
	Tx	Timeouts	radiusAuthClientExtTimeouts
• Other Info	This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
	Name	RFC4668 Name	Description
	IP Address	-	IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in question.

State - Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the

following values:

■ Disabled: The selected server is disabled.

■ Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.

■ Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.

■ Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

Round-Trip Time

radiusAuthClient ExtRoundTripTime

The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server. The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been round-trip communication with the server yet.

RADIUS Accounting Statistics

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 - RADIUS Accounting Client MIB. Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Object Description
• Packet Counters	RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit counters.
	Direction	Name	RFC4670 Name	Description
	Rx	Responses	radiusAccClientExt	The number of RADIUS packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
			Responses
	Rx Malformed	Responses	radiusAccClientExt	The number of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server. Malformed

User's Manual of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Managed Switches

		es packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.
Rx Bad	Authenticators	radiusAcctClientExtBadAuthenticators	The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server.
Rx	Unknown Types	radiusAccClientExtUnknownTypes	The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port.
Rx	Packets Dropped	radiusAccClientExtPacketsDropped	The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason.
Tx Requests radiusAccClientExt		Requests	The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server.This does not include retransmissions.
Tx	Retransmissions	radiusAccClientExtRetransmissions	The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server.
Tx Pending Requests		radiusAccClientExtPendingRequests	The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response, timeout, or retransmission.
Tx Timeouts radiusAccClientExt		Timeouts	The number of accounting timeouts to the server. After a timeout, the client may retry to

	the same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout.
• Other Info	This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
	Name	RFC4670 Name	Description
	IP Address	-	IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question.
	State - Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:Disabled: The selected server is disabled.Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts.Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
	Round-Trip Time	radiusAccClientExtRo undTripTime	The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server. The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been round-trip communication with the server yet.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear

Clear: Clears the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests" counter will not be cleared by this operation.

4.6.3 Port Authentication

4.6.3.1 Network Access Server Configuration

This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X and MAC-based authentication system and port settings.

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central servers, the backend servers, determine whether the user is allowed access to the network. These backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the

"Configuration→Security→AAA" Page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below.

MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port, and doesn't require the user to have special 802.1X supplicant software installed on his system. The switch uses the user's MAC address to authenticate against the backend server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses, which makes MAC-based authentication less secure than 802.1X authentication. The NAS configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide. The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-3-1 appears.

Network Access Server Configuration
System Configuration

Port Configuration

Port	Admin State	RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled	RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled	Guest VLAN Enabled	Port State	Restart
*
1	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
2	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
3	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
4	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
5	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
6	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
7	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize

Figure 4-6-3-1: Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

System Configuration

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports are allowed forwarding of frames.
• Reauthentication Enabled	If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed. It does not involve communication between the switch and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on a port.
• Reauthentication Period	Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.
• EAPOL Timeout	Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames. Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based ports.
• Aging Period	This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses:■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-Based Auth.When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time. This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802.1X-based mode, this is not so critical, since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication, which will fail. But if reauthentication is not enabled, the only way to free resources is by aging the entries.For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct communication between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whetherthe client is still attached or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry.
Hold Time	This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses:Single 802.1XMulti 802.1XMAC-Based Auth.If a client is denied access, either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout specified on the "Configuration→Security→AAA" page), the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state. The hold timer does not count during an on-going authentication.In MAC-based Auth. mode, the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time.The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled	RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature.The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports.
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled	RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature.The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled for that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports.
Guest VLAN Enabled	A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which 802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-definedtimeout. The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports.
• Guest VLAN ID	This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.Valid values are in the range [1; 4095].
• Max. Reauth. Count	The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.Valid values are in the range [1; 255].
• Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen	The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default), the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life-time of the port. If enabled (checked), the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port.The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

4.6.3.2 Network Access Overview

This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch. The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4-6-3-2 appears.

Network Access Server Switch Status

Port	Admin State	Port State	Last Source	Last ID	QoS Class	Port VLAN ID
1	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
2	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
3	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
4	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
5	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
6	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
7	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
8	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-

Figure 4-6-3-2: Network Access Server Switch Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.
• Admin State	The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values.
• Port State	The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states.
• Last Source	The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
• Last ID	The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
• QoS Class	QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.
• Port VLAN ID	The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS.If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.Read more about Guest VLANs here.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.6.3.3 Network Access Statistics

This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL-based IEEE 802.1X authentication. For MAC-based ports, it shows selected backend server (RADIUS Authentication Server) statistics, only. Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed. The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4-6-3-3 appears.

Figure 4-6-3-3: Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Port State

Object Description
• Admin State	The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values.
• Port State	The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states.
• QoS Class	The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned.
• Port VLAN ID	The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS.If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.Read more about Guest VLANs here.

Port Counters

Object Description
• EAPOL Counters	These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:■ Force Authorized■ Force Unauthorized■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X
	Direction	Name	IEEE Name	Description
	Rx	Total	dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx	The number of valid EAPOLframes of any type that havebeen received by the switch.
	Rx	Response ID	dot1xAuthEapolRespIdFramesRx	The number of valid EAPOLResponse Identity framesthat have been received bythe switch.
	Rx	Responses	dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx	The number of valid EAPOLresponse frames (other thanResponse Identity frames)that have been received bythe switch.
	Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx			The number of EAPOL Startframes that have beenreceived by the switch.
	Rx	Logoff	dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFramesRx	The number of valid EAPOLLogoff frames that havebeen received by the switch.
	Rx	Invalid Type	dot1xAuthInvalidEapolFramesRx	The number of EAPOLframes that have beenreceived by the switch inwhich the frame type is notrecognized.
	Rx	Invalid Length	dot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx	The number of EAPOLframes that have beenreceived by the switch inwhich the Packet BodyLength field is invalid.
	Tx	Total	dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx	The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch.
	Tx	Request ID	dot1xAuthEapolReqIdFramesTx	The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch.
	Tx	Requests	dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx	The number of valid EAPOL Request frames (other than Request Identity frames) that have been transmitted by the switch.
• Backend Server Counters	These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following administrative states:■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-based Auth.
	Direction	Name	IEEE Name	Description
	Rx AccessChallenges		dot1xAuthBackendAccessChallenges	802.1X-based:Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant. Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch.MAC-based:Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port (left-most table) or client (right-most table).
	Rx	Other	dot1xAuthBackendOther	802.1X-based:

User's Manual of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Managed Switches

	Requests	RequestsToSupplicant	Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant. Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP-method. MAC-based: Not applicable.
Rx Auth.	Successes	dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes	802.1X- and MAC-based: Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication. Indicates that the supplicant/client has successfully authenticated to the backend server.
Rx Auth.	Failures	dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails	802.1X- and MAC-based: Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message. This indicates that the supplicant/client has not authenticated to the backend server.
Tx	Responses	dot1xAuthBackendResp onses	802.1X-based: Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant's first response packet to the backend server. Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server. Possible retransmissions are not counted. MAC-based: Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port (left-most table) or client (right-most

User's Manual of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Managed Switches

	table). Possible retransmissions are not counted.
• Last Supplicant/Client Info	Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This information is available for the following administrative states:■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-based Auth.
	Name IEEE	Name Description
	MAC Address	dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameSource
	VLAN ID	-
	Version	dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameVersion
	Identity	-

4.6.4 Port Security

4.6.4.1 Port Limit Control

This page allows you to configure the Port Security global and per-port settings.

Port Security allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If Port Security is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this number is exceeded, an action is taken depending on violation mode. The violation mode can be one of the four different described below.

The Port Security configuration consists of two sections, a global and a per-port.. The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-4-1 appears.

Port Security Configuration

Global Configuration

Aging Enabled
Aging Period	3600	seconds
Hold Time	300	seconds

Port Configuration

Port	Mode	Limit	Violation Mode	Violation Limit	State
*		4		4
1	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
2	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
3	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
4	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
5	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
6	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
7	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled
8	Disabled▼	4	Protect▼		4 Disabled

Figure 4-6-4-1: Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

System Configuration

Object Description
• Aging Enabled	If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period.
• Aging Period	If Aging Enabled is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses, they may have other requirements to the aging period. The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality.The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario: Suppose an end-host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't for aging, the end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward. To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a timer is started once the end-host gets secured. When the timerexpires, the switch starts looking for frames from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period, the end-host is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch.
• Hold Time	The hold time - measured in seconds - is used to determine how long a MAC address is held in the MAC table if it has been found to violate the limit. Valid range is between 10 and 10000000 seconds with a default of 300 seconds.The reason for holding a violating MAC address in the MAC table is primarily to ensure that the same MAC address doesn't give rise to continuous notifications (if notifications on violation count is enabled).

Port Configuration

The table has one row for each port and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Mode	Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port.
• Limit	The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.
• Violation Mode	If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:Protect: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.Restrict: If Limit is reached, subsequent MAC addresses on the port will be counted and marked as violating. Such MAC addresses are removed from the MAC table when the hold time expires. At most Violation Limit MAC addresses can be marked as violating at any given time.Shutdown: If Limit is reached, one additional MAC address will cause the port to be shut down. This implies that all secured MAC addresses be removed from the port,and no new addresses be learned. There are three ways to re-open the port:1) In the "Configuration→Ports" page's "Configured" column, first disable the port, then restore the original mode.2) Make a Port Security configuration change on the port.3) Boot the switch.
•Violation Limit	■ The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be marked as violating on this port. This number cannot exceed 1024. Default is 4. It is only used whenViolation Modeis Restrict.
•State	This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point of view. The state takes one of four values:■Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.■Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.■Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap.Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.

4.6.4.2 Port Security Status

This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

The status page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status. The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4-6-4-2 appears.

Port Security Switch Status

User Module Legend

User Module Name	Abbr
Port Security (Admin)	P
802.1X	8
Voice VLAN	V

Port Status

Clear	Port	Users	Violation Mode	State	MAC Count
					Current	Violating	Limit
Clear	1	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	2	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	3	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	4	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	5	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	6	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	7	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	8	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-
Clear	9	---	Disabled	Disabled	-	-	-

Figure 4-6-4-2: Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

User Module Legend

The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.

Object Description
• User Module Name	The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.
• Abbr	A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in the port status table.

Port Status

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Clear	Click to remove all MAC addresses on all VLANs on this port. The button is onlyclickable if number of secured MAC addresses is non-zero.
• Port	The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.
• Users	Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is not enabled, whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter has enabled port security.
• Violation Mode	Shows the configured Violation Mode of the port. It can take one of four values:Disabled: Port Security is not administratively enabled on this port.Protect: Port Security is administratively enabled in Protect mode.Restrict: Port Security is administratively enabled in Restrict mode.Shutdown: Port Security is administratively enabled in Shutdown mode.
• State	Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:■ Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.■ Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.■ Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in.■ Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re-opened on the Limit Control configuration web page.
• MAC Count(Current, Limit)	The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding as well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port, respectively.If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column will show a dash (-).

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds. Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.4.3 Port Security Detail

This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port

security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4-6-4-3 appears.

Figure 4-6-4-3: Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MAC Address & VLAN ID	The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned, a single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.
• State	Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the blocked state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.
• Time of Addition	Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.
• Age/Hold	If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires.If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic.If the age period (measured in seconds) expires and no frames have been seen, the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table. Otherwise a new age period will begin.If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, a dash (-) will be shown.

4.6.5 Access Control Lists

ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights.

ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.

ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.

There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.

4.6.5.1 Access Control List Status

This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch. The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4-6-5-1 appears.

User	ACE	Frame Type	Action	Rate Limiter	Mirror	CPU	Counter	Conflict
No entries
Combined Auto-refresh Refresh

Figure 4-6-5-1: ACL Status Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• User	Indicates the ACL user.
• ACE	Indicates the ACE ID on local switch.
• Frame Type	Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:■ Any: The ACE will match any frame type.■ EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.■ ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.■ IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.■ IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.■ IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.■ IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.■ IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.■ IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Action	Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.■ Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.■ Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Rate Limiter	Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
CPU	Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU
Counter	The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Conflict	Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page.

4.6.5.2 Access Control List Configuration

This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch.

Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol, cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest. The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-5-2 appears.

Figure 4-6-5-2: Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ACE	Indicates the ACE ID.
• Ingress Port	Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:■ All: The ACE will match all ingress port.■ Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Policy / Bitmask	Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.
Frame Type	Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:■ Any: The ACE will match any frame type.■ EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.■ ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.■ IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.■ IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.■ IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.■ IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.■ IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.■ IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Action	Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.■ Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.■ Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.■ Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.
Rate Limiter	Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Redirect	Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number.The allowed values areDisabledor a specific port number. WhenDisabledis displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.
Mirror	pecify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored level.Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored. The default value is "Disabled".
Counter	The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Modification Buttons	You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:⊕: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.⊖: Edits the ACE row.↑: Moves the ACE up the list.↓: Moves the ACE down the list.✕: Deletes the ACE.⊕: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.

: Click to clear the counters.

: Click to remove all ACEs.

4.6.5.3 ACE Configuration

Configure an ACE (Access Control Entry) on this page. An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select. First select the ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected. A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here. The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-5-3 appears.

ACE Configuration

VLAN Parameters

Figure 4-6-5-3: ACE Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Ingress Port	Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.■ Any: The ACE applies to any port.■ Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.
• Policy Filter	Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.■ Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)■Specific:If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears.
• Policy Value	When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value. The allowed range is0to255.
• Policy Bitmask	When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask. The allowed range is0x0to0xff.
• Frame Type	Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.■Any:Any frame can match this ACE.■Ethernet Type:Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3 describes the value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal (equal to 0600 hexadecimal).■ARP:Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the ACE with Ethernet type.■IPv4:Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the ACE with Ethernet type.■IPv6:Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the ACE with Ethernet type.
• Action	Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.■Permit:The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.■Deny:The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
• Rate Limiter	Specify the rate limiter in number of base units.The allowed range is 1 to 16.Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.
• Port Redirect	Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here.The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range.Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled.
• Mirror	Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port. The rate limiter will not affect frames on the mirror port. The allowed values are:Enabled:Frames received on the port are mirrored level.Disabled:Frames received on the port are not mirrored.The default value is "Disabled"
• Logging	Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:■Enabled:Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.■Disabled:Frames matching the ACE are not logged.Note:The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.
• Shutdown	Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:■Enabled:If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.■Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without VLAN tags).
• Counter	The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

■ MAC Parameters

Object Description
• SMAC Filter	(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.■ Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.
• SMAC Value	When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.
• DMAC Filter	Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.■ Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)■ MC: Frame must be multicast.■ BC: Frame must be broadcast.■ UC: Frame must be unicast.■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.
• DMAC Value	When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value.

■ VLAN Parameters

Object Description
• 802.1Q Tagged	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed values are:Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").Enabled: Tagged frame only.Disabled: Untagged frame only.The default value is "Any".
• VLAN ID Filter	Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.■ Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)
	■ Specific : If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears.
• VLAN ID	When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value.
• Tag Priority	Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority. The allowed number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)

■ ARP Parameters

The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.

Object Description
ARP/RARP	Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.■ Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)■ ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.■ RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.■ Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
Request/Reply	Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.■ Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)■ Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.■ Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.
Sender IP Filter	Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.■ Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)■ Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears.■ Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
Sender IP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Sender IP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Filter	Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.■ Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)■ Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears.■ Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.
• Target IP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation.
• Target IP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
• ARP Sender MAC Match	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings.■ 0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.■ 1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• RARP Target MAC Match	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field (THA) settings.■ 0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address.■ 1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• IP/Ethernet Length	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.■ 0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).■ 1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• IP	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address space (HRD) settings.■ 0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).■ 1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• Ethernet	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol address space (PRO) settings.■ 0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).■ 1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

■ IP Parameters

The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.

Object Description
• IP Protocol Filter	Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.■ Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
IP Protocol Value	When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.
IP TTL	Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry.Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Fragment	Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry.Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Option	Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
SIP Filter	Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears.Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
SIP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation.
• SIP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
• DIP Filter	Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.■ Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)■ Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears.■ Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.
• DIP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation.
• DIP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.

■ IPv6 Parameters

Object Description
• Next Header Filter	Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE.■ Any: No IPv6 next header filter is specified ("don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears.■ ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.■ UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.■ TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
• Next Header Value	When "Specific" is selected for the IPv6 next header value, you can enter a specific value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IPv6 protocol value.
• SIP Filter	Specify the source IPv6 filter for this ACE.■ Any: No source IPv6 filter is specified. (Source IPv6 filter is "don't-care".)■ Specific: Source IPv6 filter is set to Network. Specify the source IPv6 address and source IPv6 mask in the SIP Address fields that appear.
• SIP Address	When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specificSIPv6 address. The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address.
• SIP BitMask	When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 mask. The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address. Notice the usage of bitmask, if the binary bit value is "0", it means this bit is "don't-care".The real matched pattern is [sipv6_address & sipv6_bitmask] (last 32 bits). For example, if the SIPv6 address is 2001::3 and the SIPv6 bitmask is 0xFFFFFFFF(E(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit), then SIPv6 address 2001::2 and 2001::3 are applied to this rule.
• Hop Limit	Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE.zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.non-zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able to match this entry.Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

ICMP Parameters

Object Description
• ICMP Type Filter	Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.■ Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.
• ICMP Type Value	When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value.The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.
• ICMP Code Filter	Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.■ Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.
• ICMP Code Value	When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code value.The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.

■ TCP/UDP Parameters

Object Description
TCP/UDP Source Filter	Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is "don't-care").Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.
TCP/UDP Source No.	When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Source Range	When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Destination Filter	Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is "don't-care").Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.
TCP/UDP Destination Number	When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP/UDP Destination Range	When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP FIN	Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP SYN	Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• TCP RST	Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• TCP PSH	Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• TCP ACK	Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• TCP URG	Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

■ Ethernet Type Parameters

The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is selected.

Object Description
• EtherType Filter	Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.■ Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific : If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.
• Ethernet Type Value	When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType value.The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Return to the previous page.

4.6.5.4 ACL Ports Configuration

Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE. The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-5-4 appears.

ACL Ports Configuration

Port	Policy ID	Action	Rate Limiter ID		Port Redirect	Mirror	Logging	Shutdown	State	Counter
*	0									*
1	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
2	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	18006
3	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
4	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
5	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
6	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
7	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
8	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0
9	0	Permit▼		Disabled▼		Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Disabled▼	Enabled▼	0

Figure 4-6-5-4: ACL Ports Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Policy ID	Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255. The default value is 0.
• Action	Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value is "Permit".
• Rate Limiter ID	Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".
• Port Redirect	Select which port frames are redirected on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number and it can't be set when action is permitted. The default value is "Disabled".
• Mirror	Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
	Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
	The default value is "Disabled".
• Logging	Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.■ Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.The default value is "Disabled".Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate are limited.
• Shutdown	Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.■ Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.The default value is "Disabled".
• State	Specify the port state of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.■ Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.The default value is "Enabled".
• Counter	Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.

Clear

: Click to clear the counters.

4.6.5.5 ACL Rate Limiters

Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch.

The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-5-5 appears.

ACL Rate Limiter Configuration

Rate Limiter ID	Rate	Unit
*	10
1	10	pps ▼
2	10	pps ▼
3	10	pps ▼
4	10	pps ▼
5	10	pps ▼
6	10	pps ▼
7	10	pps ▼
8	10	pps ▼
9	10	pps ▼
10	10	pps ▼
11	10	pps ▼
12	10	pps ▼
13	10	pps ▼
14	10	pps ▼
	10	pps ▼

Figure 4-6-5-5: ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Rate Limiter ID	The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.
• Rate (pps)	The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps or 0, 100, 200, 300, ..., 1000000 in kbps.
• Unit	Specify the rate unit. The allowed values are: pps: packets per second.kbps: Kbits per second.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.6 DHCP Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server.

DHCP Snooping Overview

graph TD
    subgraph_DHCP_Client_1["DHCP Client 1"]
        A["User"] --> B["Client"]
        C["User"] --> D["Client"]
        E["User"] --> F["Client"]
        G["User"] --> H["Client"]
    end

    subgraph_DHCP_Client_2["DHCP Client 2"]
        I["User"] --> J["Client"]
        K["User"] --> L["Client"]
        M["User"] --> N["Client"]
        O["User"] --> P["Client"]
    end

    subgraph_DHCP_Server["DHCP Server"]
        Q["Client"] --> R["Server"]
        S["Client"] --> T["Server"]
        U["Client"] --> V["Server"]
    end

    W["Un-Trust Port"] --> X["No"]
    Y["Internet"] --> Z["Access to DHCP Client 3"]
    style W fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Y fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style Z fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Configure DHCP Snooping on this page. The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-6 appears.

4.6.6.1 DHCP Snooping Configuration

Configure DHCP Snooping on this page. in Figure 4-6-6-1 appears.

Figure 4-6-6-1: DHCP Snooping Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Snooping Mode	Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.■ Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
• Port ModeConfiguration	Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:■ Trusted: Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message.■ Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.6.2 Snooping Table

This page displays the dynamic IP assigned information after DHCP Snooping mode is disabled. All DHCP clients obtained the dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in this table except for local VLAN interface IP addresses. Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table screen in Figure 4-6-6-2 appears.

Figure 4-6-6-2: Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table Screen Page Screenshot

Object Description
• MAC Address	User MAC address of the entry.
• VLAN ID	VLAN-ID in which the DHCP traffic is permitted.
• Source Port	Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
• IP Address	User IP address of the entry.
• IP Subnet Mask	User IP subnet mask of the entry.
• DHCP Server Address	DHCP Server address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields

Clear

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

It will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is

reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table

: To start over

4.6.7 DHCPv6 Snooping

4.6.7.1 DHCPv6 Snooping Configuration

Configure DHCPv6 (aka. DHCP over IPv6) Snooping on this page.

DHCPv6 Snooping Configuration

Switch Configuration

Snooping Mode	Disabled
Unknown IPv6 Next-Headers	Drop

Port Configuration

Port	Trust Mode
*	<> √
Gi 1/1	Untrusted √
Gi 1/2	Untrusted √
Gi 1/3	Untrusted √
Gi 1/4	Untrusted √
Gi 1/5	Untrusted √
Gi 1/6	Untrusted √
Gi 1/7	Untrusted √
Gi 1/8	Untrusted √
10G 1/1	Untrusted √
10G 1/2	Untrusted √

Apply Reset

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• Snooping Mode	Indicates the DHCPv6 snooping mode operation.Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable DHCPv6 snooping mode operation. When DHCPv6 snooping mode operation is enabled, the DHCPv6 client request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports.Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Unknown IPv6 Next-Headers	Indicates how Unknown IPv6 Next-Header values should be treated. The switch needs to parse all IPv6 packets to a DHCPv6 client to determine if it is in fact a DHCPv6 message. If an unknown IPv6 extension header is encountered the parsing cannot continue. See RFC 7610, section 5, item 3 for details.Possible options are:Drop: Drop packets with unknown IPv6 extension headers. This is the most secure option but may result in traffic disruptions.Allow: Allow packets with unknown IPv6 extension headers. This is a less secure option but prevents traffic disruptions.
Port Mode Configuration	Indicates the DHCPv6 snooping port mode.Possible port modes are:Trusted: Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCPv6 messages.Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCPv6 messages.

4.6.8 IP Source Guard

4.6.8.1 IP Source Guard Configuration

IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host. This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration. The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-8-1 appears.

IP Source Guard Configuration

Mode

Disabled

Translate Dynamic to Static

Port Mode Configuration

Port	Mode	Max Dynamic Clients
*
1	Disabled	Unlimited
2	Disabled	Unlimited
3	Disabled	Unlimited
4	Disabled	Unlimited
5	Disabled	Unlimited
6	Disabled	Unlimited
7	Disabled	Unlimited

Figure 4-6-7-1: IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration	Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled.
• Port Mode Configuration	Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port.
• Max Dynamic Clients	Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports. This value can be 0, 1, 2 and unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port.

Buttons

Translate Dynamic to Static

: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.8.2 Static IP Source Guard Table

This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table. The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4-6-8-2 appears.

Figure 4-6-8-2: Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port	The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID for the settings.
IP Address	Allowed Source IP address.
MAC Address	Allowed Source MAC address.

Buttons

Add New Entry: Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table.

Apply : Click to apply changes

Reset : Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.8.3 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table

This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table. The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4-6-8-3 appears.

Dynamic IP Source Guard Table

Figure 4-6-8-3: Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
• VLAN ID	VLAN-ID in which the IP traffic is permitted.
• IP Address	User IP address of the entry.
• MAC Address	Source MAC address.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields..

Clear

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.6.9 IPv6 Source Guard

4.6.9.1 IPv6 Source Guard Configuration

This page provides IPv6 Source Guard related configuration.

IPv6 Source Guard Configuration

Translate dynamic to static

Port	Mode	Max Dynamic Clients
*	<>	<	<>
Gi 1/1	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/2	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/3	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/4	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/5	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/6	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/7	Disabled	Unlimited
Gi 1/8	Disabled	Unlimited
10G 1/1	Disabled	Unlimited
10G 1/2	Disabled	Unlimited

Apply

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• IPv6 Source Guard Mode Configuration	Enable or disable the IPv6 Source Guard globally.
• Port Mode Configuration	The table shows all ports on the device. There IPv6 Source Guard can be enabled/disabled on individual ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, IPv6 Source Guard is enabled on this given port.
• Max Dynamic Clients	Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port. This value can be 0, 1, 2 or unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0, only IPv6 packets that are matched in static entries on the specific port are forwarded.

Buttons

Enabled ▼: Toggle to change global mode.

Apply : Click to apply changes

Translate dynamic to static : Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

4.6.10 ARP Inspection

4.6.10.1 ARP Inspection

ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT. This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration. The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-10-1 appears.

Figure 4-6-10-1: ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration	Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.
Port Mode Configuration	Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable ARP Inspection operation.Disabled: Disable ARP Inspection operation.If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration, you have to enable the setting of "Check VLAN". The default setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled. When the setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. And the setting of "Check VLAN" is enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting. Possible setting of "Check VLAN" are:Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, and the setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. There are four log types and possible types are:None: Log nothing.Deny: Log denied entries.Permitt: Log permitted entries.ALL: Log all entries.

Buttons

Translate Dynamic to Static

: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.10.2 ARP Inspection Static Table

This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table. The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4-6-10-2 appears.

Figure 4-6-10-2: Static ARP Inspection Table Screen Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port	The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID for the settings.
MAC Address	Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.
IP Address	Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.10.3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by MAC address, and then by IP address. The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4-6-10-3 appears.

Figure 4-6-10-3: Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Screenshot

Navigating the ARP Inspection Table

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a "Refresh" button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the "|<<" button to start over. The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.
• IP Address	The IP address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.7 POE

The PoE function is only for GS-6320-8P2X and MGS-6320-8HP2X.

4.7.1 PoE Switch Introduction

Providing IEEE 802.3at PoE+ or IEEE 802.3bt PoE++ in-line power interfaces, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch Series can easily build a power central-controlled IP phone system, IP Camera system, AP group for the enterprise. For instance, these cameras/APs can be easily installed around the corners of the company for surveillance demands or a wireless roaming environment in the office can be built. Without the power-socket limitation, the GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch Series makes the installation of cameras or WLAN AP easier and more efficient.

Figure 4-7-1: Power over Ethernet Status

4.7.2 Power over Ethernet Powered Device

In a power over Ethernet system, operating power is applied from a power source (PSU or -power supply unit) over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices (PDs), which are connected to ports.

3~5 watts	Voice over IP phonesEnterprises can install PoE VoIP phones, ATA sand otherEthernet/non-Ethernet end-devices in the center where UPS is installed for un-interruptible power system and power control system.
6~12 watts	Wireless LAN Access PointsAccess points can be installed at museums, sightseeing sites, airports, hotels, campuses, factories, warehouses, etc.
10~12 watts	IP SurveillanceIP cameras can be installed at enterprises, museums, campuses, hospitals, banks, etc. without worrying about electrical outlets.
3~12 watts	PoE SplitterPoE Splitter split the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
3~25 watts	High Power PoE SplitterHigh PoE Splitter split the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 24/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
30~90 watts	High Power Speed DomeIts state-of-the-art design fits in various network environments like traffic centers, shopping malls, railway stations, warehouses, airports and production facilities for the most demanding outdoor surveillance applications. No electricians are needed to install AC sockets.

PD Classifications

A PD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by the PD. The intent of PD classification is to provide information about the maximum power required by the PD during operation. However, to improve power management at the PSE, the PD provides a signature about Class level.

The PD is classified based on power. The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes.

A PD will return to Class 0 to 8 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4-7-2-1.

Class	Usage	Range of maximum power used by the PD	Class Description
0	Default	0.44 to 12.95 watts	Classification unimplement
1	Optional 0.44 to 3.84 watts		Very low power
2	Optional	3.84 to 6.49 watts	Low power
3	Optional	6.49 to 12.95 watts (or to 15.4 watts)	Mid power
4	Valid for Type 2 (802.3at) devices, not allowed for 802.3af devices	12.95 to 25.5 watts	High power
5	Valid for Type 3 (802.3bt) devices	40 watts
6		51 watts (4-pair)
7	Valid for Type 4 (802.3bt) devices	62 watts (4-pair)
8		71.3 watts (4-pair)

Table 4-7-2-1 Device Class.

4.7.3 PoE System Configuration

Under some conditions, the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU. The system may come with a PSU capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system. In order to maintain the activity of the majority of ports, PoE power management is implemented.

The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current. The input power consumption is equal to the system's aggregated power consumption. The PoE power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports, as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected. When this value is exceeded, ports will be deactivated, according to user-defined priorities. The power budget is managed according to the following user-definable parameters: maximum available power, ports priority, maximum allowable power per port.

Reserved Power determined by

There are two modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports.

■ Classification mode

In this mode each port automatically determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to, and reserves the power accordingly. Four different port classes exist and one for 4, 7, 15.4 and 30.8 watts.

■ Allocation mode

In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve. The allocated/reserved power for each port/PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields. The ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the

amount of power that the power supply can deliver.

In Allocation mode the port power will not be turned on if the PD requests more available power.

The IEEE 802.3bt PoE++ switches, GS-6320-24UP(L)4X(R), GS-6320-16UP2X(R) and GS-6320-8UP2T2X, support only classification mode.

This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration settings, as Figure 4-7-3 appears.

Power Over Ethernet Configuration

System PoE Admin Mode	Enable✓
PoE Management Mode	Consumption✓
Temperature Threshold[degree C]	85
PoE Usage Threshold[%]	85

Apply Reset

When selecting different PoE management modes

refer to the user manual for proper operation.

Figure 4-7-3: PoE Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
System PoE Admin Mode	Allows user to enable or disable PoE function. It will causes all of PoE ports to supply or not supply power.
PoE Management Mode	There are 6 PoE power management modes choice, and basically user can choose allocation, classification and LLDP management mode. Default setting is Allocation mode.
Temperature Threshold	This is PoE temperature threshold for user set up a temperature parameter for alarm.
Usage Threshold	This is a parameter for user to define that if PoE power has been consumed to the setting then a alarm log will be issued.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Dual power input is required for maximum PoE loading.

Check your power supply's output capability before modifying the value of Power Supply Budget[W]

4.7.4 Port Configuration

This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as Figure 4-7-4 shows.

GS-6320 802.3at PoE+ Switch – PoE Port Configuration

Port	PoE Mode	Schedule	Priority	Power Allocation[W]
*				0
1	Enable	Profile 1	High	0
2	Enable	Profile 1	High	0
3	Enable	Profile 1	High	0
				0

Figure 4-7-4: Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• PoE Mode	There are three modes for PoE mode.■ Enable: enable PoE function..■ Disable: disable PoE function.■ Schedule: enable PoE function in schedule mode.
• Schedule	Indicates the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:■ Profile1■ Profile2■ Profile3■ Profile4
• Priority	The Priority represents PoE ports priority. There are three levels of power priority named Low, High and Critical.The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget. In this case, the port with the lowest priority will be turned off, and powerfor the port of higher priority will be offered.
• Power Allocation	It can limit the port PoE supply wattage. Per port maximum value must be less than 36W watts; total ports values must be less than the Power Reservation value. Once power overload is detected, the port will automatically shut down and continue to be in detection mode until Pad's power consumption is lower than the power limit value.

GS-6320-8P2X 802.3at PoE Switch – PoE Port Configuration

802.3at PoE and Advanced PoE Power Output Mode Management

To meet the demand of various powered devices consuming stable PoE power, the GS-6320-8P2X PoE Switch series provides three different PoE power output modes for selection.

■ 60W Force Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6 + Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)
■ 30W End-span PoE Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6)
■ 30W Mid-span PoE Power Output Mode (Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)

MGS-6320-8HP2X 802.3bt PoE++ Switch – PoE Port Configuration

802.3bt PoE++ and Advanced PoE Power Output Mode Management

To meet the demand of various powered devices consuming stable PoE power, the MGS-6320-8HP2X PoE++ Switch series provides five different PoE power output modes for selection.

■ 95W UPOE/PoH Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6 + Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)
■ 90W 802.3bt PoE++ Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6 + Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)
■ 60W Force Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6 + Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)
■ 30W End-span PoE Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6)
■ 30W Mid-span PoE Power Output Mode (Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)

This page allows user to set up PoE port attributes.

Power Over Ethernet Configuration

Port	PoE Mode		Schedule	PoE Inline Mode		Force Power	Extended Mode	Priority	Power Allocation[W]
*		▼			▼
1	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
2	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
3	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
4	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
5	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
6	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
7	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90
8	Enable	▼	Profile 1	802.3bt	▼	Off	Disable	High	90

Apply Reset

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
PoE Mode	There are three modes for PoE mode.■ Enable: enable PoE function..■ Disable: disable PoE function.■ Schedule: enable PoE function in schedule mode.
Schedule	Indicates the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:■ Profile1■ Profile2■ Profile3■ Profile4To enable this feature, NTP and PoE schedule must be enable first.
PoE Inline Mode	It allows user to select IEEE802.3at/802.3bt/Ultra PoE compatibility mode to meet all PoE PD types for various PoE applications.Setting the Right Power Inline Mode for Each Application:■ Midspan: Set inline mode to IEEE 802.3at PoE+ Mid-span PSE.Pins 4-5 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 7-8 (pair #4 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Maximum power is 36.0 watts.■ Endspan: Set inline mode to IEEE 802.3at PoE+ End-span PSE.Pins 1-2 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 3-6 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Maximum power is 36.0 watts.■802.3bt: Set inline mode to IEEE 802.3bt PoE++ Type-4 or Type-3 PSE.Pins 1-2 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 3-6 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Pins 4-5 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 7-8 (pair #4 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Maximum power is 90~60 watts.■UPOE: Set inline mode to PoH (Power over HD-BASE-T) 4-pair PoE+ PSE Pins 1-2 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 3-6 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Pins 4-5 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 7-8 (pair #4 in bothT568A and T568B) provide the returnMaximum power is 72-60.0 watts
• Force Power	It allows user to enable force power function in a specified PoE Inline mode.Once the force power is enabled, the PoE port will ignore the PoE classification behaviors and directly deliver power over UTP cable no matter what Ethernet device is attached, or even there is no Ethernet cable plugged.Please be careful when using force power function and make sure the remote device is PoE powered device (PD).Maximum power is 60 watts when PoE Inline mode is configured to 8023bt or UPOE mode.
• PoE Extension	For user to enable or disable per port PoE Extension function.Default setting is "Disable".In the Extend operation mode, the PoE port operates at 10Mbps duplexoperation but can support PoE power output over a distance of up to 160 meters overcoming the 100m limit on Ethernet UTP cable.
• Priority	The Priority represents PoE ports priority. There are three levels of power priority named Low, High and Critical.The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget. In this case, the port with the lowest priority will be turned off, and power for the port of higher priority will be offered.
• Power Allocation	The Powe Allocation column shows per port maximum value of PoE power.Once power overload is detected, the port will automatically shut down and continue to be in detection mode until Pad's power consumption is lower than the power limit value.

■ 95W UPOE/PoH
■ 90W 802.3bt PoE++
■ 60W Force Power
■ 36W End-span PoE
36W Mid-span PoE

PoE Extended Function

In the "Extended" operation mode, the GS-6320 series operates on a per-port basis at 10Mbps duplex operation but can support PoE power output over a distance of up to 200 meters overcoming the 100 meters limit on Ethernet UTP cable.

graph LR
    A["Power"] --> B["GS-6320-8P2X"]
    B --> C["Extended Mode"]
    C --> D["Enable"]
    C --> E["Enable"]
    B --> F["PoE IP Camera"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

4.7.5 Status

This page allows the user to inspect the total power consumption, total power reserved and current status for all PoE ports. The screen in Figure 4-7-5 appears.

Power Over Ethernet Status

PoE System Status

Sequential Power On	Disable
PoE Voltage	0 VDC
Power Budget	120 Watts
Operation mode	Consumption
Current ports in used	8 ports
Class 1 ports	0
Class 2 ports	0
Class 3 ports	0
Class 4 ports	0
Power Consumption	0.0 Watts (0%)

Current Power Consumption 0% 0.0 / 120 W

PoE Port Status

Local Port	PD Class	Power Used [W]	Current Used [mA]	Priority	Port Status
1	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
2	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
3	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
4	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
5	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
6	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
7	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
8	0	0	0	High	PoE ON
Total		0.0 [W]	0 [mA]

Auto Refresh □ Refresh

Figure 4-7-5: PoE Status Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Sequential Power On	Displays the current sequential power on mode.
• PoE Voltage	Displays the current PoE voltage.
• System Power Budget	Displays the maximum PoE power budget.
• Operation Mode	Displays the current PoE operation mode.
• Current Budget	Displays the current maximum PoE budget.
• Current Ports in Use	Displays the current PoE ports in use.
• Class 1 ~ 8 ports	Displays the current ports of PoE class 1 ~ 8.
• Power Consumption	Displays the current power consumption (total watts and percentage)
• PoE Temperature	Displays the current operating temperature of the first PoE chip unit.
• Current Power Consumption	Shows the total watts usage of Managed PoE Switch.
• Total Power Reserved	Shows how much the total power is reserved for all PDs.
• Temperature	Displays the current operating temperature of the PoE chip unit.
• Local Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
• PD Class	Displays the class of the PD attached to the port, as established by the classification process. Class 0 is the default for PDs. The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if system is working in Classification mode. A PD will return Class to 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4-8-1-1.
• Power Used [W]	The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using.
• Current Used [mA]	The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using.
• Priority	The Priority shows the port's priority configured by the user.
• Port Status	The Port Status shows the port's status.
• Power Inline Mode	Displays per PoE port operating in mid-span, end-span or UPoE mode.
• Total	Shows the total power and current usage of all PDs.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.7.6 Port Sequential

This page allows the user to configure the PoE Ports started up interval time. The PoE Port will start up one by one as Figure 4-7-6 shows.

Port Sequential Power up Interval

Figure 4-7-6: PoE Port Sequential Power Up Interval Configuration Screenshot

The PoE port will start up after the whole system program has finished running.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Sequential Power up Option	Allows user to enable or disable Sequential Power up function.
Sequential Power up Interval	Allows user to configure the PoE Port Start Up interval time.
Sequential Power up Port Option	There are two modes for Starting Up the PoE PortBy Port: The PoE Port will start up by following Port number.By Priority: The PoE Port will start up by following the PoE Priority.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.7 Schedule

This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and schedule power recycle.

PoE Schedule

Besides being used as an IP Surveillance, the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to constructing any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN. Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth, the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power.

The "PoE schedule" function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or Enterprises save power and budget.

Scheduled Power Recycling

The Managed PoE switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot in a specific time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow. The screen in Figure 4-7-7 appears.

graph TD
    A["IP Camera"] --> B["AP Router"]
    A --> C["IP Phone"]
    A --> D["Door Phone"]
    A --> E["PoE lighting"]
    B --> F["Automatic Reboot"]
    C --> F
    D --> F
    E --> F

Power Over Ethernet Schedule

Figure 4-7-7: PoE Schedule Screenshot

Please press the Add New Rule button to start setting PoE Schedule function. You have to set PoE schedule to profile and then go back to PoE Port Configuration, and select "Schedule" mode from per port "PoE Mode" option. You can then indicate which schedule profile could be applied to the PoE port.
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Profile	Set the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:Profile1Profile2Profile3Profile4
• Week Day	Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function should be enabled on the day.
• Start Hour	Allows user to set what hour does PoE function enables.
• Start Min	Allows user to set what minute does PoE function enables.
• End Hour	Allows user to set what hour does PoE function disables.
• End Min	Allows user to set what minute does PoE function disables.
• Reboot Enable	Allows user to enable or disable whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule.Please be noticed that if you want to PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule work

User's Manual of GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Managed Switches

	at the same time, please use this function, and don't use Reboot Only function. This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at indicate time if administrator has this kind of requirement.
• Reboot Only	Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule. Please be noticed that if administrator enable this function, PoE schedule will not to set time to profile. This function is just for PoE port reset at an indicated time.
• Reboot Hour	Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots. This function only for PoE reboot schedule.
• Reboot Min	Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots. This function only for PoE reboot schedule.

Buttons

Add New Rule

: click to add new rule.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Delete

Check to delete the entry.

4.7.8 PoE Alive Check Configuration

The GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch can be configured to monitor connected PD's status in real-time via ping action. Once the PD stops working and without response, GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch is going to restart PoE port port power, and bring the PD back to work. It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden.

PD Alive Check

graph TD
    A["Step 1: PoE Device Status Good!!"] --> B["Step 2: Checking alive status for 3 times"]
    B --> C["Step 3: Restart PoE device if without response"]
    C --> D["Step 4: Restart PoE Device"]

    subgraph Step 1
        E["← Ping Request → Ping Echo"]
    end

    subgraph Step 2
        F["← Ping Request → No Response!"]
    end

    subgraph Step 3
        G["← Alarm Notification → PoE ON OFF"]
    end

PD Alive Check Mechanism

graph LR
    A["Initial"] --> B["PD Ready"]
    B --> C["2-300s Interval Time"]
    C --> D["PD Halt No response"]
    D --> E["..."]
    E --> F["PD Halt No response"]
    F --> G["..."]
    G --> H["PD Power on"]
    H --> I["30s"]
    I --> J["5-180s PD Reboot Time"]
    J --> K["Time(s)"]
    L["PSE Start ping PD"] --> M["PSE check "Retry Count""]
    M --> N["PSE port Power off & Alarm"]
    N --> O["PSE port Power on"]
    O --> P["PSE Start ping PD"]
    Q["Retry Count (1-5)"] --> M

This page provides you how to configure PD Alive Check. The screen in Figure 4-7-8 appears.

PD Ping Alive Check

Port	Mode	Ping PD IP Address	Interval Time(10~300s)		Retry Count(1~5)		Action	Reboot Time(30~180s)
*		0.0.0.0		30		2			90
1	Disable▼	0.0.0.0		30		2	None▼		90
2	Disable▼	0.0.0.0		30		2	None▼		90

Figure 4-7-8: PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function. As default value all ports are disabled.
• Ping PD IP Address	This coulumn allows user to set PoE device IP address here for system making ping to the PoE device. Please be noticed that the PD's IP address must be set to the same network segment with GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch.
• Interval Time (2~300s)	This column allows user to set how long system should be issue a ping request to PD for detecting PD is alive or dead. Interval time range is from 2 seconds to 300 seconds.
• Retry Count (1~5)	This column allows user to set how many times system rerry ping to PD. For example, if we set count 2, the meaning is that if system retry ping to the PD and the PD doesn't response continuously, the PoE port will be reset.
• Action	Allows user to set which action will be apply if the PD witout any response. GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch offers 3 actions as following.➢PD Reboot: It menas system will reset the PoE port that connected the PD.➢Reboot & Alarm: It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog, SMTP.➢Alarm: It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog, SMTP.
• PD Reboot Time(5~180s)	This column allows user to set the PoE PD device rebooting time, due to there are so many kind of PoE PD device on the market and they have different rebooting time. The PD Alive-check is not a defining standard, so the PoE PD device on the market doesn't report reboots done information to GS-6320 and MGS-6320 Switch, so user has to make sure how long the PD will be finished to boot, and then set the time value to this column.System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time. If ou can not make sure precisely booting time, we suggest you to set it longer.

Buttons

Save

Click it to save changes.

Reset

: Click it to reset configuration which doesn't to be saved yet.

4.7.9 Port Power Consumption

This page allows user to see the usage of individual PoE Port. The screen in Figure 4-7-9 appears.

Figure 4-7-9: PoE Power Consumption Screenshot

Auto Refresh □

: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

: Refreshes the Web page and the current configuration if user doesn't save it.

4.7.10 LLDP PoE Neighbors

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected. The columns hold the following information: The screen in Figure 4-7-10 appears.

LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet Information

Local Interface	Power Type	Power Source	Power Priority	Maximum Power
GigabitEthernet 1/2	PD Device	PSE	Unknown	25.5 [W]

Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Figure 4-7-10: LLDP PoE Neighbor Screenshot

Please note that administrator has to enable LLDP port from LLDP configuration, please refer to the following example (The screen in Figure 4-7-10 appears.) To enable LLDP function from port1 to port3, administrator has to plug a PD that supports PoE LLDP function, and then administrator is going to see the PoE information of the PD from LLDP.

LLDP Configuration
LLDP Parameters

Tx Interval	30	seconds
Tx Hold	4	times
Tx Delay	2	seconds
Tx Reinit	2	seconds

LLDP Port Configuration

			Optional TLVs
Port	Mode	CDP Aware	Port Description	System Name	System Description	System Capabilities	Management Address
*
1	Enabled
2	Enabled
3	Enabled

Figure 4-7-10: LLDP Configuration Screenshot

4.8 Ring

4.8.1 Ring Wizard

This page is on ring wizard and it is an interface for user to configure ERPS ring feature.

This wizard uses the fixed ring topology to indicate the ring owner, so if user needs to indicate the other switch to the ring owner or modify the ring topology, please modify MEP and ERPS settings manually.

If user wants to enable the ERPS ring, please disable the DHCP client feature and indicate the ring port that cannot be the Spanning Tree port.

Ring Wizard

Note:

1. Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled.
2. Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied to spanning tree function at the same time.

Total Switch Number (3~30): 3

Switch ID: 1

Next

graph LR
    A["Switch-3"] -->|Mep:6| B["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    B -->|Port 1| C["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    B -->|Vlan 3001| D["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    B -->|Port 2| E["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    E -->|Mep:2| F["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    E -->|Mep:3| G["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]

Figure: Ring Wizard page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
All Switch Numbers (3 ~ 30)	This option is for you to input a number to show how many switches will be used for the single ring. Ring wizard needs at least 3 switches for configuring and the maximum number is 30.
Number ID	This option is for you to input a number that the ID of the switch you are setting for the single ring.For example, a single ring is grouped by 10 switches. If you want to set the ERPS ring wizard from the 2nd switch, you will have to input 2 for the Number ID option.
Next Button	When you press the "Next" button, the system is going to generate the ERPS ring setting according to your setting.
Ring Wizard Setting	[10 Switches For Single Ring]
Example	1.We will create a ring by 10 switches and we are configuring the first switch, so the configuration should be as follows:2.We are creating a ring that it is built by 10 switches and we are configuring the 2nd switch.3.We are creating a ring that it is built by 10 switches and we are configuring the 10th switch.

Ring Wizard Example:

ERPS Ring for Video Transmission Redundancy

graph TD
    A["MGS-6320-8HP2X"] -->|10C| B["MGS-6320-8HP2X"]
    B -->|10C| C["Network Video Recorder"]
    C --> D["Traffic Control Center"]
    D --> E["PoE IP Camera"]
    E --> F["100BASE-T UTP with PoE"]
    F --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Figure 4-8-1: Ring Example Diagram

The above topology often occurs on using ERPS protocol. The multi switch constitutes a single ERPS ring; all of the switches only are configured as an ERPS in VLAN 3001, thereby constituting a single MRPP ring.

Switch ID	Port	MEP ID	RPL Type	VLAN Group
Switch 1	Port 1 1	None 300	1
	Port 2	2	Owner	3001
Switch 2	Port 1 4	None 300	1
	Port 2	3	Neighbor	3001
Switch 3	Port 1 6	None 300	1
	Port 2 5	None 300	1

Table 4-8-2: ERPS Configuration Table

The scenario described as follows:

1. Disable DHCP client and set proper static IP for Switch 1, 2 & 3. In this example, switch 1 is 192.168.0.101; switch 2 is 192.168.0.102 and switch 3 is 192.168.0.103.
2. On switch 1, 2 & 3, disable spanning tree protocol to avoid confliction with ERPS.

Setup steps

Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 1

Connect PC to switch 1 directly; don't connect to port 1 & 2

Logging on the Switch 1 and click "Ring > Ring Wizard"

Set "All Switch Number" = 3 and "Number ID" = 1; click "Next" button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 1.

Set "MEP1" = Port1, "MEP2" = Port2 and VLAN ID = 3001; click "Set" button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 1.

graph LR
    A["Switch-3"] -->|Mep:6| B["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    B -->|Port 1| C["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    B -->|Mep:1| D["Vlan 3001"]
    B -->|Port 2| E["Mep:2"]
    E -->|Mep:3| F["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]

Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 2

Connect PC to switch 2 directly; don't connect to port 1 & 2

Logging on the Switch 2 and click "Ring > Ring Wizard"

Set "All Switch Number" = 3 and "Number ID" = 2; click "Next" button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 2.

Set "MEP3" = Port2, "MEP4" = Port1 and VLAN ID = 3001; click "Set" button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 2.

graph LR
    A["(Owner) Switch-1"] -->|Mep:2| B["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    B -->|Mep:3| C["(Neighbour) Vlan 3001"]
    B -->|Port 2| D["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    B -->|Port 1| E["(Neighbour) Switch-3"]
    E -->|Mep:4| B
    E -->|Mep:5| F["(Neighbour) Switch-3"]

Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 3

Connect PC to switch 3 directly; don't connect to port 1 & 2

Logging on the Switch 3 and click "Ring > Ring Wizard"

Set "All Switch Number" = 3 and "Number ID" = 3; click "Next" button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 3.

Set "MEP5" = Port2, "MEP6" = Port1 and VLAN ID = 3001; click "Set" button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 3.

graph LR
    A["(Neighbour) Switch-2"] -->|Mep:4| B["Port 2"]
    B -->|Mep:5| C["Switch-3"]
    C -->|Mep:6| D["Port 1"]
    D -->|Mep:1| E["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    C -->|Vlan 3001| F["Router"]

To avoid loop, please don't connect switch 1, 2 & 3 together in the ring topology before configuring the end of ERPS.

Follow the configuration or ERPS wizard to connect the Switch 1, 2 and 3 together to establish ERPS application:

MEP2 ←→ MEP3 = Switch1 / Port2 ←→ Switch2 / Port2

MEP4 ←→ MEP5 = Switch2 / Port1 ←→ Switch3 / Port2

MEP1 ←→ MEP6 = Switch1 / Port1 ←→ Switch3 / Port1

4.8.2 ERPS

The ERPS instances are configured here.

ERPS Configuration

ERPS #

RPL

Ver

Type

VC

Interconnect

Port0

Port1

Ring Id

Node Id

Level

Control

Rev

Guard

WTR

Hold Off

Enable

Oper

Warning

Mode

Port

Instance

Prop

Port

SF

Port

SF

VLAN

PCP

Figure : ERPS configuration

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ERPS #	The ID of ERPS. Valid range 1 - 64
• RPL Mode	Ring Protection Link mode. Possible values:■ None:■ Owner:■ Neighbor:
• RPL Port	Indicates whether it is port0 or port1 that is the Ring Protection Link. Not used if RPL Mode is None.
• Ver	ERPS protocol version. v1 and v2 are supported
• Type	Type of ring. Possible values:Major: ERPS major ring (G.8001-2016, clause 3.2.39)Sub: ERPS sub-ring (G.8001-2016, clause 3.2.66)InterSub: ERPS sub-ring on an interconnection node (G.8001-2016, clause 3.2.66)
• VC	Controls whether to use a Virtual Channel with a sub-ring
• Interconnect Instance	For a sub-ring on an interconnection node, this must reference the instance ID of the ring to which this sub-ring is connected.
• Interconnect Prop	Controls whether the ring referenced by Interconnect Instance shall propagate R-APS flush PDUs whenever this sub-ring's topology changes.
• Port0/Port1 Interface	Interface index of ring protection Port0/Port1.
• Port0/Port1 SF	Selects whether Signal Fail (SF) comes from the link state of a given interface, or from a Down-MEP. Possible values:MEP: Down-MEPLink: Link
• Ring Id	The Ring ID is used - along with the control VLAN - to identify R-APS PDUs as belonging to a particular ring.
• Node Id	The Node ID is used inside the R-APS specific PDU to uniquely identify this node

	(switch) on the ring.
• Level	MD/MEG Level of R-APS PDUs we transmit.
• Control VLAN	The VLAN on which R-APS PDUs are transmitted and received on the ring ports.
• Control PCP	The PCP value used in the VLAN tag of the R-APS PDUs.
• Rev	Revertive (true) or Non-revertive (false) mode.
• Guard	Guard time in ms. Valid range is 10 - 2000 ms.
• WTR	"Wait-to-Restore time in seconds. Valid range 1 - 720 sec.
• Hold Off	Hold off time in ms. Value is rounded down to 100ms precision. Valid range is 0 - 10000 ms.
• Enable	The administrative state of this APS ERPS. Check to make it function normally and uncheck to make it cease functioning.
• Oper	The operational state of ERPS instance.●: Active●: Disabled or Internal error.
• Warning	Operational warnings of ERPS instance.●: No warnings●: There are warnings, use tooltip to see.
• Configuration Buttons	You can modify each ERPS in the table using the following buttons:e: Edits the ERPS row.×: Deletes the ERPS.+: Adds new ERPS.

4.8.3 ERPS Status

This shows the current status of the ERPS instances. screen in Figure 4-8-3 appears.

ERPS Status

Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh

ERPS #

Oper

Warning

State

TxRapsActive

cFOPTo

Tx Info

UpdateTimeSecs

Request

Version

Rb

Dnf

Bpr

Node Id

SMAC

No entry exists

Figure 4-8-3: This shows ERPS current status

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ERPS #	The ID of the ERPS. Click on link to get to ERPS detailed instance page, you can reset counters and issue commands.
• Oper	The operational state of ERPS instance.●: Active●: Disabled or Internal error.
• Warning	Operational warnings of ERPS instance.●: No warnings●: There are warnings, use tooltip to see.
• State	Specifies protection/node state of ERPS.
• TxRapsActive	Specifies whether we are currently supposed to be transmitting R-APS PDUs on our ring ports.
• cFOPTo	Failure of Protocol - R-APS Rx Time Out.
• UpdateTimeSecs	Time in seconds since boot that this structure was last updated.
• Request	Request/state according to G.8032, table 10-3.
• Version	Version of received/used R-APS Protocol. 0 means v1, 1 means v2, etc.
• Rb	RB (RPL blocked) bit of R-APS info. See Figure 10-3 of G.8032.
• Dnf	DNF (Do Not Flush) bit of R-APS info. See Figure 10-3 of G.8032."
• Bpr	BPR (Blocked Port Reference) of R-APS info. See Figure 10-3 of G.8032.
• Node Id	Node ID of this request.
• SMAC	The Source MAC address used in the request/state.

4.8.4

APS

4.8.4.1 APS Configuration

The APS module implements the protocol and linear protection switching mechanisms for point-to-point

VLAN-based ETH SNC in Ethernet transport networks. Automatic Protection Switching is defined by the ITU G.8031 standard.

This page allows the user to create and configure an APS Instance.

APS Configuration

APS #

Working

Protecting

Mode

Level

VLAN

PCP

SMAC

Rev

TxAps

WTR

HoldOff

Enable

Oper

Warning

Port

SF Trigger

SF MEP

Port

SF Trigger

SF MEP

The displayed settings are:

APS Protocol:

Object Description
• APS #	The ID of the APS. Maximum number of creatable APS instances is 10 . Click on link to get to APS instance page, you can reset counters and issue commands.
• Port	The Port this flow is attached to.
• SF Trigger	Selects whether Signal Fail (SF) comes from the link state of a given Port, or from a Down-MEP.
• SF MEP	The Domain::Service::MEPID refers to a MEP instance which shall represent the Working flow. Only used when SF Trigger is MEP. The selected MEP instance does not need to exist when this APS is configured.
• Mode	1:1 This will create a 1:1 APS.In the linear 1:1 protection switching architecture, the protection transport entity is dedicated to the working transport entity. However, the normal traffic is transported either on the working transport entity or on the protection transport entity using a selector bridge at the source of the protected domain. The selector at the sink of the protected domain selects the entity which carries the normal traffic.1+1 Uni This will create a 1+1 Unidirectional APS.1+1 Bi This will create a 1+1 Bidirectional APS.In the linear 1+1 protection switching architecture, a protection transport entity is dedicated to each working transport entity. The normal traffic is copied and fed to both working and protection transport entities with a permanent bridge at the source of the protected domain. The traffic on working and protection transport entities is transmitted simultaneously to the sink of the protected domain, where a selection between the working and protection transport entities is made based on some predetermined criteria, such as server defect indication.
• Level	MD/MEG Level (0-7).
• VLAN	The VLAN ID used in the L-APS PDUs. 0 means untagged.
• PCP	PCP (priority) (default 7). The PCP value used in the VLAN tag unless the L-APSPDU is untagged. Must be a value in range 0 - 7.
• SMAC	Source MAC address used in L-APS PDUs. Must be a unicast address. If all-zeros, the switch port's MAC address will be used.
• Rev	When checked, the port recovery mode is revertive, that is, traffic switches back to the working port after the condition(s) causing a switch has cleared. In the case of clearing a command (e.g. forced switch), this happens immediately. In the case of clearing of a defect, this generally happens after the expiry of the WTR (Wait-To-Restore) timer.When unchecked, the port recovery mode is non-revertive and traffic is allowed to remain on the protect port after a switch reason has cleared.
• TxAps	Choose whether this end transmits APS PDUs. Only used for 1+1, unidirectional.
• WTR	When Rev is checked, WTR (Wait-To-Restore) tells how many seconds to wait before restoring to the working port after a fault condition has cleared. Valid range 1 - 720
• HoldOff	When a new (or more severe) defect occurs, the hold-off timer will be started and the event will be reported after the timer expires. HoldOff time is measured in milliseconds, and valid values are in the range 0 - 10000. Default is 0, which means immediate reporting of the defect.
• Enable	The administrative state of this APS instance. Check to make it function normally and uncheck to make it cease functioning.
• Oper	This field can not be configured, but shows the operational state. You can click on the link in the APS # field to get more details on the status.APS instance is functional.APS instance is not functional.
• Warning	If the operational state is Active, the APS instance is indeed active, but it may be that it doesn't run as the administrator thinks, because of configuration errors, which are reflected in the warnings below.The Warning information is indicated by: no warning, : warning.Use the tooltip to get the detailed warning information.
• Configuration Buttons	You can modify each APS in the table using the following buttons:Edits the APS row.Deletes the APS.Adds new APS.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.8.4.2 APS Status

This shows the current status of the APS instances.

APS Status
Auto-refresh □ Refresh

APS #

State

Defect state

TxAps

RxAps

Dfop

SMAC

TxCnt

RxCnt

Operational

Warning

Protection

Working

Protecting

Request

ReSignal

BrSignal

Request

ReSignal

BrSignal

CM

PM

NR

TO

Valid

Invalid

No entry exists

The displayed settings are:

Object Description
• APS #	The ID of the APS. Click on link to get to APS instance page, you can reset counters and issue commands.
• State, Operational	The operational state of the APS instance. There are many ways to not have the instance active. Each of them has its own value. Only when the state is Active, will the APS instance be active and up and running. If the Operational state is not "Active", the remaining fields are invalid. The possible values of this field are shown below:Administratively disabled: Instance is inactive, because it is administratively disabled.Active: The instance is active and up and running.Internal Error: Instance is inactive, because an internal error has occurred.Working MEP not Found:Instance is inactive, because the Working MEP is not found.Protecting MEP not Found: Instance is inactive, because the Protecting MEP is not found.Working MEP is not administrative active: Instance is inactive, because the Working MEP is not admin enabled.Protecting MEP is not administrative active: Instance is inactive, because the Protecting MEP is not admin enabled.Working MEP is not a Down MEP: Instance is inactive, because the Working MEP is not a Down-MEP.Protecting MEP is not a Down MEP: Instance is inactive, because the Protecting MEP is not a Down-MEP.Working and Protecting MEP use the same interface: Instance is inactive, because both Working and Protecting MEPs use the same I/F.Another instance use the same Working port: Instance is inactive, because another instance uses the same Working port.
• State, Warning	If the operational state is Active, the APS instance is indeed active, but it may be that it doesn't run as the administrator thinks, because of configuration errors,which are reflected in the warnings below.The Warning information is indicated by: no warning, : warning.Use the tooltip to get the detailed warning information.
• State, Protection	The possible protection group states. The letters refers to the state as described in G.8031 AnnexNo request Working: A.No request Protecting: B.Lockout: C.Forced Switch: D.Signal fail Working: E.Signal fail Protecting: F.Manual switch to Protecting: G.Manual switch to Working: H.Wait to restore: I.Do not revert: J.Exercise Working: K.Exercise Protecting: L.Reverse request Working: M.Reverse request Protecting: N.Signal degrade Working: P.Signal degrade Protecting: Q.
• Defect state, Working, Protection	The possible values of this field are shown below:ok: The port defect state is OKsd: The port defect state is Signal Degradesf: The port defect state is Signal Fail
• TxAps, RxAps - Request	The possible transmitted or received APS request according to G.8031, Table 11-1.nr: No Request.dnr: Do Not Revert.rr: Reverse Request.exer: Exercise.wtr: Wait-To-Restore.ms: Manual Switch.sd: Signal Degrade.sfW: Signal Fail for Working.fs: Forced Switch.sfP: Signal Fail for Protect.lo: Lockout.
• TxAps, ReSignal	Transmitted requested signal according to G.8031 figure 11-2
• TxAps, BrSignal	Transmitted bridged signal according to G.8031 figure 11-2
RxAps, ReSignal	Received requested signal according to G.8031 figure 11-2
RxAps, BrSignal	Received bridged signal according to G.8031 figure 11-2
Dfop	Dfop is "Failure of Protocol defect" and the presence of a defect is indicated by: no defect, defect.CM: Configuration Mismatch (received APS PDU on working interface within last 17.5 seconds).PM: Provisioning Mismatch (far and near ends are not using the same mode; bidir only)NR: No Response (far end hasn't agreed on 'Requested Signal' within 50 ms; bidir only)TO: Time Out (near end hasn't received a valid APS PDU within last 17.5 seconds; bidir only)
SMAC	Source MAC address of last received APS PDU or all-zeros if no PDU has been received.
TxCnt	Number of APS PDU frames transmitted.
RxCnt, Valid	Number of valid APS PDU frames received on the protect port.
RxCnt, Invalid	Number of invalid APS PDU frames received on the protect port.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.9 ONVIF

(This chapter without MGS-6320-8T2X model)

ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum) is a global and open industry forum with the goal of facilitating the development and use of a global open standard for the interface of physical IP-based security products – or, in other words, to create a standard for how IP products within video surveillance and other physical security areas can communicate with each other. The ONVIF specification aims to achieve interoperability between network video products regardless of manufacturer.

4.9.1 ONVIF Device Search

Entries in the ONVIF Devices Table are shown on this page. The ONVIF Devices Table can sorted first by VLAN ID, Model, MAC Addreen then by IP Address. The ONVIF Devices Table screen in Figure 4-9-1 appears.

ONVIF Device Search
Query by:

Please click "Search" to query or update the current list

Port	Device Type	Device Name	Manufacturer	Model	IP address	MAC address	VLAN	Select Device
16	IP camera	ICA-3250	PLANET	ICA-3250	192.168.0.127	00-30-4F-BB-9A-4E	1	☐

Auto Search □ Search Apply
Please Select the ONVIF Device and click "Apply" for adding into "ONVIF Device List"

Figure 4-9-1: ONVIF Devices Table Status Page Screenshot

Navigating the ONVIF Devices Table

The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN", "Model", "MAC Address" and "IP Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the ONVIF Devices Table. Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table which is match from ONVIF Devices Table.
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
• Device Type	The ONVIF Device's Type of the entry.
• Device Name	The ONVIF Device's Name of the entry.
• Manufacturer	The ONVIF Device's Manufacturer of the entry.
• Model	The ONVIF Device's Model Name of the entry.
• IP Address	The ONVIF Device's IP Address of the entry.
• MAC Address	The ONVIF Device's MAC address of the entry.
• VLAN	The ONVIF Device's VLAN ID of the entry.
• Select Device	Allows to tick for selecting ONVIF Devices for adding into ONVIF List Table.

Buttons

Search

: Click to search the connecting ONVIF devices.

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-search

Automatic search occurs every 60 seconds.

4.9.2 ONVIF Device List

This page provides an overview of ONVIF Device entries. Each page shows up to 10 entries from the ONVIF Device List table, default being 10, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 10 entries from the beginning of the ONVIF Device List table; screen in Figure 4-9-2 appears.

Figure 4-9-2: ONVIF Device List Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Login(Optional)	Allows for filling one set of User name and Password.
Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
Status	Red: The ONVIF device is not active.Green: The ONVIF device is active.The ONVIF Device's Type of the entry.
Device Type	The ONVIF Device's Type of the entry.
Device Name	The ONVIF Device's Name of the entry.
Manufacturer	The ONVIF Device's Manufacturer of the entry.
Model	The ONVIF Device's Model Name of the entry.
IP Address	The ONVIF Device's IP Address of the entry.
MAC Address	The ONVIF Device's MAC address of the entry.
Power Used [W]	The Power Used shows how much power the ONVIF device currently is using.
Action	There are three actions:Access: Clicks for accessing into the ONVIF device's WEBUI.Reboot: Clicks for rebooting the ONVIF device.Delete: Clicks for deleting the ONVIF device from ONVIF Device List.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 30 seconds.

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the first page.

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the front page.

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the next page.

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the final page.

4.9.3 MAP Upload / Edit

This page allows the clients for uploading e-MAP, the file size can not over 151k; screen in Figure 4-9-1-3 appears.

Figure 4-9-1-3: Map Upload / Edit Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MAP Select	Allows to select Map1/2/3 for uploading Map.
• Description	Indicates the map's description.
• File size	Shows Map's size.
• File	Allows to choose and browse specific map file from laptop device.
• Preview Map	The Preview use of Map.
• Current Map	The Current use of Map.

Buttons

| Choose File |: Click to choose the file.

| Upload |: Click to upload the file.

4.9.4 Floor Map

This page allows the clients for planning the ONVIF devices with the uploaded e-Map. It can select the ONVIF devices from Device List and it also can modify the e-Map's Zoom and Scale; screen in Figure 4-9-4 appears.

Figure 4-9-4: Floor Map Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Summary Information	Shows the number of Online and Offline ONVIF cameras.
• Map Control	Allows to choose Location of Map1/2/3 and zoom in/out of Map.
• Device List	Allows to select ONVIF devices.

4.10 Maintenance

4.10.1 Web Firmware Upgrade

This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch. The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-10-1-1 appears.

Software Upload

Select File ...

No file selected

Start Upgrade

Upload status: Idle

Figure 4-10-1-1: Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot

To open Firmware Upgrade screen, perform the following:

1. Click Maintenance -> Web Firmware Upgrade.
2. The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4-10-1-1.
3. Click the “Choose File” button of the Main page; the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware.
4. Select on the firmware and then click “Upload”. The Software Upload Progress would show the file with upload status.
5. Once the software is loaded to the system successfully, the following screen appears. The system will load the new software after reboot.

Figure 4-10-1-2: Software Successfully Loaded Notice Screen

DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete.

Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the "OK" button after the image is loaded. Or the system won't apply the new firmware. User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes.

4.10.2 Save Startup Config

This function allows to save the current configuration, thereby ensuring that the current active configuration can be used at the next reboot as the screen in Figure 4-10-2-1 appears. After saving the configuration, the screen in Figure 4-10-2-2 will appear.

Save Running Configuration to startup-config

Save Configuration

Figure 4-10-2-1: Configuration Save Page Screenshot

Save Running Configuration to startup-config

startup-config saved successfully.

Figure 4-10-2-2: Finish Saving Page Screenshot

4.10.3 Configuration Download

The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format. The files are either virtual (RAM-based) or stored in flash on the switch.

There are three system files:

• running-config: A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch. This file is volatile.
• startup-config: The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.
• default-config: A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when the system is restored to default settings.

It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running-config, thereby switching configuration.

Configuration Download page allows the download the running-config, startup-config and default-config on the switch. Please refer to the Figure 4-10-3 shown below.

Download Configuration

Select configuration file to save.

Please note: running-config may take a while to prepare for download.

File Name

○ running-config
○ default-config
○ startup-config

Download Configuration

Figure 4-10-3: Configuration Download Page Screenshot

4.10.4 Configuration Upload

Configuration Upload page allows the upload the running-config and startup-config on the switch. Please refer to the Figure 4-10-4 shown below.

Figure 4-10-4: Configuration Upload Page Screenshot

If the destination is running-config, the file will be applied to the switch configuration. This can be done in two ways:

• Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the uploaded file.
• Merge mode: The uploaded file is merged into running-config.

If the file system is full (i.e. contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other files), it is not possible to create new files, but an existing file must be overwritten or another deleted first.

4.10.5 Configure Activate

Thje Configure Activate page allows to activate the startup-config and default-config files present on the switch. Please refer to the Figure 4-10-5 shown below.

Activate Configuration

Select configuration file to activate. The previous configuration will be completely replaced, potentially leading to loss of management connectivity.

Please note: The activated configuration file will not be saved to startup-config automatically.

Figure 4-10-5: Configuration Activate Page Screenshot

It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch, except for running-config which represents the currently active configuration.

Select the file to activate and click Activate Configuration. This will initiate the process of completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file.

4.10.6 Configure Delete

The Configure Delete page allows to delete the startup-config and default-config files which are stored in FLASH. If this is done and the switch is rebooted without a prior Save operation, this effectively resets the switch to default configuration. Please refer to the Figure 4-10-6 shown below.

Figure 4-10-6: Configuration Delete Page Screenshot

4.10.7 Image Select

This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in the device, and allows you to revert to the alternate image. The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images. The Image Select screen in Figure 4-10-7 appears.

In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image" table is shown. In this case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.

1. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention), uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this.
2. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases. This does not constitute an error.

Software Image Selection

Active Image
Image	GS-6320-8P2X_v1.2103b211101.mfi
Version	v1.2103b211101
Date	2021-11-01T13:23:02+08:00

Figure 4-10-7: Software Image Selection Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Image	The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary (preferred) image is image, the alternate image is named image.bk.
• Version	The version of the firmware image.
• Date	The date when the firmware was produced.

Buttons

Activate Alternate Image

Click to use the alternate image. This button may be disabled depending on system state.

4.10.8 Factory Default

You can reset the configuration of the Managed Switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained. The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary. The Factory Default screen in Figure 4-10-8 appears.

Factory Defaults

Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults?

The default configuration here doesn't involve IP address.

You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing the reset button on the machine.

Figure 4-10-8: Factory Default Page Screenshot

Buttons

Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.

: Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration.

To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting, you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device is rebooted, you can login the management Web interface within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.

4.10.9 System Reboot

The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location. Once the Reboot button is pressed, user has to re-login the Web interface about 60 seconds later; the System Reboot screen in Figure 4-10-9 appears.

Restart Device

Are you sure you want to perform a Restart?

Figure 4-10-9: System Reboot Page Screenshot

Buttons

Click to reboot the system.

: Click to return to the Port State page without rebooting the system.

You can also check the SYS LED on the front panel to identify whether the System is loaded completely or not. If the SYS LED is blinking, then it is in the firmware load stage; if the SYS LED light is on, you can use the Web browser to login the Managed Switch.

4.10.10 Ping

This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.

After you press "Start", 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-10-10 appears.

Figure 4-10-10: ICMP Ping Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Address	The destination IP Address.
• Ping Length	The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the Managed Switch, or you have setup the correct gateway IP address.

Buttons

Start

Click to transmit ICMP packets.

New Ping

Click to re-start diagnostics with PING.

4.10.11 IPv6 Ping

This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.

After you press "Start", 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4-10-11 appears.

Figure 4-9-11: ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Address	The destination IP Address.
• Ping Length	The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Buttons

Start

Click to transmit ICMP packets.

New Ping

Click to re-start diagnostics with PING.

4.10.12 Remote IP Ping

This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port.

After you press "Test", 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-10-12 appears.

Figure 4-10-12: Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Remote IP Address	The destination IP Address.
• Ping Size	The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes.
• Result	Display the ping result.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Clears the IP Address and the result of ping value.

4.10.13 Cable Diagnostics

This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics.

Press to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If all ports are selected, this can take approximately 15 seconds. When completed, the page refreshes automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table. Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 140 meters.

10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic. Therefore, running cable diagnostic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete. The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4-10-13 appears.

VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics

Download

Start

Print

Cable Status
Port	Description	Pair A(1,2)	Length A	Pair B(3,6)	Length B	Pair C(4,5)	Length C	Pair D(7,8)	Length D
1		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--
2		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--
3		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--
4		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--
5		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--
6		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--
7		--	--	--	--	--	--	--	--

Figure 4-10-13 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics.
• Description	Display per port description.

- Cable Status

Port:

Port number.

Pair:

The status of the cable pair.

OK - Correctly terminated pair

Open - Open pair

Short - Shorted pair

Short A - Cross-pair short to pair A

Short B - Cross-pair short to pair B

Short C - Cross-pair short to pair C

Short D - Cross-pair short to pair D

Cross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair A

Cross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair B

Cross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair C

Cross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair D

Length:

The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters

Buttons

Start

Click to run the diagnostics.

5. SWITCH OPERATION

5.1 Address Table

The Managed Switch is implemented with an address table. This address table is composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes in the network, including MAC address, port no, etc. This information comes from the learning process of Managed Switch.

5.2 Learning

When one packet comes in from any port, the Managed Switch will record the source address, port no., and the other related information in address table. This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.

5.3 Forwarding & Filtering

When one packet comes from some port of the Managed Switch, it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning. The Managed Switch will look up the address-table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port, which this packet comes in. And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected. If found, and the destination address is located at a different port from this packet comes in, the Managed Switch will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table. But, if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in, then this packet will be filtered, thereby increasing the network throughput and availability.

5.4 Store-and-Forward

Store-and-Forward is one type of packet-forwarding techniques. A Store-and-Forward Managed Switch stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and do the complete error checking before transmission. Therefore, no error packets occur; it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability.

The Managed Switch scans the destination address from the packet-header, searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet, only if required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. However, the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs, which nearly always improves the overall performance. An Ethernet switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using the conventional cabling and adapters.

Due to the learning function of the Managed Switch, the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is in the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network.

The Managed Switch performs "Store and Fforward"; therefore, no error packets occur. More reliably, it reduces the re-transmission rate. No packet loss will occur.

5.5 Auto-Negotiation

The STP ports on the Switch have built-in "Auto-negotiation". This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detecting the modes and speeds both connected devices are capable of. Both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices can connect with the port in either half- or full-duplex mode. 1000BASE-T can be only connected in full-duplex mode.

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter contains information to help you solve issues. If the Managed Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the Managed Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual.

■ The Link LED is not lit.

Solution:

Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Managed Switch.

■ Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port.

Solution:

Please check the VLAN settings, trunk settings, or port enabled/disabled status.

■ Performance is bad.

Solution:

Check the full duplex status of the Managed Switch. If the Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex, then the performance will be poor. Please also check the in/out rate of the port.

■ Why the Switch doesn't connect to the network.

Solution:

1. Check the LNK/ACT LED on the switch.
2. Try another port on the Switch.
3. Make sure the cable is installed properly.
4. Make sure the cable is the right type.
5. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again.

■ 1000BASE-T port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular.

Solution:

Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.

■ Switch does not power up.

Solution:

1. AC power cord is not inserted or faulty.
2. Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly.
3. Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly; check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch.
4. If that device works, refer to the next step.
5. If that device does not work, check the AC power.

APPENDIX A: Networking Connection

A.1 Switch's Data RJ45 Pin Assignments - 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T

PIN NO	MDI	MDI-X
1	BI_DA+	BI_DB+
2	BI_DA-	BI_DB-
3	BI_DB+	BI_DA+
4	BI_DC+	BI_DD+
5	BI_DC-	BI_DD-
6	BI_DB-	BI_DA-
7	BI_DD+	BI_DC+
8	BI_DD-	BI_DC-

Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden, is beyond the scope of this standard.

A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX

When connecting your Switch to another Fast Ethernet switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle/connector and their pin assignments:

RJ45 Connector pin assignment
PIN NO	MDIMedia Dependent Interface	MDI-XMedia Dependent Interface-Cross
1	Tx + (transmit) Rx + (receive)
2	Tx - (transmit)	Rx - (receive)
3	Rx + (receive) Tx + (transmit)
4, 5	Not used
6	Rx - (receive)	Tx - (transmit)
7, 8	Not used

The standard cable, RJ45 pin assignment

The standard RJ45 receptacle/connector

There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight-through cable and crossover cable connection:

Straight Cable		SIDE 1	SIDE 2
	SIDE 1	1 = White / Amber2 = Amber3 = White / Green4 = Blue5 = White / Blue6 = Green7 = White / Brown8 = Brown	1 = White / Amber2 = Amber3 = White / Green4 = Blue5 = White / Blue6 = Green7 = White / Brown8 = Brown
	SIDE 2
Crossover Cable		SIDE 1	SIDE 2
	SIDE 1	1 = White / Amber2 = Amber3 = White / Green4 = Blue5 = White / Blue6 = Green7 = White / Brown8 = Brown	1 = White / Green2 = Green3 = White / Amber4 = Blue5 = White / Blue6 = Amber7 = White / Brown8 = Brown
	SIDE 2

Figure A-1: Straight-through and Crossover Cable

Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above picture before deploying the cables into your network.

APPENDIX B : GLOSSARY

A

ACE

ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.

There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.

ACL

ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights.

ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.

There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration:

ACL|Access Control List: The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way, highest (top) to lowest (bottom). Default the table is empty. An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs. The first matching ACE will take action (permit/deny) on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented. An ACE can be associated with a policy, 1 ingress port, or any ingress port (the whole switch). If an ACE Policy is created then that policy can be associated with a group of ports under the "Ports" web page. There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE. Read the web page help text to get further information for each of them. The maximum number of ACEs is 64.

ACL|Ports: The ACL Port configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port. This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules. Traffic Policy is created under the "Access Control List". You can you also set up specific traffic properties (Action / Rate Limiter / Port copy, etc) for each ingress port. They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched. In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented. See the web page help text for each specific port property.

ACL|Rate Limiters: On this page, you can configure the rate limiters. There can be 15 different rate limiters, each ranging from 1 to 1024K packets per second. Under "Ports" and "Access Control List", you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE(s) or ingress port(s).

AES

AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard. The encryption key protocol is applied in 802.1x standard to improve WLAN security. It is an encryption standard by the U.S. government, which will replace DES and 3DES. AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128, 192, or 256 bits.

AMS

AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select. AMS is used for dual media ports (ports supporting both copper (cu) and fiber (SFP) cables. AMS automatically determines if an SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding media. If both SFP and cu cables are inserted, the port will select the preferred media.

APS

APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching. This protocol is used to secure switching that is done bidirectional in both ends of a protection group, as defined in G.8031.

Aggregation

Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability.

(Also Port Aggregation, Link Aggregation).

ARP

ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address, such as an Ethernet address. ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known. Before using IP, the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system.

ARP Inspection

ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device.

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link.

C

CC

CC is an acronym for Continuity Check. It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP.

CCM

CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message. It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to its peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality.

CDP

CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol.

D

DEI

DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator. It is a 1-bit field in the VLAN tag.

DES

DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard. It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting (enciphering) and decrypting (deciphering) binary coded information.

Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher. Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext. The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key.

DHCP

DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network.

DHCP used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway, subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server.

The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique, for example, no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired). Therefore, IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator.

Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address.

DHCP Relay

DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.

The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options: Circuit ID (option 1) and Remote ID (option2). The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on. The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.

The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID. The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.

The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address.

DHCP Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server.

DNS

DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System. It stores and associates many types of information with domain names. Most importantly, DNS translates human-friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer-friendly IP addresses. For example, the domain name www.example.com might translate to 192.168.0.1.

DoS

DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service. In a denial-of-service (DoS) attack, an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services. By targeting at network sites or network connection, an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email, web sites, online accounts (banking, etc.), or other services that rely on the affected computer.

Dotted Decimal Notation

Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets.

An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x.y.z.w, where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255.

DSCP

DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point. It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes.

E

EEE

EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802.3az.

EPS

EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU/T G.8031.

Ethernet Type

Ethernet Type, or EtherType, is a field in the Ethernet MAC header, defined by the Ethernet networking standard. It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.

F

FTP

FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides file writing and reading. It also provides directory service and security features.

Fast Leave

IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously.

H

HTTP

HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web (WWW).

HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted, and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands. For example, when you enter a URL in your browser, this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested web page. The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML, which covers how web pages are formatted and displayed.

Any Web server machine contains, in addition to the web page files it can serve, an HTTP daemon, a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive. The Web browser is an HTTP client, sending requests to server machines. An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection to a particular port on a remote host (port 80 by default). An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message.

HTTPS

HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection.

HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security-sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons.

HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape's Secure Socket Layer (SSL) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering. (HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer, TCP/IP.) SSL uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange.

I

ICMP

ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol. It is a protocol that generated the error response, diagnostic or routing purposes. ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time-stamp or echo transactions. For example, the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection.

IEEE 802.1X

IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based Network Access Control. It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port, establishing a point-to-point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails. With 802.1X, access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.

IGMP

IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships. It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for unicast connections. IGMP can be used for online video and gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses.

IGMP Querier

A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link. This router is called the Querier.

IMAP

IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server.

IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers, and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server.

The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4. It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), but offers additional and more complex features. For example, the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer. If you wish to remove your messages from the server, you must use your mail client to generate local folders, copy messages to your local hard drive, and then delete and expunge the messages from the server.

IP

IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol. It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network.

IP is a "best effort" system, which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent. Each device connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) is given an Internet Protocol address, and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network.

The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4, which has 32-bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses. This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks, the bulk of which remain unused. There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol, IPv6, which would have 128-bits Internet Protocol addresses. This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty-nine zeroes after it. However, IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet.

IPMC

IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast.

IP Source Guard

IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host.

L

LACP

LACP is an IEEE 802.3ad standard protocol. The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port.

LLDP

LLDP is an IEEE 802.1ab standard protocol.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol(LLDP) specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise, to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN, the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station, the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities, and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entities. The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management

Information Base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

LLDP-MED

LLDP-MED is an extension of IEEE 802.1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association (TIA-1057).

LOC

LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network. Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS

M

MAC Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time.

MEP

MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group (ITU-T Y.1731).

MD5

MD5 is an acronym for Message-Digest algorithm 5. MD5 is a message digest algorithm, used cryptographic hash function with a 128-bit hash value. It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991. MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 - The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm.

Mirroring

For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic, the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port. (In this context, mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame.)

Both incoming (source) and outgoing (destination) frames can be mirrored to the mirror port.

MLD

MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6. MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast

listeners on a directly attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol.

MVR

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol for Layer 2 (IP)-networks that enables multicast-traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber-VLANs. The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network, instead the stream(s) are received on the MVR-VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it/them (Wikipedia).

N

NAS

NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server. The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source. A client connects to the NAS, and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client's supplied credentials are valid. Based on the answer, the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource. An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802.1X.

NetBIOS

NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input/Output System. It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network (LAN), and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network (WAN).

The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name, provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.

NFS

NFS is an acronym for Network File System. It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems.

NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network, providing authorized users continuous access to them, which means NFS supports sharing of files, printers, and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network.

NTP

NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.

O

OAM

OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance. It is a protocol described in ITU-T Y.1731 used to implement carrier Ethernet functionality. MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this.

Optional TLVs.

An LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs. For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch includes the TLV in the LLDP frame. These TLVs are known as optional TLVs. If an optional TLV is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame.

OUI

OUI is the organizationally unique identifier. An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of an MAC address.

P

PCP

PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point. It is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame. It is also known as User Priority.

PD

PD is an acronym for Powered Device. In a PoE> system the power is delivered from a PSE (power sourcing equipment) to a remote device. The remote device is called a PD.

PHY

PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer (IEEE-802.3).

PING

Ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer. The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets. Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected.

Ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets. The Ping Request is the packet from the origin computer, and the Ping Reply is the packet response from the target.

Policer

A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames. It is located in front of the ingress queue.

POP3

POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server.

POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it. However, some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time. POP can be thought of as a "store-and-forward" service.

An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e-mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server. IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server.

POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e-mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). You send e-mail with SMTP, and a mail handler receives it on your recipient's behalf. Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP. IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e-mail retrieval. Virtually all modern e-mail clients and servers support both.

PPPoE

PPPoE is an acronym for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks (Wikipedia).

Private VLAN

In a private VLAN, communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted. A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN.

PTP

PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems.

Q

QCE

QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry. It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID.

There are six QCE frame types: Ethernet Type, VLAN, UDP/TCP Port, DSCP, TOS, and Tag Priority. Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes: "Low", "Normal", "Medium", and "High" for individual application.

QCL

QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List. It is the list table of QCEs, containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL. The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class.

QL

QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source. This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port.

QoS

QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service. It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols.

A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data, including high-quality video and delay-sensitive data such as real-time voice. Networks must provide secure, predictable, measurable, and sometimes guaranteed services.

Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end-to-end business solution. Therefore, QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources.

QoS class

Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class, which is used throughout the device for providing queuing, scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class. There is a one to one mapping between QoS class, queue and priority. A QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.

R

RARP

RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address, such as an Ethernet address. RARP is the complement of ARP.

RADIUS

RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service. It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access, authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service.

RDI

RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication. It is an OAM functionality that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP

Router Port

A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device.

RSTP

In 1998, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of STP: the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. Standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP, while at the same time being backwards-compatible with STP.

S

SAMBA

Samba is a program running under UNIX-like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines. Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows, IBM OS/2, and other SMB client machines. Samba uses the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol and Common Internet File System (CIFS), which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking.

Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms, including Linux, most common Unix platforms, OpenVMS, and IBM OS/2.

Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows "Neighborhood Network".

SHA

SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm. It designed by the National Security Agency (NSA) and published by the NIST as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Standard. Hash algorithms compute a fixed-length digital representation (known as a message digest) of an input data sequence (the message) of any length.

Shaper

A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames. It is located after the ingress queues.

SMTP

SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It is a text-based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service. SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail.

SNAP

The SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) is a mechanism for multiplexing, on networks using IEEE 802.2 LLC, more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service Access Point (SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values; it also supports vendor-private protocol identifier.

SNMP

SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol for network management. SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture. It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP.

SNTP

SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. SNTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.

SPROUT

Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology. An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch. SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack.

SSID

Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802.11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach. A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs, and can choose one to connect to based on pre-configuration, or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one (wikipedia).

SSH

SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell. It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network. The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin, TELNET and rsh protocols, which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality (Wikipedia).

SSM

SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication.

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer-2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP.

SyncE

SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet. This functionality is used to make a network 'clock frequency' synchronized. Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized (IEEE 1588).

T

TACACS+

TACACS+ is an acronym for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus. It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers, network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers. TACACS+ provides separate authentication, authorization and accounting services.

Tag Priority

Tag Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.

TCP

TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol

(IP) to exchange the messages between computers.

The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications (for example, Web server and e-mail server) running on the same host.

The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another. It is known as a connection-oriented protocol, which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged. TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end.

Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

TELNET

TELNET is an acronym for Teletype Network. It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client.

TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network. To start a Telnet session, the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password. Then, the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console.

TFTP

TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and provides file writing and reading, but it does not provide directory service and security features.

Toss

Toss is an acronym for Type of Service. It is implemented as the IPv4 Toss priority control. It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6-bit Toss field in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of the Toss field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities, and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit (0\~63).

TLV

TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value. A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information. Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV.

TKIP

TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol. It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm. TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP. The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet.

U

UDP

UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to exchange the messages between computers.

UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). Unlike TCP, UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams, and UDP doesn't provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets. This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order. Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP.

UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer. It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and, optionally, a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact.

Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System (DNS), streaming media applications such as IPTV, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).

UPnP

UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components

User Priority

User Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.

V

VLAN

A method to restrict communication between switch ports. VLANs can be used for the following applications:

VLAN unaware switching: This is the default configuration. All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1. This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1, and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags.

VLAN aware switching: This is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. All ports are VLAN aware. Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames. Other ports are members of one VLAN, set up with this Port VLAN ID, and transmit untagged frames.

Provider switching: This is also known as Q-in-Q switching. Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware, members of one VLAN, and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID. Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware, members of multiple VLANs, and set up to tag all frames. Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag. Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag.

VLAN ID

VLAN ID is a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs.

Voice VLAN

Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN, we can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality.

W

WEP

WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy. WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802.11 wireless networks. Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio, so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks. When introduced in 1999, WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network (Wikipedia).

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity. It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802.11 network, whether 802.11b, 802.11a, dual-band, etc. The term is promulgated by the Wi-Fi Alliance.

WPA

WPA is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access. It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system, Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802.11i standard, and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802.11i was prepared. WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre-WPA wireless network interface cards (through firmware upgrades), but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points. WPA2 implements the full standard, but will not work with some older network cards (Wikipedia).

WPA-PSK

WPA-PSK is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access - Pre Shared Key. WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802.1X authentication server, which distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK mode, security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802.11i standard (Wikipedia)

WPA-Radius

WPA-Radius is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access - Radius (802.1X authentication server). WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802.1X authentication server, which distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK mode, security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802.11i standard (Wikipedia)

WPS

WPS is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Setup. It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network. The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network (Wikipedia).

WRED

WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection. It is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue. A frame's DP level is used as input to WRED. A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion.

WTR

WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore. This is the time a fail on a resource has to be 'not active' before restoration back to this (previously failing) resource is done.